Home

SERVICE MANUAL

1. ell Fr ER KEE Fa 7 Fig 2 1 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE TWD ASD ASU AUD CND KRD models 4 1 2 5 C1 E10 E9 E8E7E6 E5 8 E4 9 2 E1A10
2. Mirror seal its edge to the reference hole position Jj 27 n E m Ug f Platen guide Reference hole Mirror seal 0 0 5mm rm nma 7 II E U LJ Fig 16 159 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 106 l 6 Mirror seal for large original exit sensor 568 Dispositioning from the edge 5 of the guide is not allowed N 0 0 5mm Ref Reverse guide Mirror seal Attach the mirror seal between ribs Do not interfere the rib Fig 16 160 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 107 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 108 17 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 17 1 Construction The power supply unit consists of the AC filter and insulation type DC output circuit 1 AC filter Eliminates noise from the outside and prevents the noise generated by the eguipment from leak ing to the outside 2 DC output
3. Em an m JEO AG Sn i po 704 dwep wesg H over JEJSOLUJSUYJ L 7 weiq Wees nada unag EE Ber z ers E 5 z en E E eni Geer NWHOH eer 18 Tis Was d I m m _ _ _ _ weld EL 2 o TEEN 2 Wa e 1 1 44604 AE 1 SS d E f Jejeeu Jauueog Hr r oer FEE 23 1 a z al uen 5 1 peg 212 212 1ejeeu jeuueos Hr T a 9 9 2 9 sum NASHO LL Fara ee LE LH ler ear ver eer eeor Jejeeu i 1 tjoe 1 Jejeeu jeuueoS sor vsor a SE UOJIMS uonoejep Jesn4 uondo PIEPUEIS AML AYA ANO ANY NSY ASY i LIN 1 nn 8097 IGtNO 101409 1109 HI OSPNO 709 0 5 g E HI Su n eng EE z 9 S 9 aja PSKNO tstNO zsrno i 2 z 4 GE AC 94 mr 3l 2 Slo voz EE Jexyeeig m 1 109 HI 1109 HI o SPIS 1109 13u89 eps l v Jeu 2
4. ai was nho LOI SAS 2 gt gt ze 0662201 Dog 91d m EN d EE yse 4 lt gt T ujoojenig azoj cc ml oo gep eBeuu faan WYNS 4 s CD 191 DISV NVYS 9 ze E 8101 ees 79 Jejdepe m v pleog cl eed weiss desc ere EA ue UUON mime E 9r wol 9131 1 Bre 1 s yy INOd33 S lt a 1915 19 OLOI 918 1 20 gt E lt a IRCH 9 8 Sch pieoq 915 xv4 gt 22 E 9414 Wein 12443 S Di T 991 gt 8101 i 8 8 A9 120 pieoq pJeoq SAS e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 2 5 Installation Replacement of Covers A Front cover Upper Lower 1 Open the front cover upper Turn 2 hinge pins to point at the front side and pull them out upward Then take off the front cover upper Front cover upper 2 Open the front cover lower Then take off the cover by lifting it up f M M 27
5. Mylar e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Fig 16 157 16 104 Ref Large original exit guide Attach the Mylar passing through the guide window to prevent twisting and too strong contact on the edge of the guide window og March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 1 4 Mirror seal for small original reverse sensor 566 Ref 0 0 5 mm Attach the mirror seal L p with fitting the edge of it to the rib Do not interfere the Ref i2 0 0 5mm Under transport guide for small original Fig 16 158 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 105 l 5 X Mirror seal for read sensor 569 Reference hole Attach the mirror seal with locating
6. Original width detection sensor 2 Original width detection sensor 1 Fig 16 150 77 opening closing sensor Fig 16 151 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 100 G 13 Small original exit sensor 567 Small original reverse sensor 566 1 Take off the ADF right cover LU P 16 86 B 4 ADF right cover 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the sensors with its bracket 3 Disconnect 1 connector to take off the small original exit sensor 4 Remove 1 screw to take off the sensor plate 5 Remove 1 screw to take off the small original reverse sensor Small original reverse sensor Fig 16 153 H Platen guide 1 Remove 2 screws fixing the platen guide 2 Move the guide to the direction of the arrow in the figure so that the right edge of the guide can be seen 3 When its right edge is seen take out the platen guide in the direction of the arrow in the figure Fig 16 154 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 101 I Mylar and mirror seal 1 1 Mirror seal for original length detection sensor 563 Ref 0 0 5mm Upper guide
7. 5 ell 1 5 B1 EE EE EE E Neo Von a B2 UN D1 C2 D ch D3 C9 u CG D2 C3 i ca D5 C4 4 5 11 12 ex EKOO 2 eS C4 CT 19 110 C6 16 C8 F6 F4 F5 F3 F2 1 15 17 18 p G3 a Al G T SCH Li H1 H 4 NI Te J3 10 J5 9 4 Allg 5 d HR i K2 K6 LS a K4 J1 1 amp c K7 m IAAL 29 AN 1 16 L5 t L3 L4 m 17 K1 of a DIR Tux I 1 EA NS 1 Bh N2 3 N4 N5 Fig 2 2 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 1 Exposure lamp G5 Reverse sensor 1 2 Reflector G6 Reverse sensor 2 A3 Mirror 1 H1 Horizontal transport roller 1 A4 Mirror 2 H2 Horizontal transport roller 2 A5 Mirror 3 H3 Horizontal transport roller 3 A6 ADF original glass H4 Horizontal transport roller 4 AT Original glass 11 Bypass pickup roller 8 Lens 12 Bypass feed roller 9 CCD driving PC board CCD board Bypass separation roller A 10 Scanning section control PC board 14 Bypass transport roller SLG board B1 Laser optical unit 15 Registration roller B2
8. 0 0 5mm Mirror seal il o Fig 16 155 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 102 l 2 Mylar for read sensor 569 Attach the Mylar aligning the edge of it with the corner end of the guide Dispositioning from the corner end of the guide is not allowed rJ Platen outside guide o Attach the Mylar o passing through the guide window to prevent twisting and too strong contact on the edge of the guide window i E e i o o a 15221 rm Fig 16 156 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 103 l 3 Mylar for large original exit sensor 568 0 0 5 mm 5 gt 4 Attach the Mylar aligning the doublesided tape edge with the Ref guide window edge Double sided tape must not be out of the guide window edge 00
9. Carriage 1 Fig 6 36 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Remove the tension spring Tension spring Carriage wire Fig 6 38 4 Remove the wire and slant the carriage 2 to take it out upward ut o Se U Carriage 2 J Lamp inverter board INV EXP 1 Take off the carriage 1 CO P 6 21 H Carriage 1 Lamp inverter board 2 Disconnect 2 connectors and remove 2 screws to take off the lamp inverter board March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION K Scan motor M1 1 Take off the top rear cover and the rear cover CI P 2 44 E Top rear cover P 2 47 L Rear cover 2 Disconnect the connector of the scan motor Then remove 2 screws to take off the scan motor Note Adjust the belt tension with a belt tension jig when installing the motor Adjustment procedure for the belt tension 1 Remove 5 screws to take off the DF bracket 2 Hook the belt tension jig to the position as shown in the figure 3 Loosen the 2 screws which fix the motor bracket and then tighten them when the belt is strained 4 Remove the belt tension jig and install the DF bracket
10. 16 1 566111 16 2 16 3 Drive System EE 16 3 16 4 5ignal Block ER Okna un 16 6 lee Ee 16 7 16 5 1 4 single sided feeding Operational condition 4 original Reproduction ratio 100 16 7 16 5 2 A4 two sided feeding Operational condition 4 original Reproduction ratio 100 16 12 16 5 3 A4 single sided feeding Operational condition original Reproduction ratio 100 16 20 16 5 4 A3 two sided feeding Operational condition original Reproduction ratio 100 16 24 16 5 5 Single sided feeding at mixed original mode Operational condition A4 R and FOLIO originals Reproduction ratio 100 16 32 JOUER 16 37 16 61 Jams feeding SQCUOM EE 16 37 16 6 2 Jams at transporting section en is renin 16 37 16 6 3 Jams at large original exit section 16 38 16 6 4 Jams at small original reverse section 16 39 16 6 5 Jams at small original exit section 16 40 16 6 6 Jams at intermediate transport section 16 40 16 6 7 Jams when the cover is open 16 41 16 6 8 Jams when 24V power is OFF sise 16 41 16 6 9 J
11. ALS N9S eufis yes pes Josues peoy Josuas Josues ujbue pee Josues due Josues samo Aen 10SU9S uonoejep Aen Dun Fig 16 90 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 70 ded origina 5 0 Two sheets of 4 two 2902 499 0 2161 6102 Lebo Vive OLLZ 9861 928 0121 Z9EL 928 9861 SE8L 9101 tv9 866 9751 209 299 000 00GL 000L 008 NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 MOD 1 doe 1 MO H MO NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 MOO 1 M09 dojs 1 MO MO NO 440 doys MO NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 MOO IN M99 1 M99 dois MO NO 440 PIEMUMOG doys piomdn NO 440 NO 330 plouajos jews Josuas ews Josuas 5 jeuis jews Josues Jo
12. 7 80 1P67 04801000 HHH 6 2918 ZVU IT d slo I 01 75 gt evy LI ses C wu ee 017 219915 di 570010520 600 720 850 PC BOARDS HZEOLVIS ol 1692 0012 982 SHY 9114 HZEOLY IS 18 9 D Fig 18 16 717082 LIY D r 1518 ANN KZEOLVIS PF2293K300A PCB CONTROL R63 R54 C48 c r sidi vial 82 782 1 16 PWA F ADF C zL9 m ew TOO OER Oz TP35 69 P32 eke EN March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PC BOARDS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 18 10 TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION 2 17 2 HIGASHIGOTANDA SHINAGAWA KU TOKYO 141 8664 JAP
13. sw wun 0009 0057 0007 0092 000 0092 NO 330 NO 330 NO 330 1 M99 dois 1 MO NO 440 NO 330 NO 440 NO 440 MOO 1 M99 dojs 1 MO MO NO 440 dojs D MO MO NO 330 NO 330 330 IN M99 M99 dois MO NO 440 das 330 NO 330 yxe jews Josues jews Josues jews 100w yxe jews Josues Josuas 1 piouojos 491101 yxe 1 eBie1 JOJOW eBie1 ALS N9S eubis yes peay Josues peay 105 5 Josues ujBue Deet 108095 due Jojouu yy Josues emo Aen Dun Josuas Bunir Fig 16 85 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 65 2969 2119 68 9524 2609 179 E
14. Fig 16 20 When the original has proceeded a specified distance after the small original exit sensor 567 had detected the trailing edge of the original the small original exit motor M40 stops rotating Then the operation ends after 2nd original has been discharged Fig 16 21 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 11 16 5 2 A4 two sided feeding Operational condition 4 original Reproduction ratio 100 1 Original setting Same operation as 16 5 1 1 2 Lifting of the lifting tray Same operation as 16 5 1 2 3 Start of separation Same operation as 16 5 1 3 4 Start of feeding Same operation as 16 5 1 4 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 12 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 5 Start of top side scanning Scanning starts after receiving the original transport signal from the engine At the same time the original stop signal is reset The read motor M36 starts to rotate forward and to separate 2nd origi nal When the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section both SCN STR and the large original exit solenoid 5015 turn ON When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and reached to the 3rd roller the large original exit motor M39 starts to ro
15. Fig 9 7 Tray up motor drive signal Signal PFC CPU output Motor driver output Motor Status PUTRM 0 PUTRM 1 PUTRM 0A PUTRM 1A PLTRM 0 PLTRM 1 PLTRM 0A PLTRM 1A L L OFF high impedance OFF L H L H Forward rotation CW H L H L Reverse rotation CCW H H L L Brake March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 9 15 9 5 Feedmotor control circuit The feed motor is a DC motor driven by the control signal output from the CPU and ASIC on the LGC board and rotates the pick up roller feed roller separation roller and transport roller for each drawer the tandem LCF and bypass unit When the ON OFF signal PFMON 0 output from the PFC CPU is L level the feed motor is driven at a speed based on the freguency of the reference clock signal PFMCK 1 output from the ASIC LGC board 62 Buffer 1C57 PFMON 0 PFC CPU Feed motor PFMCK 1 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 9 6 Transport motor control circuit The transport motor is a stepping motor driven by the control signal output from the PFC CPU on the LGC board and rotates the intermediate transport roller The transport motor is driven by the pulse signal 0 0 0 0 output from the motor driver These pulse signals are formed based on th
16. March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 6 Remove 2 fixing screws on the front side 7 Liftthe Large Capacity Feeder LCF and take it off from the slide rail Note Be careful when lifting the Large Capacity Feeder LCF because it is heavy Fig 2 65 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 3 COPY PROCESS Image processing 2 Originalexposure 3 Scanning Writing Xenon lamp gt CCD Semiconductive laser 29W 600 dpi 7500 pixel Pw 3 9 nJ mm 520 600 720 Pw 3 0 nJ mm 850 1 Charging grid voltage 500V 300V 900V Toner Carrier 10 Discharge V LED array Wavelength 660nm 14 5 1 Development Magnetic roller 9 Blade cleaning Bias 394V 200 800 DC AC 8 Brush cleaning 7 Discharging lt Fusing Bypass feeding Fuser roller Transfer Separation Drawer feeding 700 1450W 6 70 pA 520 600 720 LCF feeding 85 pA 850 Cleaning brush Blade 5 pA Fig 3 1 1 Charging 6 Transfer Negatively charges the surface of the pho toconductive drum 4 2 Original exposure Converts images on the original into optical signals i 3 Scanning Converts image optical signals into electri c
17. 3 Move the carriage 1 to the position where the side of the frame is cut out and then pull Er its bracket downward Le All Sch Carriag 2 U Oto OL 4 Disconnect 1 connector of the SLG board Then remove 3 stickers and release the har Sticker ness from 2 clamps March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION 5 Rotate the carriage 1 in the direction shown in the figure at right paying attention not to touch the mirror Then take out the carriage 1 Note When installing the carriage 1 fix its bracket temporarily at the cutout of the frame After that move the carriage until it touches the left side of the frame and then tighten 2 screws to fix it permanently I Carriage 2 1 Take off the carriage 1 P 6 21 H Carriage 1 2 Install the wire holder jig on the wire pulley to prevent the wire from being loosened e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION 1 2000 1400 Fig 6 35 1 22 lo EX H
18. Fig 5 5 The LCD panel is an STN blue mode transmissive type LCD with 640 x 240 dot display capacity consists of a driver LSI frame printed circuit board and lateral type CFL backlight STN Super Twisted Nematic March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL 2 Block diagram HV NC o NC o GND o lt gt d 1 VSS 0 4 VLCD om HK Rth 1 CCFT 1 WW AM AWN Y LN 1 4 2 1 640 _ Be 5 SE gt D101 2 1 2 2 2 640 Bias ratio generation circuit vo 120 Out oL 1 LI D102 __ im e ui 1 LCD 1 WW 640 x 240 Dots 1V2 por L D SET 120 Out T 1 0102 ___ 240 1 240 2 cm 646 gt VDD 2 e vo 1600 1600 ie i vi M 999 E102 em E102 E101 1 H o E VDD VO V2 VSS FRM o LOAD o DF E DISP o E CP o D3 DO Fig 5 6 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 5 14 3 LCD drive operation The following describes the drive operation to display the message READY a The System CPU reguests the Flash ROM data to display READY b The Fla
19. Switching regurator cover Fig 2 56 4 Disconnect 7 connectors 5 Release the hook to take off the switching regulator Switching regurator Note When installing or taking off the switching regulator and its cover be sure that their har nesses are not caught M111 Fig 2 57 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 2 7 Removal and Installation of Options A Finisher 1 Shut down the eguipment and unplug the power cable 2 Take off the connector cover and unplug the interface cable Connector cover Interface cable Fig 2 58 3 Remove 1 screw and take off the finisher from the slide rail Note When moving the finisher unit by itself be careful that it does not topple over Slide rail Fig 2 59 B Large Capacity Feeder LCF 1 Shut down the equipment and unplug the power cable 2 Press the button to separate the Large Capacity Feeder LCF from the equipment e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Remove 1 screw take off the connector cover Connector cover 4 Disconnect the interface cable of the Large Capacity Feeder LCF 1 OI Interface cable 5 Remove 2 fixing screws on the rear side
20. D i C10 Wf s J9 K8 I1 L8 L9 M8 M9 Fig 2 4 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 11 Scan motor C10 Fuser motor D6 Developer unit motor E13 Drum motor E14 Cleaning brush drive motor F7 Transfer belt motor F8 Transfer belt cam motor G7 Exit motor G8 Reverse motor 19 Registration motor 110 Feed motor 111 Tray up motor 1 112 2 48 1st drawer transport clutch 49 151 drawer feed clutch K8 2nd drawer transport clutch K9 2nd drawer feed clutch 18 drawer transport clutch L9 3rd drawer feed clutch M8 Ath drawer transport clutch M9 Ath drawer feed clutch N6 Tandem LCF tray up motor 7 Tandem LCE end motor e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 2 2 Electric Parts Layout 1 Scanner unit a 4 series Fig 2 5 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 60
21. Control voltage signal Developer material AID converter Fig 12 7 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 12 12 5 2 Operation of auto toner sensor 1 Functions of the auto toner sensor Initializing function When the copier is set up or when the developer material is replaced The automatic adjustment is made so that the output of the auto toner sensor input value of the main CPU will be 2 45 to 2 85V for the toner density of new developer material Toner density stabilizing function During the printing operation Through the following phases the toner density is kept constant The toner is consumed The toner density is lowered The output change of the auto toner sensor caused by humidity is detected new toner transport motor new toner supply motor and hopper motor are driven The new toner supply motor and the hopper motor are driven only when the new toner is left in the toner cartridge and also the front cover upper is closed toner is supplied to the developer unit from the sub hopper toner cartridge and the cle toner hopper Detection and release of empty status of the developer unit The empty status of the developer unit is detected in the following procedure The new toner supply motor and the new toner transport motor are driven The output value of the auto toner sensor remains the same The toner density is not chang
22. F1 1AT 125V or 250V gt PF WP FR 40 lt CN880 Fig 18 14 15 PWA F FIL Only for NAD SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e STUDIO600 700 gt PF WP FR 40 lt PWB F FIL 390Z 6LE09532000 C1 1 250 HALOGEN FREE PWB LEAD FREE PCBA TOSHIBA Fig 18 15 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PC BOARDS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC GI Ici 324 27 TP29 62354 2 ODO eso 1017 mg 164 TP37 TP46
23. jews Josues jews 10SU8S lt ES Josues ejeipeuuejur JOSUOS se j xe e61e7 Jojoui HLS NOS jeuBis yeys Buipees Jojow peay Josuas peay 105 5 Josues ujbue jueuinooq 105 5 Ajduie yi Josuas emo Bunyr Josuas Fig 16 83 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 63 Two sheets of two sided 2892 494 2692 1872 bebe 296 LLOZ ogre Ovel Fig 16 84 0972 or 820 662 CPLL 90 8892 1872 226 608 086 68 1 229 9904 Z894 908 SEI 299 426 Evil 90 299 BE 820 94 6 016 evo 86 9 4706 928 66 1 EZE 0052 0002 009 000 009 0 sw Jun NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 MOO 1 M09 doe 1
24. 4159 6208 9199 759 6 69 eie 21299 8719 6992 2 1022 _ DEE ET BEER 6997 e LLL becl 0092 sw wun 0002 0099 0009 0098 0008 NO 330 NO 330 NO 330 MOO 1 M99 dois 1 MO NO 440 NO 330 NO 440 NO 330 MOO 1 M99 dois 1 MO MO NO 330 das D MO MO NO 330 NO 330 330 IN M99 M99 dois NO 440 das 330 NO 330 yxe jews Josues jews Josues jews 100w yxe jews 105 5 podsue Josuas 1 piouojos 491101 yxe 1 eBie1 JOJOW 1 ALS N9S jeuBis yes peay Josues peay 105 5 Josues ujBue Deet 108095 due Jojouu yy Josues emo Aen Dun Josuas Bunir Fig 16 86 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUME
25. LOES 2619 8104 2019 6129 2208 2604 sw Jun 0002 0059 0009 0056 0008 NO 330 NO 330 NO 330 M99 1 M99 dois 1 MO MO NO 330 330 NO 440 NO 440 M99 1 M99 dois 1 MO MO NO 440 dojs 1 MO H MO NO 330 NO 440 NO 440 IN M99 M99 dois MO NO 440 doe 330 NO 440 prouejos yxe jews Josues jews Josues esjo o1 jews 100w jews Josues Josuas jeuiBuo plougjos 19101 efje JOJOW HLS N9S JeuBis 5 100w pe y Josues peoy 105 5 Josues ujBue Deet 105 5 Adus Joyow y Josuas emo Aen Dun Josuas 16 93 Fig e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 73 16 11 Circuits 1 Input circuits for read sensor 569
26. yxe e64e1 eue Jojoui ALS N9S JeuBbis ygs Buipesy 103011 pesy Josues peay 105 5 Josues Bua pay 105 5 Aydwa Josues Jomo Aen Dun Josues uonoejep Aen Dun Fig 16 89 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 69 826 960 Den 9v6c 8964 69 2 4214 6664 65 0 4214 2192 sw JUN 000 NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 1 MOO doe D MO MO NO 330 330 330 NO 330 1 M09 doe D MO H MO NO 440 dois 0 MO H MO NO 440 NO 440 NO 330 M99 IN M99 M99 dois MO NO 330 dois piomdn NO 330 330 jews Josues jews Josues EUIBIIO jews jews Josues JOSUSS oble 49 1041 oue plougjos
27. Wire cleaner Main charger wire WCLMTA 0A 9 WCLMTA 0 WCLMTB 0A WCLMTB 0 Motor driver Fig 10 2 Drive signal of wire cleaner drive motor L Low level H High level Signal WCLMTA 0A WCLMTB 0A ial L L Off H L Forward rotation Stop position gt Home position L H Reverse rotation Home position gt Stop position H H Brake Input signal of wire cleaner position detection switch Signal Low level High level MCLSW 0A Cleaner detected Cleaner not detected During cleaning Cleaner reached to its home position or its stop position March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION 10 3 10 4 High voltage Transformer Control Circuit 10 4 1 General description The high voltage transformer is controlled by the on off signal of each bias output from the ASIC on the LGC board and the reference voltage Vctr output through a D A converter The high voltage trans former generates the output current or the output voltage of each bias based on the input 24V voltage 24 VG LGC board IC58 High voltage transformer Se 24VB Main CPU Adjustment value HVTM 0A Leakage detection Main charger bias Main charger wire bias HVDAC 0A gt Grid bias Developer bias 0 HVDDC 0A gt Devel AC gt eveloper
28. D Lifting tray upper limit pex en den A n CN6 8 emm d 17 detetion sensor Sea cn 1 Lifting tray lower limit t ti CNI4 8 SGND Sa R38 1017 2 9 etetion sensor sons Fe gt Original intermediate ve E transport sensor TIE Sons M aal N H DER Small original exit az ve CN2 2 SGND ist i R20 2 b 184 9 CNe 3 SHS 1 2 Jam access cover SE sensor c3 EL a ia os amp T n 1 2 RIS T m Original tray sensor asi ev P E CN5 2 R18 RI 9 cxs 3 TRYS H 1 ay 1 1 Pao Se 14 p Original tray width av s TRVR o elen 8 dt Bai sensor me ______ 2871 75043 E E Fig 16 105 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 82 Small original reverse sensor Read sensor Large original exit sensor Original length detection sensor E 1 45V zo Ria 2 mer 6 777 ON d Aen 5 5V pu
29. Signal RGTA 0 e 0 status 0 RGTVR 0 RGTD 0 Pulse signal L Rotation when accelerating decelerating H Rotation at a constant speed e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM RGTA 0A RGTB 0A Registration motor RGTC 0A RGTD 0A March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 9 8 Tandem LCE tray up motor end motor The tandem LCF tray up motor and end fence motor which are DC motors driven by the control signal output from the PFC CPU on the LGC board move the tray up in the tandem LCF and shift the end fence The motor driver outputs the drive signal TLTRM 0 1A TLTMM 0 1A to the motor based on the control signal TLTRM 0 1 TLTMM 0 1 output from the PFC CPU The motor operates the forward rotation reverse rotation brake or stop according to the status of these drive signals LGC board TLTRM 0 TLTRM 0A Fe IC8 Tandem LCF tray up motor TLTRM 1 Motor driver i TLTRM 1A 57 0 TLTMM 0A Tandem LCF Motor driver end fence motor TLTMM 1 TLTMM 1A gt Fig 9 11 Tray up motor end fence motor drive signal Signal PFC CPU output Motor driver output Motor stat s TLTRM 0 TLTRM 1 TLTRM 0A TLTRM 1A TLTMM 0 TLTMM 1 TLTMM 0A TLTMM 1A L L OFF high impedance OFF L H L H Reverse rotation CCW H L H L Forward
30. A4 Series LT Series Original Original glass Original Original glass PERS T APS R APS C N APSS APSO APSO APS 2 8 Fig 6 10 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 6 6 2 Process of original size detection 1 When the equipment is in the original size detection mode the carriage 1 is set at its home position 2 When the is opened the sensors receive the light reflected from the original and if one ofthe matrix conditions shown in 4 for original sizes is satisfied the size of the original is instantly detected 3 The output signal from each sensor is input to the CPU on the scanner control PC board to deter mine the size of the original A4 Series 1 5 1VD LT Series I I I ApsR H AW I I 5 2 LE AW ch I Reflection type H E Reflection type photosensor APS3 prp Ww Scanner photosensor I CPU APS 2 Hi d I I I APS 1 aj AW I 8G SLG b i _SG______S lLGt _ Fig 6 11 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC o 5 1VD I I I APS R H EM i I I APS C 51 IC10 I I Scanner aps 3 O A CPU i I APS 2 AW I I e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION Sensor detection points A4 Series A5 B5 4
31. 2 Motor driver DRMAB 0 DRMBB 0 Fig 11 5 Drum motor drive signal Signal DRCLK 0 DRMEN DRMVR DRMCW 0 SE Pulse signal L L L Forward rotation when accelerating decelerat ing L L H Reverse rotation when accelerating deceler ating L H L Forward rotation at a constant speed L H H Reverse rotation at a constant speed H Stop e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT 11 6 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 11 6 Disassembly Replacement A Cleaner unit 1 Take off the main charger LU P 10 9 Main charger 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to pull out the cleaner unit Cleaner unit w Main charger Fig 11 6 B Drum thermistor THM5 and Drum 1 Take off the cleaner unit LU P 11 7 Cleaner unit Connector 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw to take off the drum thermistor with its bracket 3 Remove 1 screw to take off the drum ther mistor Note a Drum thermistor When installing the thermistor tighten it with the 0 2 0 6Nem torque 4 Turn the cam to release the pressure of the cleaning blade 5 Remove 3 screws to take off the drum shaft 6 Drum shaft Fig 11 8 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT 6 Take out the drum upward 7 Remove 3 scre
32. 8 86 22 NO PEN 11 lt 0061 m N IEUPIS Jojoui 2612 96 rd N Josuas uorjensi6es 4354 956 Josues J MEJP 15 666666666 NO 151 330 NO wing NO 440 due eunsodx3 puemyoeg doe 4 0201 902 0056 0005 0057 0007 0092 0002 0092 000 005 000 008 0 sw Jun e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION Fig 4 1 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO850 440 Josuas jixe JIUN Joen 8662 oerz NO un LT Lif ff 1L o LS 330 726 uosiq T LT 1 11 440 seq 9292 P L FF 6 LI LL ILL TT 440 9826 gcc NO KE 330 a 80 1 981L RINAOAN 440 uogeJisiBo Seen rt NO y 171 NO Josues uoneJisiBe Set UE AsO nensiDos 11 NO Josues JoMeJp s Se De 330 pee Diet 121210101141 440 JBMEJP 15 2 Sat NO Yyoynjo 15 1 440 JOJOU NO d 717771 NO due eunsodx Em 0 440 d zl piemyoeg do 9991 9 0 ENO ued 020 902 N 4 5 0098 0008 0067 0007 00G 000 0052 000 006 000 006 0
33. 1 From power ON to standby status When the eguipment is turned ON the tray up motor 1 M21 is activated and 1st drawer tray starts to rise When the 1st drawer tray up sensor 532 is turned ON gt L the tray up motor 1 M21 is turned OFF and the tray is stopped At this time if the 1st drawer empty sensor 531 is OFF L it is judged that there is no paper in the drawer With the 1st drawer empty sensor 531 being ON there is paper the drawer The tray stops at the raised position regardless of availability of paper Then the tray up motor 1 M21 starts to rotate in reverse and 2nd drawer starts to be lifted 2nd drawer tray is stopped in the same manner as 1st drawer tray and the 1st drawer empty sensor 531 detects if there is paper in the drawer When the drawer is not completely inserted when the eguipment is turned ON the tray for that drawer tray is not raised When the drawer is inserted completely the drawer tray is raised and checks the availability of the paper When either of the sensors at the transport path is ON meaning there is paper on the transport path when the eguipment is turned ON it is determined that a paper jam has occurred and no operation is enabled until the paper is removed Standby status After the drawer tray is moved up and availability of paper is checked as described above the eguipment enters the standby state In the standby mode the drawer tray remains
34. Jojoui jueuinoog 4o0sues Adus Jojyow yi Josues uonoejep samo Josues uonoejep 1eddn Fig 16 88 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 68 Two sheets of A4 single sided original 090 9661 8054 4176 Bret 9 04 28 2 219 2022 7002 1881 6281 1126 116 698 vest test 8v6L 668 peg 89 1 1884 ECHL 092 POL 866 60 L 6921 809 299 808 89 1 0092 sw un 000c 00GL 000L 00G NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 MDD 1 MOO dois 1 M9 H MO NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 MOO 1 M09 dojs 1 M9 MO NO 440 doys 1 MO H MO NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 MOO IN MOO 1 M99 doe NO 440 PIEMUMOG doys piomdn NO 440 NO 440 plouajos jews Josuas jjeuis Josuas jeuis 103011 jews Josues Josuas oB1e1 je plouajos
35. Na 5 1 5 1 Operation Area and Display Area 5 1 5 2 Items Shown on the Control Panel 5 2 a ERST 5 4 5 3 Relation between the Equipment State and Operator s 5 9 54 Operation EE 5 13 5 4 1 Dotmatrix LOD e re DIE 5 13 9 4 2 LED display ekout eor kan EERE OA 5 16 5 5 Disassembly and Replacement siennes 5 17 6 SCANNING SEC TION iren oct udal 6 1 6 1 FUNCHOM E 6 1 0 2 COMSTUCHOM n 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 3 1 Scanner motor MI 6 4 6 3 2 Two phase motor drive circuit fixed current 2 6 4 6 4 Control for Exposure Lamp 6 6 6 4 1 General description uictis s a a loan 6 6 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTENTS 0 4 2 Exposure EE 6 7 6 4 3 Control circuit for exposure nn 6 8 0 5 CEB Control ME 6 9 6 5 1 Opto electronic conversion 6 9 6 5 2 lead ee La ban Tr egies 6 9 6 6 Automatic Original Size Detection Cireunt 6 10 6 6 1 Principle of original stzedeiechon 6 10 6 6 2 Process of original size 6 11 6 7 Disassembly and Replacement ss 6 15 IMAGE PROCESSING siririna annen arne aeieea a
36. of originals 6 Transfer Separation Transfer Transfer is a process of transferring the toner image visible image formed on the drum surface onto the paper An electric charge applied by the high power supply flows to the transfer belt from the power supply roller Then it flows to the paper and photo conductor The toner which has been developed on the photo conductor is transferred to this paper with an electric charge Drum Transfer belt Paper Fig 3 15 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY PROCESS Separation The paper is absorbed to the belt and separated from the drum by the electrostatic attraction act ing between the belt plus charge and the polarization charge minus charge on the bottom sur face of the paper a2 e Drum X Aluminum 904 e Paper Transfer belt Power supply roller 1 Fig 3 16 Reference Combined use of transfer belt and separation finger To prevent the copy paper from failing to be separated during the operation due to incom plete transfer belt charging or absorption of moisture and thus jamming up the cleaner a separation finger mechanically separates any copy paper which fails to be separated Separation finger IN Rotation of drum ul 75 TS Paper movement Transfer belt Fig 3 17 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY
37. CN214 MNT 2 gt EP GW FR 40 lt 12 22 E 1c24 V ttoas eee 8 13 T Sie ncrsosru 5 E POTE Gre 5 IM 10 2 z I E une 4 iw 3 BE 5 BH 1 ris 5 MES i Seg EE HALOGEN FREE PWB z ez EUER Ki 2u Am SaB LEAD FREE PCBA SE S la EST ET I 5 wart 9 1029 7407 RD oe E 2 lt E 0255 ESSE Sen CSR s 2 2025 cn I 58 HS A ed CL 2 lt DS ES aro ar R7 Js SEL HA M 57 5 a 10 16 reegt 5 942 58 e ae Fe1 2142 TT 94 5 AS x 5 Er 25 105 H032 iT DH GE RES 2z _ Eus 5 8 2 854 6 ER 5 nte Z ua nas T g 2 ues sg Hg ES 55 si 25 Ri see ER z gee 52 2 cn Versa 8 H SS 8 Ka 5 Re 2 KO ALS540 5 9 aH m IIS RAZ RAS 24 2 VHC123 TCIWI4FU SE 5 enl m 1 39 wi 3 ban er Fc zo Se e vacuis 58 8 7 Bon 88 T 255 1 5 TP20 100 50 1c12 P H ee ET EUIS 1 22221 z 1018 g 8 5 Je 55 SE i 2 z s TO 6LE09495000 SHIBA PWB F PLG 390M pics cios las RIIT ned cios ai z R118
38. Read motor forward rotation Large original NO exit sensor ON Back side aligned Specified pulse passed Large original exit motor stopped Pre feeding control from the 1st roller started YES Trailing edge control for large original discharging completed Fig 16 78 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 58 Large original exit motor stopped March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 Leading edge control during transporting Leading edge control during transporting started Specified pulse of original leading edge passed from the 3rd roller Intermediate transport roller Large original exit motor reverse rotation Back side Back side Small original exit motor reversal sensor ON Small original exit solenoid ON Leading edge control during transporting completed Small original exit motor reverse rotation Original intermediate transport sensor ON NO Fig 16 79 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 59 13 Trailing edge control during transporting Trailing edge control during transporting started Original intermediate transport sensor OFF NO Specified pulse
39. FAN1587AM15X 2 cuo 1 100 1082 Fig 18 1 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 570010520 600 720 850 PC BOARDS 18 1 2 PWA F LGC m m T o A18 17 D 885 OW a gt 1678 1084 TOG2SOBAFGZEL F EH 1 wenden 334W 16 50 6 1023 Ze EH Sing DCK 10750V o at C488 98 1 56 GE SNTAOTDR F 1 1082 5 672 210 51 27210751 E On 10103 SNT4070R F RF 1111 59 ps TD62308AFG EL F I C487 cages E I looo oo fas ege SNTAOTOR F est FE 21 1253 TA AZOK 8 51 Tei OH 2 E 1045 O 100 500 OF 100 500 16125 ai TATS399FO EL F Yes cus mg I H 1e mt 1058 Z 1054 E T062308AFG EL F s I cn 100 50v 3678 1 5 TAVHCO2MTCX FT 1C46 2 1024
40. Reproduction ratio and paper size are not selected Size change is always observed and detected Carriage 1 stays at the standby position even if the reproduction ratio changes corresponding to the change of the original size When the APS operation sensor is ON Retains the latest original size or no original state recognized right before the APS operation sen sor is turned ON regardless of the state of the APS sensor output signals March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION About reflection type photosensor The reflection type photosensor is comprised of an infrared light emitting diode and a phototransistor It uses the pulse modulation to detect an original Original np Ss a Phototransistor Fig 6 14 The light emitting diode is driven by a pulse having a 130 usec cycle and an 8 usec ON time When the phototransistor receives the same signal as this pulse it is determined that there is an original The pulse modulation is performed inside the reflection type phototransistor e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 6 7 Disassembly and Replacement A Original glass 1 Take off the top right cover LU 2 44 C Top right cover 2 Remove 3 screws to take off the original glass holder 3 Remove 2 caps and 2 screws to take off the original glass March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCA
41. 0009 sw 0057 0007 0092 000 0092 NO 330 NO 330 NO 330 MOO 1 M99 dois 1 MO NO 440 NO 330 NO 440 NO 440 M99 1 M99 dojs D MO MO NO 440 dojs 1 MO MO NO 330 NO 330 330 IN M99 M99 dois NO 440 das 330 NO 330 yxe jews Josues jews Josues jews 100w yxe jews Josues Josues 1 piouojos 491101 yxe 1 eBie1 1 815 05 rubis 5 peay Josues peay 105 5 Josues ujBue Deet 108095 due Jojouu yy Josues emo Aen Dun Josuas Bunir 16 92 Fig March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 72 98617 0802 beg 2219 ZLES 1619 20 9 2208 LOES 6 29 2604
42. A E Printer 1 I E Server Network sys Semiconductive laser element Eguipment Photo storage control conductive section section drum i HDD LGC eas yes Spe gt Fig 7 1 The followings are the boards used for image processing Board Function Scanning section control PC board SLG High guality image processing image memory editing editing processing gamma correction gradation processing scanner high guality image processing and exter nal output system interface Laser control PC board PLG Smoothing processing external input system interface image area control laser related control and printer high guality image processing March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 IMAGE PROCESSING 05 07 Image of an original placed on the original table is scanned by the optical system The CCD Charge Coupled Device reads the optical image signals and converts them into the electrical signals The elec trical signals are amplified and undergo analog to digital conversion then are changed into digital sig nals Shading correction correction of variance in CCD elements and the light source is performed and the digital signal is output as an image signal from the scanning section to image CCD Signal A D Shading processing amplifica
43. eulBuo plouejos 41101 J X9 plouejos eulBuo 100 1 HLS NOS jeu amp is ygs J0joui peas Josues peas 40sues Josues uornoejep ue 40j0UJ Deet 4osues Josues Jamo 105 5 Aen Fig 16 82 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 62 8857 LOVE 8 92 EE DEER 222 41097 4627 2652 252 Osce 2 80 OZLE E DEE SERGE ee E LEO 2262 9 76 LEO 7666 a EE 05 6 97 6 50 6 6907 E Z O Y 56 6 ER 000g sw JUN 0057 0007 0092 0006 0052 NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 D MOO dojs 1 MO H MO NO 330 440 NO 410 NO 440 1 M99 dojs 1 MO NO 330 dois 0 MO NO 330 AsO NO 410 MOO W 1 M99 doe NO 440 PIEMUMO dojs piomdn NO 440 NO 440
44. open RADF close APS operation 564 APS OFF APS ON Jam access cover open close sensor Cover close Cover open 561 Original empty sensor 560 No original Original existing Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor Upper limit Original width detection sensor 1 556 Original existing No original Original width detection sensor 2 S57 Original existing No original Original width detection sensor 3 558 Original existing No original Original registration 555 Original existing No original Original tray sensor 553 Original existing No original Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor Lower limit 562 Original intermediate transport sensor Original existing No original 570 Small original exit sensor 567 Original existing No original Read sensor 569 No original Original existing Small original reverse sensor 566 No original Original existing Large original exit sensor 568 No original Original existing Original length detection sensor 563 No original Original existing Sensor Connector level more than 4V Connector level less than 1 V Original tray width sensor 554 Guide maximum Guide minimum e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 84 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 13 Disassembly A Reversing Automatic Document Feeder unit 1 Take off the rear cover
45. 5 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to take off the laser unit cooling fan Fig 8 14 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Laser optical unit 1 Remove the laser unit cooling fan LU P 8 12 A Laser unit cooling fan 2 Remove one screw and take off the Leaf spring B 1 e STUDIO850 1 Remove the original glass LU P 6 15 A Original glass 2 Loosen 2 laser unit setscrews 3 Disconnect 2 connectors and pull out the laser unit March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC TA ef Leaf spring Fig 8 15 Fig 8 17 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT B 2 e STUDIO520 600 720 1 Disconnect 2 connectors and pull out the laser unit C Laser control PC board PLG board 1 Remove the laser optical unit 25 P 8 13 B Laser optical unit 2 Disconnect 3 connectors e STUDIO850 5 connectors 3 Remove 4 screws and take off the Laser control PC board PLG board Notes 1 Do not leave fingerprints or stain on the slit glass 2 Pay close attention not to make an impact or vibration on the laser optical unit because it is a precise apparatus 3 Place the removed laser optical unit so as not to load on the polygonal motor 4 Do not disassemble the laser optical unit in the field because it is precisely adjusted and very sensitive to dust and stain
46. APSR O 5 O ASR B5 R O 5 3 A4 R O APS 1 B4 APS 2 A3 Fig 6 12 LT Series ST LT O APS C OAPSR ST R 5 3 LT R LG 5 2 LD Fig 6 13 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Original size is determined by the combination of the signals output from each detection point Com bination charts for size determination of A4 series and LT series are as followed A4 Series j 4 APS 1 APS 2 APS 3 APS C APS R 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 0 5 0 1 0 0 1 A4 R 1 1 0 0 0 A5 1 1 0 0 1 B5 R 1 1 1 0 0 A5 R 1 1 1 0 1 LT Series j am APS 2 APS 3 APS C APS R LD 0 0 0 0 LT 0 0 1 LG 1 0 0 0 LT R 1 0 0 1 ST 1 0 1 1 ST R 1 1 0 1 Code Output signal Original 1 H Not available 0 L Available When the APS operation sensor is OFF The following points are determined by the output signals from APS sensors Size The combination of the signals satisfy the above chart Size is displayed on the control panel and an appropriate paper and reproduction ratio are selected Size retention The combination of the signals do not satisfy the above chart Retains the latest original size recognized or no original state until a new paper size is rec ognized No original output from all the sensors are 1
47. Fig 16 58 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 31 16 5 5 Single sided feeding at mixed original mode Operational condition A4 R and FOLIO originals Reproduction ratio 100 1 Original setting Same operation as 16 5 1 1 2 Lift of the lifting tray Same operation as 16 5 1 2 3 Start of separation Same operation as 16 5 1 3 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 32 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Start of feeding The document feed motor M37 starts to rotate in reverse After the document feed motor M37 has finished accelerating the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward Both the document feed and read motors M37 M36 start to slow down when the leading edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the read sensor 569 The original is transported a specified distance by the read motor M36 after the read sensor S69 detects the leading edge of the original Then after the original size is detected and the revers ing is judged to be necessary both document feed and read motors M37 M36 start to acceler ate and the large original exit solenoid SOL5 turns ON Fig 16 59 The large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse when the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and pass
48. Exit Reverse unit Fig 15 9 8 Reverse section cooling fan 1 M24 Reverse section cooling fan 2 M25 1 Take off the left lower cover exit cover LU P 2 46 Left lower cover Exit cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector remove 2 screws and then take off the reverse section cooling fan 1 3 Disconnect 1 connector remove 2 screws and then take off the reverse section cooling fan 2 Reverse section cooling fan 2 Fig 15 10 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXITIREVERSE SECTION 15 11 Exit sensor 522 1 2 Take off the left lower cover exit cover LU P 2 46 J Left lower cover Exit cover Disconnect 1 connector remove 1 screw and then take off the sensor with its bracket 3 Release the latch to take off the exit sensor Exit NT Fig 15 11 Exit sensor D Take off the left lower cover exit cover Fig 15 12 Reverse sensor 1 523 Reverse sensor 2 S24 LU P 2 46 J Left lower cover Exit cover Disconnect 1 connector remove 2 screws and then take off the reverse sensor 1 Disconnect 1 connector remove 1 screw and then take off the reverse sensor 2 _ Reverse sensor 1 5 Reverse sensor 2 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION Fig 15 13 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 15 12 E Exit cover swi
49. Transfer belt release Transfer belt contact detection sensor detection sensor Fig 13 26 Transfer belt cam motor Fig 13 27 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 13 14 14 FUSER UNIT 14 1 Outline The toner is fused on the paper separated from the photoconductive drum by having heat and pressure applied to it The paper is then discharged through the paper exit section The fuser unit consists of the coil fuser roller pressure roller separation fingers cleaning web thermistors 1 2 3 and 4 thermostat THMO1 and 2 fuser exit rollers fuser transport sensor 59 etc Web pushing roller Cleaning web Web detection sensor Web motor Fuser roller thermistor Fuser roller thermostat Fuser exit roller coil Separation finger Fuser roller Fuser transport sensor Pressure roller thermistor Pressure roller Fig 14 1 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 2 Operation At the fuser unit the toner is fused on the paper which has been separated and transported from the photoconductive drum by having heat and pressure applied to it The pressure and fuser rollers are rotated by the driving of the fuser motor M3 The fuser roller has an IH coil IH COIL inside which does not rotate itself The fuser and pressure rollers are always pressured by a spring force After being fused the paper is separated smoothly from the fuser roller by th
50. 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the left inner cover 3 Disconnect 1 connector remove 2 screws and then take off the toner unit Notes 1 Be extremely careful when handling this unit because toner may spill out from the joint with the toner recycle unit cleaner unit and developer unit 2 Install the window of the shutter section on the toner unit so that it matches with the protrusion of the devel oper unit 3 Be careful to allow as little vibration as possible to the unit when installing and removing the toner unit Vibration could cause stains on the image after assembling especially when the remain ing toner amount in the cartridge is small Protrusion Fig 12 20 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 18 B 2 toner transport motor 8 motor 7 1 Disconnect 1 connector remove 2 screws and then take off the recycle toner transport motor 2 Disconnect 1 connector remove 2 screws and then take off the hopper motor Hopper motor Connector Fig 12 21 C Developer unit 1 Take off the toner unit LU P 12 18 B Toner recycle unit Developer unit 2 Rotate the L shaped shaft upward to release the lock 3 Disconnect 1 connector and pull out the developer unit to the front side Fig
51. HVTT 0A Developer DC Digital data 1C18 D A converter HVMVR 1A HVDVR 1A HVTVR 1A Transfer bias Analog data Reference voltage e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION Fig 10 3 10 4 Transfer belt cleaning bias Main charger wire Grid Magnetic roller Transfer belt power supply roller Transfer belt cleaning brush March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 10 4 2 Description of operation The function and operation of each signal are as follows On off signal HVTM 0A HVDAC 0A HVDDC 0A HVTT 0A These signals are the on off signals of each bias output to the main charger main charger wire and grid developer bias AC DC transfer belt power supply roller and transfer belt cleaning brush When these signals move to a low level the generating circuit of each bias on the high voltage transformer becomes on status thus the current or voltage is output Reference voltage Vctr HVMVR 1A HVDVR 1A HVTVR 1A These analog voltages are the reference for each output of the main charger grid developer bias DC and transfer belt power supply roller Each output of the high voltage transformer can be changed lin early by changing these reference voltages The output procedure of the reference voltages is shown below The adjusted values of the main charger bias developer bias and transfer bias
52. NCTSZI28PSX FSS MA 406 20 78 50L2 C 1048 S A MBMZ9F 400TC 90PFTN EL F p S 1961 1 any SI en LM358MX NOPB F TAHCIAMTOX FT I en 20 19 CHN A C590 A18 10 50 Als C487 I C40 4 1725 RA2S RAA Be 1017 po A TENOZAKASTETRVE erreiss aaversou BHHE res mgr 1021 MMTAHC24AMTCX FT cos rP24 O O Eu TP59 R879 I 1227 M48Z58Y 70PC1 1030 1 EI 1 6133 10 50V Fan m Tei dn LH2902M NOP8 F au 1 ag Leem m0 O 10 500 rei O 1 28 5 511 127 Oe 5 101 A360 2102 LM3S8MXZNOPB F RART RARE T3 TC7S32F TEBSL F F 752175 5 55 1041 MBM29F400TC 90PFTN E1 F cn325 C158 I 16100 1044 HC32uTCX FT can 10 50v 123 TAB428K S75 Er 17 TAB429HQ 149 5150 TABA28K S S 1C8 1C18 TAVHCISEMTCX FT i VHCI23AMTCX FT 10750V ze C240 MBBB
53. ZAT 1 A 1 EE Na RD ES EE EE MEE J 1 cle G T SHUM 1V41N43N 2 al 1 1 jeisouueu epis jeisouuau oe SM Joen 19snJ zsor i 1 1 z 2 219819 the od r 1 UMOIg UMOIg x ang L 9197 Fang os 18109 00719 lt OMS YOO J9 U 1910 UPIIMS 9 1 eng SUM 70 1 901 YMS peig ees 819 J07ejnBeJ BUIYDJIMS i A 9 9 Uwe 4 ERE Es VOVNO sium 12 2 1 BuIyoyms eng 161 94 1 VOL i 1942919 wee Je lr z z o o ip lon weld eld v Jeu 2 3 2 uondo 3 9SION u Su 2 ac N ET ET ET ET 1 J9YSIUIJ ang 12 I e UM Ter UM UM T UM WHLNAN YOUIMS 1 1 queuudinbe jo 5 5 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 POWER SUPPLY UNIT Fig 17 3 17 9 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 POWER SUPPLY UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 17 10 18 PC BOARDS 1 PWA F SYS c2 2R5SVP680M abad es 4 5 RAZ RAS DSSOCFSB AMTOX 16 T RAS RAG RAT
54. cioe EC N108 A GO Ri25 65VP470M E RASO 158444 cel 32g P27 8 999 117 058 Internal 120000 Rize 18129 R127 GO t 10211 1 3883 5 5 AT43301 PWB F SYS 390H TP28 TP31 TP34 O CHH TP32 TP35O 29 6LE09449100 30 33 36 eum gt EP GW FR 40 internal i C108 220 8 3 R146 cus ant Ios 1 mue Ei C120 az TRAN oo OO OO Se 1028 fe D 3 10591128F HHH 5 R139 R140 ee I MTABLOBMI 6AZTG 1 TESTI 1939 TP38 1 TPAO Do cis M Qu m MT4BLCEMTERZTS O der rover 1c30 C131 100 25 1 ur 1031 1032 1033 aaa TX 220 6 3 DIT 555 elle 1 2 1021 I FANISBTAMX HALOGEN FREE PWB 5 LEAD FREE HLVO2617 LVI M51957BFP MS19578FP IST CISB cus 100 10 100 10 1 ifa zb A ES Eo Io 168 R173 een
55. 5 Remove 4 screws and take off the LCD inverter board D Key PC board 1 KEY1 1 Take off the control panel unit P 5 17 Control panel unit 2 Take off the DSP board LU P 5 18 B Display PC board DSP 3 Remove 8 screws to take off the base stay 4 Disconnect 3 connectors 5 Remove 4 screws to remove the Mylar 6 Remove 18 screws and take off the KEY1 board March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC LCD inverter board Fig 5 16 Fig 5 17 KEY 1 board e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL Key PC board 2 2 1 Take off the control panel unit CI P 5 17 A Control panel unit 2 Take off the DSP board P 5 18 B Display PC board DSP CH P di E 3 Remove 8 screws to take off the base stay Mylar Pd 4 Disconnect 1 connector Remove 4 screws to remove the Mylar Pd 6 Remove 2 screws and take off the KEY2 board Fig 5 19 F LCD panel LCD Touch panel TCP 1 Take off the control panel unit P 5 17 A Control panel unit 2 Take off the DSP board LU P 5 18 B Display PC board DSP 3 Remove 8 screws and take off the base stay 4 Disconnect 1 connector 5 Remove 6 screws to take off the LCD panel Fig 5 20 6 Take off the touch panel Notes 1 When installing the touch panel be sure that the panel faces
56. Fig 18 5 41 16 TOSHIBA 61 09147000 PWB F LDR 332 IR I R2 PC Fig 18 6 18 4 March 2005 TOSHIBA 7 PWA F SNS Only for e STUDIO520 600 720 PWB F SNS 390 61 09148000 5 1 84220721112 5 CN203 8 PWA F SNS Only for e STUDIO850 gt EP GW FR 40 lt 5 5 392 6LE09149000 TOSHIBA 21 8SW91991911 221 4105208 1 921 1 v03186XVN 43 Wl0v206sa 3 na6 L104 2901083 0d Fig 18 8 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 18 5 570010520 600 720 850 BOARDS 9 PWA F MOT OSHIBA 5 r M01 6LE092 u 1 2 672 600 b mmm o WC S HALOGEN FREE PWB s LEAD FREE PCBA CN420 10 PWA F MOT2 MT RV T z Ol 2 1t 16 gt EP GW 40 lt L Fig 18 9 05 HIBA STK672 600 PWB F MOT2 390Z 6LE09512000 e STUDIO520 600 720 85
57. e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT Fig 8 18 Laser control PC board Slit glass Fig 8 20 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 9 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 9 1 General Description This unit picks up a sheet of paper from the drawer tandem LCF or bypass tray and transports it to the transfer position The clutch controls the drive from the motor and drives each roller Also each sensor detects the trans ferring status of the sheet of paper Fig 9 1 shows the positioning of each roller and sensor from the first drawer to the registration roller Fig 9 2 shows the positioning of each roller and the sensor of the tandem LCF Moreover the composition of the paper feeding unit differs depending on the destination machine version 4 drawer composition is for NAD SAD and TWD e STUDIO600 720 composition of the 2 drawers and tandem LCF is for other destinations March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 1 Bypass pickup roller 9 Drawer pickup roller 2 Bypass feed roller 10 Drawer feed roller 3 Bypass separation roller 11 Drawer separation roller 4 Bypass transport roller 12 Drawer feed sensor 5 Registration roller metal 13 Drawer transport sensor 6 Registra
58. 1 copy Single sided printing operation gp 2 a tay E V 3 gt 8 8 8 91 Step 1 Step6 ca A 8 8 8 8 87 al 4 8 8 8 P Step 2 9 Step 7 Nem 8 O 8 8 TT SI nm 8 8 8 3 pass P 7 Step 3 e 3 t 1 Es e EN 4 lt 8 8 PRIN 9 2 Seene Step 5 Fig 15 2 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION e 5 sheets 1 copy Duplex printing operation A4 LT eB 8 8 9 lt 9 7 Step 1 8 2 9 9 ea D Step 2 8 2 8 9 2 1 Step 3 P Step 4 1 4 8 9 2 Step 5 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION Fig 15 3 1820 TO NE Lg 9 8 J Step 9 eo E 8 8 8 8 y Step 10 March 2005 TOSHIBA e 3sheets x 1 Single sided printing operation A3 LD B4 LG A4 R LT R 3 8 d 1 8 sQ 8 4 8 8 8 8 4 8 8 e 9 Step 1 Step 6 2 2 5 x 2 8 8 9 9 1 8 8 8 8 Step 2 Step 7 ch 8 1 eg Step 4 Step 9 3 8 8 8 58 4 Step 5 Fig 15 4 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDI0520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION 4 sheets x 1 copy Duplex printing operation A3 LD B4 LG A4 R LT R dE ES 8 8 8 8 8 91 P Step 1 Step 6 2 3
59. 16 34 8 Start of top side feeding Same operation as 16 5 2 7 Fig 16 63 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 35 9 Start of scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine and at the same time the original stop signal is reset The read motor M36 starts to rotate forward and so does the large original exit motor M39 Then the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 turns ON The large original exit solenoid SOL5 has been ON since the original was idle reversed The SCN STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section When the leading edge of the original is transported to the large original exit and reaches the 3rd roller the large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse Fig 16 64 When the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section the SCN STR turns OFF and at the same time both the read and large original exit motors M36 M39 start to accelerate Then the large original exit roller release solenoid 5016 turns OFF With a next original feeding of the original begins when the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller Fig 16 65 T
60. 2 General Precautions at Service sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service except for the service should be done with the power turned ON Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once a year or more A fire may occur when dust lies on this area When the parts are disassembled reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents Be careful not to install small parts such as screws washers pins E rings star washers in the wrong places Basically the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled The PC board must be stored in an anti electrostatic bag and handled using a wristband since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity Caution Before using the wristband unplug the power cable of the eguipment and make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the vicinity Avoid expose to laser beam during service This equipment uses a laser diode Be sure not to expose your eyes to the laser beam Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver on the laser beam path Remove all reflecting metals such as watches rings etc before starting service Be sure not to touch high temperature sections such as the exposure lamp fuser unit damp heater and areas around them Be sure not to touch high
61. 90 GON GON 90 80 N9 Z0VNO GON GON 80 N9 20 DON GON VAQE SAve AAve 3 vc VAVC HAL Gi AAZL SAZL DAV 6 JAV 6 JAV 6 GAV 6 DAV Gi HAL 6 VAL 8 NE CH DNE E 2 WA CH Nd uMd z uej doyeinBas BUIUYDJIMS 2 94 Sd td d Regulator BUIU21IMS 2 LNO Joyoeal UOJIMS YDOLIEJUI 2 Je 0 70 9 SION Regulator 109891 9IUOUHEH ed 070 E WC 4 A Det LOVNO UOJIMS BUIYDIMS Jeyee1g 9 04 1 17 1 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 POWER SUPPLY UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 17 7 17 6 Power Supply Seguence ON OFF 700ms lower Oms to 200ms AC input d 200ms gt 200 5 3 2V higher 3 3VA Linked with main switch 4 95V or higher 1 4 95V or higher Oms or 105 or 1 20ms 50ms 1 igher higher highe
62. Fig 9 44 C 5 Bypass paper size detection sensor S28 1 Disconnect 1 connector and release it from the clamp 2 Remove 2 brackets on both sides of the tray and 2 screws each to take off the bypass tray Connector Fixing bracket Fig 9 45 3 Remove 3 screws and release 4 latches to take off the bypass tray upper cover Bypass tray upper cover Latch Fig 9 46 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 4 Remove 1 screw and take off the ground leaf spring 5 Remove 1 screw white arrow and take off the bracket Note Install the bracket with its indicator pointed to its original position 6 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw to take off the bypass paper size detection sensor Note Pay attention to the following things when setting up the bypass feed roller and pickup roller Putthe in the groove of the shaft completely Make sure there is adhesion of oil and such on the timing belt pulley and roller careful not to install the bypass pickup roller and feed roller in a wrong direction Install the feed roller for the one way clutch to come to the rear side e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM Pointer Fig 9 47 Bypa
63. I Transfer belt drive motor unit Transfer belt motor M14 1 Take off the rear cover LH P 2 47 L Rear cover Connector L Screw 2 Remove 3 screws to take off the flywheel O 0 b GH 3 Disconnect 1 connector and then remove 1 A spring and 2 screws to take off the drive e 9 NS motor unit a bed 4 Remove 3 screws to take off the bracket os 5 5 Remove 2 screws to take off the transfer belt motor Lej 9 Note When installing the motor fix it by rotating it AF counterclockwise Spring Fig 13 24 J Transfer belt contact release cam driving unit 1 Take off the rear cover LU P 2 47 L Rear cover 2 Remove 3 screws to take off the flywheel 3 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to take off the cam driving unit Transfer belt contact release cam drive unit Fig 13 25 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 13 13 1 2 Remove 1 screw to take off the transfer belt release detection sensor 515 Remove 1 screw to take off the transfer belt contact detection sensor 516 Transfer belt cam motor M15 Take off the transfer belt contact release cam driving unit LO P 13 13 J Transfer belt contact release cam driving unit Remove 2 screws and disconnect 1 connec tor to take off the transfer belt cam motor e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT
64. Lo Outside Inside lt Grease Oil seal Fig 12 47 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT L Developer unit motor M10 1 Take off the rear cover LU P 2 47 L Rear cover Developer unit motor Connector 2 Take off the SYS board case LU P 2 48 A System control PC board SYS board SYS board case V sle C 3 Remove 3 screws to take off the flywheel 1 5 9 4 Disconnect 1 connector remove 3 screws 2 then take off the developer unit motor with bracket 5 Remove 2 screws to take off the motor from the bracket Screw Screw Fig 12 48 M Developer unit detection switch SW3 1 Take off the cleaner unit LU P 11 7 Cleaner unit 2 Disconnect 1 connector remove 1 screw and then take off the sensor bracket Sensor braket Fig 12 49 3 Disconnect 2 connectors remove 1 screw and then take off the developer unit detection switch Developer unit detection switch Fig 12 50 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 28 N Toner filter unit Developer unit fan M31 1 Take off the right rear cover LU P 2 45 H Right rear cover 2 Pull out the toner filter 3 Remove 2 screws to pull out the filter duct 4 Disconnect 1 connector of the f
65. REQ che Communication request signal engine to RADF DF REQ Communication request signal RADF to engine DF ACK Response signal to communication request signal RADF to engine Response signal to communication reguest signal engine to RADF TXD ss Data sent to RADF from engine Data sent to engine from RADF SCN 5 Scanning start signal DF ONT Detection signal of connection to RADF The data communication RxD and TxD between the engine and is adopting a serial communi cation system which makes it impossible to check with a testing device whether signals are sent received properly e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 6 16 5 Operations 16 5 1 A4 single sided feeding Operational condition 4 original Reproduction ratio 100 1 Original setting The original empty sensor S60 turns ON when the original has been set on the original feeding tray Fig 16 10 2 Lifting of the lifting tray The tray lift motor M38 rotates to lift the tray after receiving the original feeding signal from the engine With a specified delay after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor 559 has detected a top side of the original the tray lift motor M38 stops rotating Fig 16
66. Se 2 8 2 8 8 8 8 8 87 D Step 2 Step 7 4 p 4 8 8 87 nu Step 5 Step 10 Fig 15 5 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 15 5 Exit motor control circuit The exit motor is a stepping motor driven by the control signal output from the CPU on the LGC board and rotates the exit roller The PFC CPU outputs each phase signal EXTMA 0 EXTMB 0 0 EXTMD 0 to the motor driver The motor driver converts this phase signal into a 24 V pulse signal EXTMA 0A EXTMB 0A EXTMC 0A EXTMD 0A and outputs it to the motor Also the rotation speed of the motor can be switched by changing the output timing of each pulse signal LGC board EXMVR 0 EXTMA 0A 57 EXTMB 0A 1C83 PFC CPU 0 EXTMB 0 Motor driver EXTMC 0A 0 EXTMD 0 EXTMD 0A Fig 15 6 Exit motor drive signal Signal 0 0 Motor status EXMVR 0 0 EXTMD 0 Pulse signal L Rotation when accelerating decelerating Rotation at a constant speed March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION 15 6 Reverse motor control circuit The reverse motor is a stepping motor driven by the control signal output from CPU on the LGC board and rotates the reverse motor 1 and 2 The reverse motor is driven by the pulse signal 0 0 0 0 output from the dri
67. TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT 11 11 5 Take off the shaft of the separation finger by sliding it to the front side Remove 1 screw each to pull out the separa tion finger from the shaft Remove 1 E ring and 1 screw and then take off the separation finger the middle from the shaft Notes 1 When assembling be sure that the arm is in the hole of the separation finger 2 Make sure you assemble the drum sepa ration finger with the weight screws in the correct direction 3 Be sure to install the separation finger in the correct position because the shape of the separation finger in the middle and on the outer side is different e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT Fig 11 21 A B Hole Fig 11 22 Fig 11 23 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 11 12 H Drum motor M11 Motor driving PC board 1 Take off the rear cover SYS board and then hard disk with its bracket 2 Remove 3 screws to take off the drum wheel 3 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3 screws to take off the drum motor with its Drum motor Screw Connector bracket Note When installing the drum motor tighten the screw while the bracket is pushed against the motor in the direction of the arrow 4 Remove 3 screws to take off the dr
68. cian March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL Message State of eguipment Note 77 Please try again after a Displayed when the Department Leave it for a while and key in the while Code can no be keyed in immedi code again ately after power ON 78 Press START button to Displayed when the build job is set copy after changing setting 79 The number of builds Displayed when the number of builds Select either printing or canceling exceeds the limits will you exceeds the limits stored originals 80 The number of builds Displayed when the number of builds Select either printing or saving exceeds the limits will you exceeds the limits save stored originals 81 This setting cannot be Displayed when the setting is changed now changed during the build job is dis continued 82 Service recommended for Displayed when the surface poten Refer to chapter 5 1 16 SPC tial control error occurs Service Handbook 83 Service recommended for Displayed when the image quality Refer to chapter 5 1 15 IOC control error occurs Service Handbook 84 Messages 82 and 83 Displayed when the surface poten Refer to chapter 5 1 15 and 5 1 16 above appear alternately tial control error and the image qual Service Handbook ity control error occur e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL 05 04 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 5 3 Operation Rela
69. C or above 200 C or above IH coil OFF 200 C 200 C 185 C 1 Ready status 170 to 200 C 160 to 200 C IH coil ON 170 C or below 160 Cor below Copying is interrupted and the fuser roller is 160 C or below 1 150 C or below 1 heated Waiting status 155 C or below 2 1 Only for the JPD model 2 Only for the TWD model m During During Warming up Ready During printing Ready printing waiting C Le ma a aa b 200 170 Temperature of fuser roller EE ON ON OFF 0 Fig 14 6 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 9 3 Temperature control for the both ends of the fuser roller 4 During a continuous printing the temperature of the both ends of the fuser roller areas where the paper does not pass on tends to be higher than that of the other areas where the paper passes on For this reason the temperature of the both ends of the fuser roller is detected by the fuser roller front thermistor If this thermistor has detected an abnormal temperature 270 C or above the IH coil is preferentially turned off regardless of the temperature of the areas where the paper passes on Temperature control at Energy Saving Mode This equipment has the following two types of temperature control for saving energy and returns to ready status to perform printing in each mode upon prin
70. Document feed motor reverse rotation NO Document feed motor accelerationcompleted Read motor forward rotation Reacheg the 1st roller Pre feeding control from the 1st roller started Control for pre feeding from registration roller completed March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Control for pre feeding from the 1st roller started Read sensor ON Specified pulse passed Size detected Size detection NO succeeded YES Reversal without reading started _ Read motor stopped Control for leading edge scanning started Control for pre feeding from the 1st roller completed Fig 16 71 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 51 7 Trailing edge control for pre feeding Trailing edge control for pre feeding started Original trailing edge passed Small original original length sensor 9 Document feed motor stopped Original length data acguired Next original detection Small original started Document feed motor stopped Next original detection started Midpoint between registration roller and the 1st roller passed Trailing edge control for pre feeding completed Original registration sensor OFF Fig 16 72 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERS
71. EXP is irradiated to the origi nal through this glass The ADF original glass is used when original is read with the Automatic Document Feeder Original is transported on the ADF original glass by the Automatic Document Feeder and the transported original is read under the ADF original glass by the carriage Do not use such solvents as alcohol when cleaning the surface of the ADF original glass because it is coated so as not to be scratched by originals 2 Carriage 1 The carriage 1 consists of the exposure lamp EXP lamp inverter board INV EXP reflector mir ror 1 etc It is driven by the scan motor M1 and scans the original on the glass Exposure lamp EXP This lamp is the light source to irradiate the original on the glass one 29W Xenon lamp Lamp inverter board INV EXP This inverter controls lighting of the Xenon lamp Reflector This is a reflecting plate to efficiently lead the light from the exposure lamp EXP to the surface of the original on the glass Mirror 1 This mirror leads the light reflected from the original to the mirror 2 described later Original Original glass Exposure lamp N Pus Reflector Mirror 1 Fig 6 2 3 Carriage 2 The carriage 2 consists of mirror 2 mirror 3 etc and leads the reflected light from the mirror 1 through mirrors 2 and 3 to the lens This carriage 2 is also driven by the scan motor 1 as in the same manne
72. LD LG LT R Small sized original A4 B5 A5 R LT ST R March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 1 16 2 Operation Drive control section Jam access cover Original feeding tray Feeding transporting section Small original receiving section Large original receiving section Fig 16 2 Apparatus Electric parts Feeding transporting section Jam access cover Original empty sensor 560 e Pickup belt Lifting tray upper limit detection Feed roller sensor S59 Separation roller Lifting tray lower limit detection Registration roller sensor S62 Read roller Jam access cover open close Exi Reverse roller sensor 561 Intermediate transport roller Original length detection sensor Small original reverse roller S63 Small original exit roller Original registration sensor S55 Original width detection sensor 1 2 3 S56 57 58 Read sensor S69 Original intermediate transport sensor S70 Large original exit sensor 568 Small original reverse sensor 566 Small original exit sensor 567 Original feeding tray Original feeding tray Original tray sensor S53 Original tray width sensor 554 Drive control section Document feed motor M37 Tray lift motor M38 e Read motor M36 Large original exit motor M39 Large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 Large or
73. March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 2 Functions 1 Toner cartridge The toner cartridge is filled with the toner and the toner is supplied to the developer unit In this eguipment the toner cartridge can be replaced without stopping any operation when the toner cartridge becomes empty during printing The remaining amount of the toner can be detected in the following 3 steps e Detecting that the toner in the toner cartridge has decreased The drive count of the new toner transport motor M6 theoretically can be a detection of decreased toner amount in the toner cartridge e Detecting that the toner cartridge is empty The toner cartridge empty sensor 510 detects that the toner cartridge has become empty This sensor is installed on the toner cartridge holder and detects the presence of the toner in the cartridge by the contact of the toner to the sensor surface Even after the cartridge is detected as empty a small amount of toner still remains in the sub hopper This remaining toner enables to print approx 2 000 sheets of A4 LT paper so that toner cartridge can be replaced during this printing without stopping the printing operation When the front cover upper is opened for the cartridge replacement during printing the recycle toner transport motor M8 continues running but the new toner supply motor M5 is stopped While the cover is opened the equipment exits only a number of sheets spec
74. March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 13 2 Functions 1 Transfer belt unit The transfer belt unit is a main unit of the transfer section This unit is divided into 2 parts the belt support power supply section which supports and rotates the belt and supplies the power to the belt and the cleaning mechanism section which scrapes off the toner adhered on the belt sur face The transfer belt motor M14 drives the transfer belt unit The drive from the transfer belt motor M14 is transmitted to the drive gear and drive roller through the timing belt and relay gears The drive is transmitted to the transfer transport unit with a gear having a planetary joint 2 Transfer belt support power supply section The transfer belt is supported by 3 rollers transfer belt drive roller follower roller and power sup ply roller A voltage whose polarity is reverse to that of the toner on the photoconductive drum is applied on the power supply roller The current flowing to the transfer belt is controlled at a con stant current of 70 pA 85 LA e STUDIO850 The voltage is normally between 2 kV and 5 kV while the applied voltage changes due to this constant current control A voltage of 510 V is applied on the follower roller by a varistor A high voltage probe is reguired for this measurement Do not use a digital voltmeter for your safety 3 Transfer belt The transfer belt is a high precision flat rubbe
75. Output to the PLG board 5 1VG CN409Pin1 Output to the finisher 3 12V 12VA CN405 Pins 4 and 5 Output to the SYS board 12VB CN405 Pins 7 Output to the SYS board 12VC CN407Pin6 Output to the PLG board 12VD CN408 Pin 7 Output to the SLG board 12VE CN406 Pin 6 Output to the LGC board 12VF CN410 Pin 1 Output to the FAX board March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 POWER SUPPLY UNIT The following are 3 output channels for the cover switch line 1 5 1V 5 1VH CN403 Pin 5 Output to the board 2 24V 24VA CN402 Pin 1 Output to the LGC board 24VB CN402 Pin 2 Output to the LGC board 24VC CN402 Pin 3 Output to the LGC board external LCF via LGC board 24VD CN403 Pin 1 Output to the PLG board 24VE CN404 Pin 3 Output to the SLG board 24VF CN409 Pins 3 and 4 Output to the finisher 24VG CN404 Pins 5 and 7 Output to the ADF board RADF 3 36 V 36VA CN402 Pin 7 Output to the LGC board 36VB CN402 Pin 8 Output to the LGC board 36VC CN403 Pin 3 Output to the PLG board 36VD CN404 Pin 1 Output to the SLG board Output voltage by the type of connector Main switch line Connector Destination Voltage CN405 For the SYS board 3 5 1VA 5 1VB 12VA 12VB CN406 For the LGC board external LCF via LGC board 3 3VD 5 1VC 12VE finisher via LGC board CN407 For the PLG board 3 3VB 5 1VE 5 1VF 12VC CN408 For the
76. Remove 1 screw to take off the large original exit solenoid with its bracket 4 Remove 1 screw to take off the large original exit solenoid from its bracket Large original R exit solenoid Fig 16 129 F 3 Large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 1 Take off the ADF rear cover 16 86 B 2 ADF rear cover Release solenoid Clip Harness duct Then close the jam access cover linkage 2 Remove the clip to take off the release sole noid linkage 3 Disconnect 2 connectors lg 4 Remove 1 screv release 2 latches and take S ed Connector off the harness duct 5 Remove 1 screw to take off the large original exit roller release solenoid with its bracket 6 Remove 2 screws to take off the large origi nal exit roller release solenoid from its Large original exit roller Screw release solenoid bracket Screw Fig 16 130 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 93 G Sensor Switch G 1 Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor 559 Original empty sensor 560 Jam access cover sensor 561 1 Open the jam access cover Then remove 2 screws to take off the upper guide cover x Jam access cover sensor 2 Disconnect 1 connector for each to take off Oniginal empty Sensor the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor original empty sensor and jam acce
77. Same operation as 7 Fig 16 32 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 17 12 Start of 2nd original back side scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine At the same time the original transport signal turns OFF When the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward the large original exit motor M39 also starts to rotate forward and the large original exit roller release sole noid 5016 turns ON The SCN STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section The large original exit motor M39 stops when the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 has turned ON When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the intermediate transport section and come to a specified distance before the intermediate transport roller both the large and small original exit motors M39 M40 start to rotate in reverse The small original exit solenoid SOL4 has been ON from st original Both the SCN STR the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 turn OFF when the trail ing edge of the original has passed the scanning section The large original exit motor M39 starts to accelerate when the trailing edge of the original has passed the 3rd roller and proceeded a speci fied distance Fig 16 33 e
78. WH125FU T I TR CAI CA3 CAS CAS gt FBS 5 58 CAIG 19 20 Fatz 103 cY23FP1200T 2RSSVPEROM HESE 107 MSMSV4168TP 1 e 1 12 2 MBM2ILVE50UE E 100 10 1827 R28 ES C56 10SVP330N 6SVP4TOM m SSVP TOM 1 1 wu LBM25PPC750FX 1 cm I sen R36 IPs 1015 ODOTPE wameacves OO Tes I b Los DES II ces cas en py v I dm NCC 4 1 R97 R109 iss 2 R107 lus 1 reis P150 OTPI4 TP17O OTPI8 220 161 1 Za E e Eed Roe R39 n RARI RAS
79. and tandem LCF pickup solenoid SOL7 are then turned ON The tandem LCF end fence motor M42 rotates forward and the paper in the standby side tray is moved onto the tray of the feeding side The tandem LCF end fence motor M42 is stopped for a second when the end fence stop position sensor S75 is turned ON and the motor M42 imme diately starts to rotate in reverse to return the end fence to the position where the end fence home position sensor S73 is turned ON When the returning operation is started the tandem LCF end fence solenoid SOL8 and tandem LCF pickup solenoid SOL7 are turned OFF and the tandem LCF tray up motor M41 is rotated forward to raise the feeding side tray The tandem LCF tray up motor M41 is turned OFF when the tray being raised turns ON the tandem LCF tray up sensor S44 and stops the tray At this time the presence of paper is judged when the tandem LCF empty sensor S43 is ON If the power is turned ON when the drawer has been removed the tray raising movement is not operated The tray is raised as soon as the drawer is installed and it detects if there is paper in the drawer If either of the tandem LCF feed sensors S46 is ON paper remains on the transport path when the power is turned ON that means a paper jam has occurred and the operation is disabled until the paper is removed Ready status Trays detect the paper as described in A and the equipment goes into the ready status The tray goes
80. and the measured value DRVO 1A is then fed back to the Main CPU The current state of the drum deterioration is assumed based on the measurement result of the drum surface potential and then the result is sent to the image quality control circuit The image quality control changes the image formation condition to make the image density and the line width appropriate At this time the image quality control determines the main charger bias output effective value The determined effective value of the main charger bias is stored in the NVRAM Timing of drum surface potential measurement The drum surface potential is measured with the performance of the image quality control The image quality control is performed at the timing as follows When the power is turned ON first thing in the morning or during warming up after a specified period of time has passed since the last operation When a print job is completed after a specified number of sheets have been printed out When print job is resumed after a toner cartridge empty status has been released The drum surface potential measurement and whether or not the result reflects to the image quality control can be set in the Setting Mode 08 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION 10 6 Temperature humidity detection circuit 10 6 1 Outline The temperature humidity detection circuit detects the temperature and humidity inside of the eguip
81. changed cleared after the screen after the changed button after set copy mode is set copy mode is set copy mode is set ting the copy and then can mode celled Press STOP Printing out Display not Display not Display not Display not button stops and changed changed changed changed READY Press START to copy and MEMORY CLEAR are dis played Press CLEAR Number of print Display not Number of print Number of print Display not button after outs changes to changed outs changes to outs changes to changed setting the copy 1 while the set 1 while the set 1 while the set mode ting remains ting remains ting remains unchanged after unchanged after unchanged after the copy mode is the copy mode is the copy mode is set set set Press CLEAR Number keyed Display not Number keyed Number Display not button after key in changes to 1 changed in changes to 1 in changes 1 changed ing in numbers after being after being after being digital keys entered entered entered Press MONI Display not Display not Display not Display not Display not TOR PAUSE changed changed changed changed changed Press FAX Displays FAX Display not Display not Displays FAX Displays FAX button screen changed changed screen screen Press COPY Display not Display not Display not Display not Displays COPY button changed changed changed changed screen Press SCAN Displays SCAN Display not Display not Displays SCAN Displ
82. mm further from the 4th roller until it passes through the large original exit sensor S68 Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for the leading edge of an original to proceed the distance from the position 20 mm further from the 4th roller to the end of the large original exit sensor S68 plus 60 mm e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 38 3 Original jammed not reaching the large original exit sensor 568 while registering the back side E733 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the back side registration or transportation to the 1st roller starts until an original reaches the large original exit sensor S68 Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the large original exit roller to the large original exit sensor S68 plus 60 mm 16 6 4 Jams at small original reverse section 1 Original jammed not reaching the small original reverse sensor S66 to the small original reverse side E723 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original reaches the intermediate transport roller until it reaches the small original reverse sensor S66 Jam pulse setting The setting value of the jam pulse is equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to pro c
83. 13 4 4 2 Automatic feed copying Press START button Developer bias ON Fuser motor ON Main charger ON Discharge LED ON Drum motor ON Recycle toner transport motor ON Developer unit motor ON Transfer belt motor ON Used toner transport motor ON Process system control Is polygonal motor ON Laser ON gt Transfer belt bias Transfer belt bias OFF Call for service 20 Is remaining set number 0 YES Laser OFF Process system control finished Call for service Transport system control NO Transport motor ON Transport motor OFF Registration motor ON Drum separation finger solenoid ON Drum separation finger solenoid OFF Registration motor OFF Is fuser unit transport sensor ON e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION 4 14 Scanning system control Exposure lamp ON Carriage moving forward Carriage stopped Exposure lamp OFF Carriage moving backward Carriage stopped Scanning system control finished Paper jam E010 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC March 2005 TOSHIBA Paper jam fuser unit transport sensor OFF E020 Is remaining set number 0 Main charger OFF Discharge LED OFF Developer bias OFF Drum motor OFF Transfer belt motor OFF Fuser motor OFF Developer unit motor OFF Recycle to
84. 2 ENABLE P G2 5 R33 1 81 1 P G1 Hg 1 1 gt 1 2 gNC2 S G il 671 RHOT_ENB gt C38 15 VREF Vss 16 i CIQ 1 70 1C69 1 2 R100 e Ion 25 TA R41 45 TSE 2 I amp ek hit Bien A 477 C140 C81 R76 SE os Le Sed amp T F SP BS Leen gt 57 RMOT CU gt 2 2 1 2 POND 1 R101 R80 R42 PGND 777 SGND Fig 16 96 This circuit controls the rotation stoppage and the direction of rotation excitation mode and motor current of the read motor M36 A drive clock signal RMOT CLK and rotation direction signal RMOT_CWB are input to control the speed and direction of the motor rotation M1 and 2 are the exciting mode setting signals The PWM signal of RMOT CU is separated and smoothed at R101 R80 R42 R76 C140 and C91 and it is input into 10 19 pin Vref to set the motor current value The motor current value can be changed by altering duties of the PWM signal 4 Drive circuit for document feed motor M37 large original exit motor M39 small original exit motor M40 and tray lift motor Since the document feed motor large original exit motor small original exit motor and tray lift motor have almost the same circuitries only the drive circuit for the document feed motor is described as follows
85. 200 at AMS Mode on below manually RADF 61 More than 200 is not Displayed when reproduction ratio is Set reproduction ratio 200 or available set manually to be over 200 on below RADF 62 Updated the template set Displayed when the template stored ting is recalled by pressing TEMPLATE button 63 Enter Department Code Displayed when a button is pressed while the department management setting is available 64 Cannot copy Displayed when the number of print Check DEPARTMENT outs exceeds the limit number of COUNTER department counter 65 Select the same sized Tab Displayed when the paper sizes for Select the same size for tab sheets sheets as the originals the tab sheets and originals are dif and originals ferent 66 Select the same sized Displayed when the paper sizes for Select the same size for the inserter Inserter sheets as the origi inserter paper and original are differ sheets and originals nals ent 67 Set Tab sheets in the same Displayed when the paper directions Set the tab sheets in the same direc direction as the originals for tab paper and original are differ tion as the originals ent 68 Set Inserter sheets in the Displayed when the paper directions Set the inserter sheets in the same same direction as the origi for inserter paper and original are dif direction as the originals nals ferent 69 Only one paper source can Displayed when both the cover sheet Release either the co
86. 3 2 Formation of electrostatic latent image In the processes of charging scanning printing and discharging described later negative potential on the areas of the drum corresponding to black areas of the original is eliminated while the areas of the drum corresponding to white areas remains the negative charge As this image on the drum formed by the negative potential is invisible it is called an electrostatic latent image Time t 300 Surface potential V White area of original 600 Discharge Charging process process Electric potential on the photoconductive drum Fig 3 3 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY PROCESS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 2 Charging Charging is a process of applying a charge uniformly to the photoconductive drum surface The charger wire produces a negative corona discharge which is controlled by the grid so that the drum surface is uniformly charged with negative potential The surface potential on the drum is determined by the grid potential and controlled to a certain value by the grid control circuit Main charger In High voltage id Grid control circuit transformer Fig 3 4 3 Scanning Scanning is a process of exposing the original to the light and converting the reflection into electrical signals The light reflected from the original is imported to the charge coupled device CCD and this optical image information is converted into el
87. 573 It detects the end fence home position 16 Standby side empty sensor 574 It detects the presence absence of a sheet of paper on the standby side tray 17 End stop position sensor 575 The tandem LCF end fence motor M42 drives the end fence The end fence pushes a sheet of paper placed on the standby side tray and moves it to the feeding side tray The end fence stop position sensor 575 detects the stopping position of end so that the sheet is not pushed too much March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 9 3 Operation 9 3 1 Operation of bypass pickup roller Bypass pickup solenoid Pickup arm Bypass feed roller Fig 9 3 When the bypass pickup solenoid SOL3 is turned ON the plunger is pulled and the lever is revolved and brought down The pickup arm which is linked with the lever is also brought with the lever by its own weight When the bypass pickup solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF the pickup arm is brought up by the spring force The driving force transmitted through the bypass feed clutch CLT4 is also transmitted to the bypass feed roller through the shaft and then to the bypass pickup roller through the timing belt The roller is rotated by this driving force e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 9 3 2 Operation of drawer pickup roller Fig 9 4 When the drawer is inserted the protrusion at the rear side
88. 9 6 9 3 1 Operation of bypass pickup nt 9 6 9 3 2 Operation of drawer pickup roller ne nn nn r rr 9 7 9 9 3 Paper S paration 9 7 9 34 EE 9 9 93 5 General TEE 9 10 9 3 6 Description of Tandem LCF Operation 9 12 9 4 Tray up motor Control GITEUI i icto bez ce voice Saad oi neds bagel ona Ez ete vn 9 15 9 5 Feed motor control circuit 9 16 9 6 Transport motor control CIRCUIT EE 9 17 9 7 Registration motor control circuit ss 9 18 9 8 Tandem LCF tray up motor end fence 9 19 9 9 Disassembly and Replacement nn nn 9 20 10 PROCESS RELATED SECTION 11111 10 1 10 1 t 10 1 10 2 ee 10 2 10 3 Charger Wire Cleaner Control Circuit ss 10 3 10 3 1 General v 10 3 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTENTS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 10 3 2 CONTIGUIALON TEE 10 3 10 4 High voltage Transformer Control 10 4 10 4 1 General descriptlOn ideo ener 10 4 10 4 2 Description of operation ri 10 5 10 5 Drum Surface Potential Sensor Control Circuit 10 6 10 5 1 General description ss 10 6 10 5 2 Configuration E 10 6 1
89. AUD MJD CND KRD model of all eguipments and TWD model of e STUDIO850 M42 LCF ENDF MOT Driving the end fence in the tandem LCF Fig 2 22 9 22 Tandem LCF end fence motor Only for ASD ASU AUD MJD CND KRD model of all eguipments and TWD model of e STUDIO850 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 2 Sensors switches Symbol Name Function Remarks 51 5 51 3 APS C APS R Detecting original sizes Fig 2 5 38 7 Automatic original detec Fig 2 6 34 14 tion sensor 56 5 Detecting the carriage home position Fig 2 5 34 101 Carriage home position Fig 2 6 sensor ST TEMP HUMI SNR Detecting the ambient temperature humid Fig 2 8 3 34 Temperature humidity sen ity of the eguipment sor 58 WEB SNR Detecting the reeled amount of the clean Fig 2 11 25 112 Web detection sensor ing web 59 FUS TR SNR Detecting the transporting status of paper Fig 2 11 25 112 Fuser transport sensor at the fuser unit 510 TNR EMP SNR Detecting the remaining amount of new Fig 2 12 45 56 Toner cartridge empty sen toner sor 511 USD TNR FLL SNR Detecting the full status of used toner in the Fig 2 13 46 17 Toner bag full detection toner bag sensor 512 ATTNR SNR Detecting the toner density in the developer Fig 2 14 44 26 Auto toner sensor unit 513 DRUM SUF SNR Detecting the drum surface potential at Fig 2 14 5 13 Drum
90. Bunir 87 Fig 16 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 67 9 a a a 29901 70101 BELLL 89711 20211 8801 1701 LELOL 54201 vOLOL S9EOL 2210 POL 155742 1920 vOLOL VOLOL 89 9970 2601 LELOL 9211 690 SU jun 00G LL 000 005 000 NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 MOO 1 M99 dojs 0 M9 H MO NO 330 440 NO 330 330 dois 0 M9 H MO NO 440 dojs 1 M9 H MO NO 440 NO 140 NO 330 IN MOO 1 M09 dojs NO 330 dois piomdn NO 330 440 plougjos jews Josues jews Josues jews ue 105 5 ayelpawwayu JOSUOS aber 491101 e61e7 plougjos aber 10 0 e61e7 HLS NOS jeuBis peys peay Josues peas Josuas Josuas
91. DE LASER CLASE 38 CUANDO LA UNIDAD OPTICA ESTA ABIERTA O LA UNIDAD DEL CILINDRO ES RETIRADA Y CUANDO EL INTERRUPTOR DE SEGURIDAD ESTA DESACTIVADO EVITE EXPOSICION DIRECTA AL RAYO f amp lS o 3T v v PE TY PER CH BED 52389 5 M5 0 350 EC LADEBREENI d gt PS lt Fig 8 4 Cautions Avoid expose to laser beam during service This equipment uses a laser diode Be sure not to expose vour eyes to the laser beam Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screw driver on the laser beam path Remove all reflecting metals such as watches rings etc before starting service When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON be sure not to touch live sections and rotating operating sections Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam During servicing be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as Unplug the power cable during service CAUTION HOT CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION LASER BEAM etc to see if there is dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the eguipment e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 8 2 2 motor unit This unit consists of the polygonal motor M2 polygonal mirror and polygonal mirror cover a Polygonal motor This motor rotates the polygonal mirror at a high speed The DC motor controls the rotation speed of the motor as follows e STUDIO520 600 720 During printin
92. DF 1B 6P 2 SDSA 12 1 CN3 6 ses V B SP ous 4 8 4 D i T A CNS 4 KMOT D 1 B i 5 rnesoutaxza H 3 kMOT A CN9 3 MT BO H1 18 1 HE Z KMOT B CN3 2 KMOT XB D E 5 15 1 guz neg 1 B CN3 1 gg r a e 277272 2 Rat EI 4 SyncA 1 1 1 1 ls la y 1 1 1 eer Zus Perea Ze em 13 eynen ri L alat 2 2 2 3 esa cal 075 0792 1 ST RIL 1 4 4 7 5 j3 SGND 10 15 Aj gt RsB GB BW L 17 bi 3 Refa 1 4 SGND2 es nes so gt 57 amp D leg DO R102 A R1035 RBS S 1 15 rae KMOT CU D 1 1 1 2 2 R68 CR o 1 8 8 77 2 2 1 SGND2 PGND Senn Som SEND Fig 16 97 This circuit controls the rotation stoppage the direction of the rotation of the document feed motor M37 and the motor current The drive pattern signal is input into 15 5 6 16 17 pin to control the speed and direction of the motor rotation PWM signal is input into CU and separated and smoothed at R102 R103 R89 87 and 89 and it is input into 15 3 pin RefA 14 pin RefB to set the motor current value The motor current value can be changed by altering duties of the PWM signal e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 76 5 Drive circuit fo
93. Electrode 2 Electron 3 Xenon atom 4 Ultraviolet lay 5 Fluorescer 6 Visible light irradiated from the opening to outside the pipe 7 Openig 8 Harness Fig 6 7 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION 6 4 3 Control circuit for exposure lamp SLG board LMPON 0 10 WDTOUT 0 Scanner CPU 5VSWON 0 gt IC6 EXPON 0 Xenon lamp Lighting device for xenon lamp Lamp inverter board Fig 6 8 Working conditions LMPON 0 WDTOUT 0 5VSWON 0 5VSW Q102 Xenon lamp State of Lamp drive signal equipment L H L ON ON ON Normal operation H H ON OFF OFF X L X OFF OFF OFF Scanner CPU overdriving X H H OFF OFF OFF Call for Service e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 6 5 CCD Control 6 5 1 Opto electronic conversion A CCD charge coupled device is used to produce an electrical signal corresponding to the reflected light amount from the original The CCD is a one chip opto electronic conversion device comprised of several thousand light receiving elements arranged in a line each one of them is a few microns sguare This model is eguipped with a CCD which has 7 500 light receiving elements Each element of the light receiving section consists of the semiconductive layers When the light irradiates the element the light energ
94. Fig 2 30 86 105 APS operation sensor detecting the angle of the RADF 565 DF OPN SNR Detecting the opening closing status of the Fig 2 30 89 101 RADF opening closing sen RADF sor 566 DF SD REV SNR Detecting the transporting status of the Fig 2 31 84 31 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Symbol Name Function Remarks 567 DF SD EXIT SNR Detecting the exiting status of small origi Fig 2 31 84 105 Small original exit sensor nals 568 DF LD EXIT SNR Detecting the exiting status of large origi Fig 2 31 85 15 Large original exit sensor nals 569 DF READ SNR Detecting the leading edge of the original at Fig 2 31 83 36 Read sensor the original scanning section 570 DF MID TR SNR Detecting the transporting status of the Fig 2 31 90 103 Original intermediate trans original at the intermediate transport roller port sensor section S71 LCF BTM SNR Detecting the lowering status of the tray in Fig 2 22 8 14 Tandem LCF bottom sen the tandem LCF sor Only for ASD ASU AUD MJD CND KRD model of all eguipments and TWD model of e STUDIO850 S72 LCF MST SNR Detecting the paper mis stacking at the Fig 2 22 8 14 Standby side mis stacking standby side of the tandem LCF sensor Only for ASD ASU AUD MJD CND KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e STUDIO850 S73 LCF ENDF HP SNR Detecting the end fence home position in Fig 2 22 8 14 End fence home positi
95. Fig 2 34 B Front right inner cover 1 Take off the front cover P 2 43 A Front cover Upper Lower Front right inner cover 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the front right inner cover Fig 2 35 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE C Top right cover 1 Remove 1 screw and open the RADF 2 Slide the cover to the rear side to release the hook and then take off the top right cover D Top left cover 1 Remove 1 screw and open the RADF 2 Slide the cover to the rear side to release the hook and then take off the top left cover E Top rear cover 1 Take off the LU P 16 85 A Reversing Automatic Docu ment Feeder unit 2 Take off the top right cover LU 2 44 Top right cover 3 Take off the top left cover CI P 2 44 D Top left cover 4 Remove 2 screws to take off the top rear cover e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE Fig 2 37 Top rear cover March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC F Right upper cover 1 Take off the top right cover LU 2 44 C Top right cover 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the right upper cover G Right center cover 1 Open the bypass tray 2 Remove 8 screws to take off the right center cover Right upper cover Fig 2 39 Right rear cover 1 Remove 2 screws and take off the
96. Harness Transport 516 Harness Purple Feed clutch e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM A 6 Drawer detection sensor S29 S35 S41 S47 1 Disconnect 1 connector to take off the drawer detection sensor Drawer detection sensor Fig 9 24 A 7 Drawer feed sensor S34 S40 S46 S52 1 Remove 1 screw to take off the drawer feed sensor with its bracket 2 Disconnect 1 connector to take off the Drawer feed sensor drawer feed sensor A 8 Drawer bottom sensor S30 S37 S42 S48 1 Take off all the feed units LO P 9 20 Paper feeder unit Bypass feed unit 2 Disconnect the connector and take off each drawer bottom sensor Note Equipment with the LCF does not have the 3rd and 4th drawer bottom sensors bottom sensor Fig 9 26 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC B Intermediate transport unit 1 Take off the first paper feeder unit CO P 9 20 A Paper feeder unit Bypass feed unit 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3 screws to take off the intermediate transport unit Fig 9 27 B 1 Motor driving PC board 2 1 Release the harness from the harness clamp Then remove 2 screws to take off the Gear bracket Note Be careful not to drop the gear because will O 2 comes out of place when its bracket is taken
97. IH coil Current flowing on the surface of the fuser roller High freguency power source Side IH coil High frequency Eddy current Current flowing inside the fuser roller magnetic field Fig 14 3 Block diagram of IH board Control circuit for high freguency current Fuser roller IGBT driver Ripple filter circuit i Monitoring input current il r 5 i EE Input al A voltage al 1 v 5 E E Monitoring input voltage UE circuit for LGC board 14 4 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 6 14 4 3 control circuit interface The IH control circuit uses a photocoupler as an insulator against the secondary circuit The interface signals are as followed Connector No Signal Direction Definition CN455 1 2 LGC board to board IH coil energization permitting signal CN455 2 5VSW CN455 3 H1PWR1 Switching signal of power setting 455 4 H1PWR2 CN455 5 H1PWR3 CN455 6 H2PWR1 CN455 7 H2PWR2 CN455 8 H2PWR3 CN455 9 IH1ON IH coil energization permitting signal 455 10 5 CN455 11 IHDUTY Duty ratio changing signal CN455 12 IHERR1 IH board to LGC board IH status signal CN455 13 IHERR2 CN455 14 IHER
98. LU P 2 47 L Rear cover Connector 2 Disconnect 1 connector 3 Remove 2 screws Then take off the RADF unit by sliding it to the rear side and lifting it up while the unit is opened Fig 16 108 B Cover B 1 ADF front cover 1 Open the jam access cover Then remove 3 screws to take off the ADF front cover 1 Screw ADF front cover Fig 16 109 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 85 B 2 ADF rear cover 1 Open the jam access cover Then remove 4 screws to take off the ADF rear cover B 3 ADF left cover 1 Remove 2 screws Then release the hook by sliding it downward to take off the ADF left cover Note The screw on the front side is a stepped screw B 4 ADF right cover 1 Take off the ADF front cover and ADF rear cover P 16 85 B 1 ADF front cover P 16 86 B 2 ADF rear cover Remove 4 screws to take off the ADF right cover 2 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF ADF rear cover Fig 16 110 ADF left cover Fig 16 111 ADF right cover Fig 16 112 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 86 C control PC board ADF board 1 Take off the ADF rear cover LU P 16 86 B 2 ADF rear cover 2 Disconnect all of 15 connectors of the ADF board 3
99. Laser control PC board PLG board 16 Intermediate transfer roller C1 Cleaning web I7 Registration sensor C2 Cleaning web pushing roller 18 Intermediate transport sensor C3 Fuser roller 19 Paper dust removal brush 1 C4 Separation finger 110 Paper dust removal brush 2 C5 Fuser exit roller J1 1st drawer C6 Pressure roller J2 1st drawer transport roller C7 Fuser roller thermistor J3 1st drawer feed roller C8 Pressure roller thermistor J4 1st drawer separation roller C9 Fuser roller thermostat J5 1st drawer pickup roller D1 Upper developer sleeve Magnetic roller J6 1st drawer transport sensor D2 Lower developer sleeve Magnetic roller J7 1st drawer feed sensor D3 Doctor blade K1 2nd drawer D4 Scattered toner recovery roller K2 2nd drawer transport roller D5 Auto toner sensor K3 2nd drawer feed roller E1 Drum surface potential sensor K4 2nd drawer separation roller E2 Drum thermistor K5 2nd drawer pickup roller E3 Drum K6 2nd drawer transport sensor E4 Charger wire cleaner K7 2nd drawer feed sensor E5 Main charger L1 3rd drawer E6 Discharge LED L2 3rd drawer transport roller Tandem LCF transport roller E7 Drum cleaning blade L3 3rd drawer feed roller Tandem LCF feed roller E8 Drum cleaning brush L4 3rd drawer separation roller Tandem LCF separation roller E9 Recovered tonertransport auger L5 3rd drawer pickup roller Tandem LCF pickup roller E10 Image quality sensor L6 3rd drawer transport sensor E11 Drum recovery bl
100. M9 H MO NO 440 NO 330 330 NO 440 M99 1 M09 dojs 1 MO H MO NO 440 doe 1 M9 H MO NO 440 NO 330 NO 440 IN 1 MOO dojs MO NO 440 doe plomdn NO 330 NO 440 plouelos jews Josuas jews Josues 8519181 jjeuis jews Josuas JOSU S efue1 plouelos oseejel 961E ploualos e6JeJ 100w e61e7 HLS N9S ygs Jojow peas Josues peoy 105 5 Josuas uBue EUIBIO Jusunoog Josues Adus Josues emo Josues 1eddn Bumm March 2005 TOSHIBA e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 64 916 ree 28 6 2892 8597 52 7 4692 6267 6576 vve 0526 2906 2706 642 KG 996 6626 LEE SOLE CLIE HEI erer 0526 2906 621 9922 8126 SOLE
101. Motor driving PC board the transfer belt motor MOT board MOT2 PWA F MOT2 MT Controlling the drive of the transport motor Fig 2 19 17 10 MT Transport motor driving PC board MOT2 MT board MOT2 PWA F MOT2 RV Controlling the drive of the reverse motor Fig 2 17 13 19 RV Reverse motor driving PC board MOT2 RV board SYS PWA F SYS Controlling the whole system and image Fig 2 23 54 2 System control PC board processing SYS board LGC PWA F LGC Controlling the print engine section Fig 2 23 53 2 Logic PC board LGC board FIL PWA F FIL Filtering out the AC power noise Fig 2 26 52 6A Filter PC board Only for NAD SAD model of all equip FIL board ments and TWD model of e STUDIO600 720 ADF PWA F ADF Controlling the RADF Fig 2 30 88 13 RADF control PC board ADF board 6 Lamps and heaters Symbol Name Function Remarks LP EXPO Exposing originals Fig 2 5 36 3 Exposure lamp Fig 2 6 ERS LP ERS Eliminating residual charge on the drum Fig 2 14 39 11 Discharge LED surface IH COIL IH COIL Heating up the fuser roller Fig 2 11 26 5 coil DH1 SCN DH L Preventing condensation of the mirrors of Fig 2 7 38 9 Scanner damp heater the carriage Left DH2 SCN DH R Preventing condensation of the lens Fig 2 7 38 10 Scanner damp heater Right DH3 DRM DH Preventing condensation of the drum Fig 2 15 21 28 Drum damp heater 7 Thermistors and thermostats Symbol Name Function Remarks THM1 THMS F HTR Detecting the surface temperature
102. OFF Specified pulse passed Small original exit motor decelerated Small original exit sensor OFF Small original exit roller passed Small original exit motor stopped Trailing edge control for small original discharging completed Fig 16 81 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 61 Chart iming 16 10 T 8 92 4991 4662 4872 4 92 097 2921 m 820 692 904 9LOL 9912 820 0 6 86 9 9202 S 8L 56 1 TT E EE gr ELE sw JUN Two sheets of A3 single sided original 0092 0002 0091 000 NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 M99 1 M09 dois 0 MO MO NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 1 M09 dois 0 MO M9 NO 440 dos 330 330 330 MDD W 1 M99 dos 330 das piomdn NO 440 NO 440 plouejos jews Josues jews Josuas jews Josues nodsueJy ayeIpawayu Josuas
103. ON Carriage 1 and 2 move forward The polygonal motor M2 rotates at a high speed the e STUDIO850 is always at a high speed Each motor is turned ON The drum transfer belt fuser unit and developer unit rotate The main charger developer bias and discharge LED ERS are turned ON The fans rotate at a high speed 2 Drawer paper feeding Each motor is turned ON The drum transfer belt fuser unit and developer unit rotate The main charger developer bias and discharge LED ERS are turned ON The fans rotate at a high speed The feed motor M20 drawer feed clutch CLT6 8 10 12 and drawer transport clutch CLT5 7 9 11 are turned ON The pickup roller feed roller and transport roller start to rotate The paper reaches the transport roller The drawer transport sensor 533 39 45 51 is turned ON The drawer feed clutch CLT6 8 10 12 and drawer transport clutch CLT5 7 9 11 are turned OFF after a certain period of time The paper reaches the intermediate transfer roller The paper reaches the registration roller registration sensor 518 is turned ON and aligning is performed 3 Carriage operation Scan motor M1 ON The exposure lamp EXP is turned ON gt White shading compensation is performed The scan motor M1 is turned ON Carriage 1 and 2 move forward 4 Within a certain time after carriage operation The
104. PROCESS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 7 Fusing Fusing is a process of melting and fixing the toner on the paper Method The softening point of the toner main ingredient resin is 90 to 100 Heat The toner is melted by the heat of the surface of the fuser roller Pressure The pressure roller is pressed against the fuser roller by the springs to increase adherence of the melted toner to the paper Heat and pressure are applied to the paper when it passes between the fuser roller and pressure roller The toner is fixed on the paper 8 Cleaning Fuser roller s Paper A C 24 3 18 Fuser roller Separation finger Paper movement S Pressu Pressure roller Fig 3 19 Cleaning is a process of recovering the residual toner on the photoconductive drum 1 The cleaning brush scrapes off the excessive toner and paper wastes The flicker scrapes off the toner on the brush Also too prevent the cleaning blade from scratching the surface of the drum to make a circumfer ential streak the varistor is attached between the brush and earth 2 Cleaning blade scrapes off the residual toner on the drum March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY PROCESS 3 The recovery blade picks up the scraped toner Cleaning blade Flicker Recovery blade Fig 3 20 9 Discharging Dischargi
105. SLG board 3 3VC 5 1VD 12VD CN409 For the finisher 5 1VG CN410 For the FAX board 12VF Cover switch line Connector Destination Voltage CN402 For the LGC board external LCF via LGC board 24VA 24VB 24VC 36VA 36VB CN403 For the PLG board 5 1VH 24VD 36VC CN404 For the SLG board ADF board RADF 24VE 24VG 36VD CN409 For the finisher 24VF e STUDIO520 600 720 850 POWER SUPPLY UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 17 4 Fuse When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out confirm that there is no abnormality with each part using the following table Voltage Board unit Part Fuse type 24VA LGC board Developer unit motor M10 F4 8A Semi time lag Fuser cooling fan M28 Duct in fan M30 Developer unit fan M31 Laser unit cooling fan M32 Switching regulator cooling fan 1 M34 Switching regulator cooling fan 2 M35 Drum separation finger solenoid SOL1 Copy key card 24VB LGC board Web motor M4 F3 8A Semi time lag New toner supply motor M5 New toner transport motor M6 Hopper motor M7 Recycle toner trans port motor M8 Used toner transport motor M9 Wire cleaner drive motor M12 Cleaning brush drive motor M13 Transfer belt cam motor M15 Transport motor M17 Exit motor M18 Reverse motor M19 Auto toner sensor 512 Drum surface potential sensor 513 Main switch SW6 H
106. STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Service call display Displays error codes and service call symbols Error code Call for service TOTAL COUNTER Service call symbol Fig 5 4 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL 5 2 1 Display No Message State of eguipment Note 1 Power is OFF at Sleep Mode Press START button or FUNC TION button to clear 2 Saving energy press At Energy Saving Mode Press START button to clear START button 3 Wait Warming Up Scanner warming up Auto Start can be set e Displayed until the equipment becomes ready to start scanning 4 Wait Warming Up Scanner warming up Press STOP button to clear the Auto Start Displayed when Auto Start is set Auto Start 5 WAIT Displayed when performing the con trolling function to keep the equip ment at the best condition 6 Performing Auto Calibra Performing the auto calibration for Recovers when the Auto Calibration tion the image density has finished Displayed when the equipment has decided to adjust the image density under certain conditions and is performing the auto cali bration accordingly 7 READY Ready for copying Waiting for the operation 8 READY Copying job interrupted Press START button to resume Press START button to copying or press MEMORY CLEAR copy button to delete the job 9 READY S
107. STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 18 13 After the original trailing edge has passed the 3 roller The large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the original intermediate transport sensor 570 then proceeded a specified distance The small original exit motor M40 starts to slow down when the trailing edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the small original reverse sensor S66 Then it stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the small original reverse sensor 566 and proceeded a specified distance Fig 16 34 The small original exit motor M40 starts to rotate forward Then it starts to slow down with a speci fied time delay after the small original reverse sensor S66 has detected the leading edge of the original Fig 16 35 The small original exit motor M40 stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the small original exit sensor S67 then proceeded a specified distance The small orig inal exit solenoid SOL4 turns OFF and the operation ends when the original has been discharged Fig 16 36 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RA
108. Toshiba TEC Corporation 4 Cautionary Labels During servicing be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as Unplug the power cable during service CAUTION HOT CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION LASER etc to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment 5 Disposal of the Equipment Supplies Packing Materials Used Batteries IC RAMs Regarding the recovery and disposal of the eguipment supplies packing materials used batter ies and IC RAMs including lithium batteries follow the relevant local regulations or rules Caution Dispose of used batteries and IC RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual Attention Se d barrasser de batteries et IC RAMs us s y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel Vorsicht Entsorgung des gebrauchten Batterien und IC RAMs inclusive der Lithium Batterie nach diesem Handbuch CONTENTS 1 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 1 USE 6 aged 1 1 1 2 e ET 1 9 153 s 1 10 14 lee 1 11 1 5 System LIST EE 1 12 2 OUTLINE OF THE 4444444 4400 2 1 2 1 Sectional View 2 1 2 2 Electric PartSEayout i
109. be sure that the seals on both sides are not damaged E Transfer Transport unit 1 2 Take off the transfer unit LU P 13 6 A Transfer unit Take off the fuser unit P 14 18 B Fuser unit Note Make sure to take off the fuser unit and transfer unit before the transfer transport unit March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Cleaning blade Fig 13 12 Urethan seal Cleaning blade Fig 13 13 17 Transfer transport unit Fig 13 14 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 3 Remove 2 stepped screws fixing the slide rail 4 Hold A shaft or stay with your left hand 5 Hold the slide rail on the right with your right hand 6 Lift up the transfer transport unit to release the hook 7 Push in the slide rail while loosening the slide rail on the right side e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT Slide rail Slide rail ene Fig 13 15 Catch up section 13 10 Fig 13 17 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 8 Shift A or B from your left to your right hand and then hold in your left hand 9 Take off the transfer transpo
110. beam at the laser emission position The laser diode radiates the laser beams responding to the laser emission control ON OFF signals from the laser drive board Laser beams which have passed through the finite focus lens are focused on the drum sur face Laser precautions A laser diode is used for this eguipment and radiates an invisible laser beam Since it is not visible be extremely careful when handling the laser optical unit components per forming operations or adjusting the laser beam Also never perform the procedure with other than the specified manuals because you could be exposed to the laser radiation The laser unit is completely sealed with a protective cover As long as only the operations of speci fied manuals are performed the laser beam is not leaked and you are in no danger of being exposed to laser radiation The following cautionary label for the laser is attached to the left side of the front inner cover DANGER CLASS 3B INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPTICAL UNIT OPEN OR DRUM UNIT REMOVED AND INTERLOCK DEFEATED AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM VORSICHT KLASSE 3B UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN DIE ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET ODER DIE TROMMEL ENTFERNT UND DIE VERRIEGELUNG UNWIRKSAM GEMACHT WIRD NICHT DIREKT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN DANGER CLASSE 3B RAYON LASER INVISIBLE LORSQUE LE BLOC OPTIQUE EST OUVERT LE TAMBOUR RETIRE ET LE VERROUILLAGE HORS D USAGE EVITER L EXPOSITION DIRECTE AU RAYON PELIGRO RADIACION INVISIBLE
111. beams is used only for the e STUDIO850 and the 1 beam type for the e STUDIO520 600 720 Fig 8 1 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT e STUDIO520 600 720 10 lens 1 Laser driving PC board 1 Laser diode Finite focus lens Cylinder lens Laser control PC board Polygonal motor H sync detection PC board 2nd turnup mirror H sync turnup mirror LL 1st turnup mirror Slit glass Laser optical unit overview Fig 8 2 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 8 2 e STUDIO850 Laser driving PC board 1 Laser emission unit 1st laser diode Finite focus lens lens 1 Laser driving PC board 2 2nd laser diode Finite focus lens Half mirror Galvanic mirror Cylinder lens H sync detection PC board Polygonal motor 2nd turnup mirror Laser control PC board 1st turnup mirror Slit glass Laser beam exit Laser optical unit overview Fig 8 3 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT 8 2 Structure 8 2 1 Laser optical unit This unit consists of the laser diode finite focus lens aperture half mirror 1 galvanic mirror GLV 71 and cylinder lens x 1 Used for the e STUDIO850 only Laser diode This laser diode features low drooping small laser variation and a low threshold current The aper ture determines the shape of the laser
112. breaking of each thermistor These thermistors also check the temperature of the fuser roller or the pressure roller regularly to prevent them from excessive heating caused by a circuit abnormality or a thermistor abnormality If the temperature of these rollers has exceeded a specified level the thermistors automatically turn the power of the eguipment OFF 5 1VC c a Fuser roller 2 center thermistor MTH 1A SE 5 1VC e Fuser roller rear thermistor STH 1A 58 Main CPU SOT 5 1VC e THMCH 1 Fuser roller front thermistor 1 o 11 L 1 24 Analog 5 1VC multiplexer e Pressure roller thermistor PTH 1A E e A Fig 14 8 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 12 7 Abnormality detection by the thermistors The table below shows the judging conditions of abnormal temperatures of the fuser roller and the pressure roller and their checking timing Temperature judged Pres Error Checking Condi Center Rear Front sure Error Counter timing tion ther ther ther roller code 08 400 9 9 gt iming mistor mistor mistor ther mistor Power ON 1 240 or C449 9 Power ON above 250 or above 270 or above 250 or C468 8 above 2 40 or 150 or C412 2 below ab
113. circuit Converts AC voltage input from outside to DC voltage and supplies it to each electric part The DC voltage is divided into the following two lines a Main switch line Power supply used in the entire eguipment during image forming pro cess Three kinds of voltage 3 3 V 5 1 V and 12 V are output when the main switch of the eguipment is turned ON b Cover switch line Power supply used in the entire eguipment during image forming pro cess being supplied via the cover switch Three kinds of voltage 5 1 V 24 V and 36 V are output only when the main switch of the eguip ment is turned ON and the cover interlock switch is turned ON front cover lower and left lower cover are closed March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 17 2 Operation of DC Output Circuit 1 Starting line output When the main switch of the eguipment is turned ON voltage starts supplying to all the lines However it starts supplying to the cover switch line only when 2 covers front cover lower and left lower cover are closed 2 Stopping line output When the main switch of the eguipment is turned OFF PWR DN signal is output after the instan taneous outage insurance time 20 ms or more elapses and then the supply of each voltage stops If the supply of the main switch line 3 3VA 5 1VA 12VA stops earlier than the 24 V 36 V line does it may cause the damage of the electron device on eac
114. density control Image quality sensor lt 6 Development Magnetic roller Two magnetic rollers lt e Auto toner Magnetic bridge circuit method lt Toner supply Toner cartridge system lt There is a toner system detection Density detection system lt There is a toner cartridge empty detecting system by piezoelectric type sensor Toner T 6510 6510E 6510D T 6000 T 6000E T 6000D Developer material D 6510 D 6000 Developer bias DC 500V AC 394 V 200 to 800 V DC AC 7 Transfer Transfer Transfer belt lt Power supply roller Power supply roller lt Separation auxiliary roller none lt 8 Separation Transfer belt charging lt Separation finger applied lt 9 Discharging Discharging position Discharge by exposure after cleaning Discharge lamp Discharge by red LED lt e Pre cleaning discharge None lt 10 Cleaning System Blade Brush lt e Recovered toner Reuse by the toner recycle system lt 11 Cleaning brush bias Varistor 430V lt 12 Fusing System Long life heat roller system lt Fuser roller Fluoroplastic coated lt 260 Pressure roller tube roller Pressure roller tube roller 260 550 610 050 810 060 Cleaning Cleaning web lt for fuser roller cleaning Pressure roller cleaning felt roller none Pressure roller cleaning metal roller none Heater IH coil Induction hea
115. developer unit Developer unit not installed appears Solution Connect the connectors of the developer unit and close the front cover lower E Replacing the toner cartridge The toner cartridge empty sensor S10 detects that there is no more toner left in the cartridge Open front cover upper replace the toner cartridge The toner cartridge is not replaced The Vater density becomes low The auto toner sensor 512 detects that there is no more toner left in the cartridge Control circuit gt The copying operation is disabled Solution Replace the toner cartridge with a new one F Replacing the toner bag toner bag becomes full of used toner The used toner transport auger moves to the feed side The toner bag full detection sensor 511 is turned ON Y Replace toner bag appears Solution Have your service engineer replace the toner bag with a new one and clear the value of 08 476 to 0 The toner bag full detection sensor 511 is turned ON during copying The copying stops after the last sheet copied is discharged Solution Have your service engineer replace the toner bag with a new one and clear the value of 08 476 to 0 G Call for service Check the error code displayed on the control panel when Call for service appears and handle the abnormality in reference to the error code table in the Service Handbook March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATIO
116. developer unit A driving PC board is embedded in this motor to perform the following controls LGC board Developer unit motor board section Motor section 1C58 FG pulse Main CPU p A Se Difference T Phase V correction comparator Voltage detection Speed circuit Excitation comparator phase switching section DEVCK 1 Difference DEVON 0 Hall element C Rotor DVMBK 0 control position detection Hall element B Fig 12 6 1 ASIC outputs the control signals for the developer unit motor rotation DEVON signal Motor rotation command 2 The excitation phase switching section excites each phase of the developer unit motor The developer unit motor is rotated 3 Hall elements and detect the rotation position of the motor rotor 4 The excitation phase switching section switches the excitation of each phase The motor keeps rotating by repeating from 2 to 4 5 An FG Frequency Generator pulse is generated by the rotation of the motor 6 The FG pulse and the reference frequency from the ASIC are compared in terms of the phase and speed and the difference is added to the excitation phase switching section Fluctuations in the power supply voltage are also added to the value Signal generation 7 According to the result of step 6 the switching timing of the excit
117. down automatically when the drawer is removed It is raised as soon as the drawer is reinstalled and checks if there is paper in the drawer From the start to the end of printing The feed motor M20 starts driving when the START button is pressed When the equipment judges that the tandem LCF is ready for feeding paper it turns ON the tan dem LCF feed clutch CLT10 This clutch drives the pickup roller and feed roller to feed paper from the tray e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 3 The tandem LCF transport clutch CLT9 is turned ON to drive the transport roller when the spec ified period of time has passed from the start of feeding 4 When the leading edge of the paper turns the tandem LCF feed sensor S46 ON the tandem LCF feed clutch CLT10 is turned OFF and feeding from the tandem LCF is completed 5 The paper is transported by the transport roller If the trailing edge of the sheet previously trans ported still remains at the 2nd drawer transport sensor S39 when the leading edge of the paper reaches the tandem LCF feed sensor S46 the tandem LCF transport clutch 9 is turned OFF to stop the transport of the paper 6 When the trailing edge of the paper turns the tandem LCF feed sensor S46 OFF the tandem LCF then becomes ready for feeding the next sheet of paper and the procedures 2 to 5 are repeated for the number of the printout 7 When printing is completed
118. exit and read motors M39 M36 start to rotate forward and when the leading edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the read sensor S69 they start to slow down They stop to rotate when the leading edge of the original has reached the read sensor S69 then the original has been transported a specified distance by the read motor M36 At the same time the original stop signal is set Fig 16 25 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 14 8 Start of 1st original back side scanning Scanning starts after receiving the original transport signal from the engine At the same time the original stop signal is reset When the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward the large original exit motor M39 also starts to rotate forward and the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 turns ON The SCN STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section The large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 has turned ON When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the intermediate transport section and come to a specified distance before the intermediate transport roller the large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse and the small original exit motor M40 also starts to rotate
119. formation condition 2 Adjustment of the sensor 3 Formation of the test pattern 4 Reading of the value for the image guality sensor 5 Determination Is the toner amount of the test pattern within the permissible amount Back to 3 YES NO 6 Changing of the image formation condition 7 Finish controlling Reflecting the determined image formation condition to the following printing March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT 11 5 11 5 Drum motor control circuit The drum motor control circuit is composed as shown in the figure below It drives the drum motor by the drive signal output from the main CPU on the LGC board and rotates the drum The drum motor is a stepping motor driven by the pulse signal DRMA 0 DRMB 0 DRMAB 0 DRMBB 0 output from the motor driver These pulse signals are formed based on the reference clock signal DRCLK 0 and output only when the enable signal DRMEN 1 is L level Also the rotation speed or direction of the motor can be switched by changing the output timing of each pulse signal The rotation speed can be switched by the motor current switch signal DRMVR 0 and the rotation direction can be switched by the motor rotation direction switch signal DRMCW 0 LGC board 58 DRCLK 0 DRMCW 0 DRMVR 0 DRMEN 1 MOT board
120. fuser unit e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 4 Fuser Control Circuit 14 4 1 Configuration Side thermostat Center thermostat Center thermistor Rear thermistor Fuser roller Power cable Pressure roller Noise filter Pressure roller thermistor LGC board d Coil output Main CPU AC input IH power source drive circuit 7 Power supply for photocoupler Photocoupler Switching signal of power setting IH status signal Control circuit including CPU coil energization permitting signal Duty ratio changing signal Temperature control circuit AC line DCline Fig 14 2 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 5 14 4 2 Heating of IH coil The magnetic field is generated by applying a high freguency current to the IH coil inside the fuser roller which then produces the eddy current in it When the eddy current flows the Joule heat is gener ated by the resistance element of the fuser roller which is then heated In the IH coil method the ther mal efficiency is higher than the lamp method because the fuser roller is directly heated IH coil is divided into two parts to decrease the temperature difference between the center and both ends of the fuser roller Image of current flowing from A to B Center
121. guality image processing LDR board LDR Image data flow Laser drive Fig 7 3 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 IMAGE PROCESSING 05 07 7 3 Scanning Section Control PC Board SLG 7 3 1 Features 1 The image processing section on the SLG board SLG is controlled by the CPU on the SLG board SLG 2 The image processing section on the SLG board SLG realizes the following when functioning the equipment High quality image processing mage memory editing Editing processing Gamma correction Gradation processing External output system interface 7 3 2 Functions of image processing 1 High quality image processing Background processing function Range correction This function removes undesirable background so that the original can be reproduced appropri ately By using the background adjustment function while manually adjusting the image density undesirable background of the original can be removed if any and some necessary but disap peared background can be recovered By using this function it is possible to cut the background density down to zero when copying originals which have a certain level of background density such as newspapers lt Example gt Dynamic range Extended dynamic range i width i i width gt adjustment EE i ground Smaller lt No of pixels Larger Smalle
122. ignored 2 Width direction size The status of the original width detection sensor 1 to 3 S56 S57 S58 are stored when the leading edge of an original reaches the position 10 mm further from the 1st roller after feeding has started with the original at the pre feeding position 3 Feeding direction size When the leading edge of an original reaches the position 7 mm further from the read sensor 569 the original size is decided by considering the information whether or not the original length detec tion sensor S63 is ON original position base code and status of the original width detection sensor 1 to 3 556 557 S58 Then it is transmitted to the engine However when the original length detec tion sensor 563 is ON at the mixed original mode the original size for some combinations cannot be decided In this case the size is decided by taking into consideration the document feed motor M37 pulses counted during the time after the original is idle reversed until it passes through the original length detection sensor 563 and transmitted to the engine March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 43 hart ion c detect ize i Is 16 8 2 Or 4 series igina Size decided Size 288 2 mm Reversal without Reversal without reading width length reading length decided over mm detected mm Original
123. in reverse and the small original exit solenoid SOL4 turns ON Feeding of the next original starts when the read motor M36 has counted a specified time since the start of the scanning operation Fig 16 26 The SCN STR turns OFF when the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section At the same time the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 also turns OFF The next original reaches the scanning waiting position and stops before the trailing edge of the original passes the 3rd roller Fig 16 27 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 15 9 Start of 2nd original back side scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine At the same time the original stop signal is reset The read motor M36 starts to rotate forward and the large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse The SCN STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section and the large original exit solenoid SOL5 turns ON too The large original exit motor M39 starts to accelerate when the trailing edge of 1st original has passed the 3rd roller and proceeded a speci fied distance Fig 16 28 When the leading edge of the original ha
124. in the NVRAM are output to the ASIC The data of the reference voltage is output from the ASIC to the D A converter Digital to analog conversion at the D A converter The reference voltage Vctr of each bias is output to the high voltage transformer The high voltage transformer generates the output current or output voltage proportionate to the ref erence voltage The reference voltage Vctr can be adjusted in the Adjustment Mode 05 The output of the transfer belt cleaning brush was adjusted at a constant value when the high volt age transformer was shipped from the factory and this adjusted value has been fixed since then Developer AC bias generating clock This clock signal is a reference for the AC component of the developer bias Leak detection signal HVTER 0 This signal detects the abnormality leakage of the high voltage transformer output When the abnor mality is detected the signal moves to a low level March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION 10 5 Drum Surface Potential Sensor Control Circuit 10 5 1 General description The drum surface potential sensor measures the surface potential of the drum when the drum is charged Based on the measured value this sensor controls the main charger grid bias voltage and thus can control the drum surface potential accurately 10 5 2 Configuration The configuration of this control circuit is shown be
125. input voltage to the main CPU becomes lower LGC board 5 1VC IC58 DRTH 0A Main CPU Drum thermistor Fig 11 2 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT 11 4 Image Guality Control 11 4 1 Outline This eguipment performs image guality control with the image guality sensor Image guality control is for altering the image formation condition to minimize the changing of the image density and line width caused by the setting environment for the equipment and the life of consumables The image guality sensor detects the density of the test pattern developed on the drum and the image formation condition is changed depending on the result 11 4 2 Construction The construction of the control circuit is as follows e Image quality sensor This sensor emits the light corresponding to the of the light source amount signal output from the control section onto the drum and outputs the voltage corresponding to the reflected light amount of the drum and the test pattern toner image on the drum Control section LGC board This section performs image guality control mainly with the main CPU which outputs the light source amount signal CTDVR 1A of the image guality sensor by a D A converter and converts the reflected light amount signal CTDS 1 into a digital signal by mean of the converter embedded in the main CPU and reads it and then sets the i
126. is decreased 2 Toner scattering occurs 3 Background fogging occurs Solution Replace new developer material No frictional electrification on the area where the toner is caked on Fig 3 12 Magnetic roller Magnetic brush development The south and north poles are arranged inside the magnetic rollers as shown in the following figure The developer material forms a brush like fluff which contacts the photoconductive drum surface Y This is caused by the lines of magnetic force between the south and north poles Lines of magnetic force Photoconductive drum gt N O Magnetic roller Fig 3 13 Additional Explanation The life of the toner cartridge number of copies varies depending on the following conditions 1 Coverage of originals printing image ratio of the original size and density of original background 2 Size and density of originals 3 The existence of solid black when making copies when a book is copied and the original cover is partially open 4 Temperature and humidity in the room when making copies 5 Copy density and image quality mode As indicated in the figure below the life of the toner cartridge varies depending on the copy mode and coverage of originals e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY PROCESS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC A full block in the figure below denotes 10 000 AZ GE gt
127. is rotated along with the rotation of the coupling to supply the toner Toner cartridge detection switch SW2 This switch detects the rotation of the toner cartridge Toner cartridge empty sensor S10 This sensor is a piezoelectric type sensor which detects the empty status of the cartridge When the toner is adhered on the surface of this sensor a correct detection cannot be per formed Therefore a blade to scrape off the toner adhered on the sensor surface is equipped on the toner cartridge holder This blade is rotated by the drive of the new toner supply motor M5 e Sub hopper The sub hopper consists of the paddle to mix the toner transported from the cartridge and the auger to transport the toner to the developer unit March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT New toner transport motor 6 new toner transport motor M6 drives the paddle and auger of the sub hopper through the pulley timing belt and gear Therefore the drive of the toner cartridge holder differs from that of the sub hopper 3 Toner recycling unit A toner recycling system is adopted in this eguipment The toner which has been recovered from the drum surface by the drum cleaner is transported to the developer unit by the toner recycling unit and thus the transported toner is recycled This unit consists of the recycle toner hopper to collect and mix the recycle toner and the pipe to transport the recycle toner fro
128. jam is detected during the time after an original reaches the small original reverse sensor S66 until it reaches the small original exit sensor S67 Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is the time mentioned above plus necessary time for an origi nal to proceed 60 mm 4 Original jammed at the small original exit sensor S67 from the small original reverse side E732 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the deceleration which is set to finish at the position 20 mm short of the small original exit sensor S67 starts until an original passes through the small original exit sensor S67 Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is the time mentioned above plus necessary time for an origi nal to proceed 60 mm 16 6 6 Jams at intermediate transport section 1 Original jammed not reaching the original intermediate transport sensor S70 E752 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original reaches the 3rd roller until it reaches the original intermediate transport sensor S70 Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the 3rd roller to the original intermediate transport sensor S70 plus 30 mm e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 40 2 Original jammed at the original intermediate t
129. judged that there is paper drawer area of the LCD panel blinks when the drawer is selected The copying operation stops B Pick up failure in bypass During bypass feeding The bypass pickup solenoid SOL3 is turned ON The registration sensor 518 is turned ON The registration sensor 518 is not turned ON within a fixed period of time Pick up failure in bypass The clear paper symbol is displayed E120 Copying operation is disabled Solution Remove the paper from the bypass tray gt The bypass paper sensor 527 is turned OFF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION Misfeeding eguipment The fuser transport sensor S9 detects jamming of the leading edge of the paper The registration motor M16 is turned ON The fuser transport sensor S9 is not turned ON within a fixed period of Paper jam E010 gt The copying operation stops The fuser transport sensor S9 detects jamming of the tailing edge of paper The registration motor M16 is turned OFF i The fuser transport sensor S9 is not turned OFF after a fixed period of time Paper jam E020 gt The copying operation stops Immediately after the power is turned ON Any Se sensors the paper transport path detects the paper Paper jam E030 front cover lower opens during copying Paper jam E410 registration sensor 518 detects jamming of th
130. of original trailing edge passed from intermediate transport roller Next original leading edge reached Large original exit motor stopped Large original exit motor speed changed to scanning Specified pulse passed Trailing edge control for small original discharging started Small original exit motor decelerated Small original reversal sensor OFF After counting specified pulse small original exit motor stopped Small original exit motor forward rotation Small original reversal sensor ON Small original exit sensor ON Trailing edge control for small original discharging started Trailing edge control during transporting completed Fig 16 80 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 60 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 Leading edge trailing edge control for small original discharging Leading edge control for small original discharging started Specified pulse of original leading edge passed from intermediate transport roller Small original exit motor forward rotation Small original exit sensor ON Leading edge control for small original discharging completed March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Trailing edge control for small original discharging started Back side Small original reversal sensor
131. of the Fig 2 11 27 6 Fuser roller front thermistor front end of the fuser roller THM2 THMS C HTR Detecting the surface temperature of the Fig 2 11 27 6 Fuser roller center ther center of the fuser roller mistor THM3 THMS R HTR Detecting the surface temperature of the Fig 2 11 27 6 Fuser roller rear thermistor rear end of the fuser roller THMS L HTR Detecting the surface temperature of the Fig 2 11 27 28 Pressure roller thermistor pressure roller 5 THMS DRM Detecting the ambient temperature of the Fig 2 14 90 12 Drum thermistor drum surface e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Symbol Name Function Remarks THMO1 THERMO C HTR Preventing overheating of the inside of the Fig 2 11 27 4 Fuser roller center thermo fuser unit stat THMO2 THERMO S HTR Preventing overheating of the inside of the Fig 2 11 27 4 Fuser roller side thermostat fuser unit THERMO SCN DH Controlling the temperature of the scanner Fig 2 7 38 9 Scanner damp heater ther damp heater mostat 4 THERMO DRM DH Controlling the temperature of the drum Fig 2 15 21 31 Drum damp heater thermo damp heater stat 8 Transformer Symbol Name Function Remarks PS HVT Generating high voltage and supplying it to Fig 2 23 53 7 High voltage transformer the fo
132. processing such as edge enhancement is applied between the targeted pixel and the neighboring pixels to eliminate this phenomenon and realize high reproducibility of original Solid black area Low contrast area Original Image signal After correction Fig 7 6 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 IMAGE PROCESSING 2 Image memory editing This function performs editing such as enlargement reduction mirror imaging etc by using a line memory Pixel data for one line in the primary scanning direction is stored in the line memory and the memory is renewed at each line Enlargement Reduction Enlargement Reduction is accomplished by using the line memory control function in the process of the image processing operation lt Example gt Enlargement 100 200 lt Example gt Reduction 100 50 Mirror imaging This is accomplished by reading and outputting data from its end 3 Editing processing This function performs trimming and masking Trimming Using rectangular area signals the image signals inside the rectangular area are left and the other image signals are eliminated Masking Using rectangular area signals the image data inside the rectangular area are erased Negative positive reversing This function reverses the entire date from negative to positive or vice versa 4 Gamma correction This function corrects the input output characteristics of the scanner printer and adjusts
133. pull out the power cable before starting maintenance or checking Especially do not touch the IGBT when Without tag the power is ON since it is generating high voltage 9 9 Fig 14 12 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 17 4 Disconnect 3 connectors and remove 6 screws to take off the IH board Heater control PC board Screw S U LN LU LH crew _ U 5 S Screw gt PEE gt n Connector Connector ia A Yellow TD Screw 1 White Fig 14 13 Fuser unit 1 Remove 2 screws and open the IH cover 1 carefully to the front side 2 Remove 2 screws to take off knob cover b 3 Remove 4 screws and then release 4 power supply harnesses of the IH coil 4 Disconnect 4 connectors 5 Remove 2 screws and open the IH cover 2 to the front side e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 18 6 Remove 1 screw move the fuser unit for ward and lift it off upward Notes 1 When installing or taking off the fuser unit grab the section A in the figure 2 Be sure that the temperature of the fuser unit has lowered
134. rear cover APS operation sensor Sensor flag 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw Then take off the APS operation sensor with its bracket 3 Take off the APS sensor separating the light shielding section of the sensor flag from the sensor A Nee Fig 16 140 G 7 Original intermediate transport sensor S70 1 Open the platen guide and then remove 1 screw fixing the band 2 Move the platen guide to the right side Then release its support to take off the platen guide 3 Remove 2 screws to take off the post scan ning guide 4 Remove 4 screws and disconnect 1 connec Screw Screw Small original transport guide tor Then take off the small original transport guide Post scanning E e guide 17 Stepped screw Fig 16 142 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 570010520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 97 5 Disconnect 1 connector to take off the origi nal intermediate transport sensor Original intermediate transport sensor 7 m Small original transport guide Fig 16 143 6 8 openi
135. rear cover LU P 2 47 L Rear cover 3 Take offthe LGC board cover and disconnect 1 connector 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the exit motor L O ring Exit motor Fig 15 23 When installing the receiving tray add the O rings service parts to the exit roller in order to improve the paper stacking condition 1 Remove 6 screws and take off the left lower cover exit cover P 2 46 Left lower cover Exit cover 2 Remove 2 E rings and move the 2 bearings toward the inside 3 Move the exit roller to the near side and install 2 O rings to the grooves of the exit roller Note O ring Refer to the parts list for the parts number and so on e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION 15 16 05 07 E ring Bearing x des Fig 15 25 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 1 General Description The Reversing Automatic Document Feeder RADF is a device that automatically feeds originals one by one to the ADF original glass and discharges them to the receiving tray after scanning is finished RADF consists of the following sections Original feeding section This section consisting of the pickup belt feed roller separation roller r
136. registration motor M16 is turned ON The paper is transported to the transfer area The copy counter operates 5 Within a certain time after the registration motor M16 is turned ON the transfer belt bias is turned ON 6 Completion of scanning The scan motor M1 is turned OFF The exposure lamp EXP is turned OFF The registration motor M16 is turned OFF after the trailing edge of the paper passes the regis tration roller March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION 7 Paper exit The exit sensor 522 detects the trailing edge of the paper The eguipment enters the toner supply operation when developer material toner density is lower than the preset value The main charger developer bias and discharge LED ERS are turned OFF The drum transfer belt fuser unit and developer unit stop Each fan returns to the ready rotation The feed motor M20 is turned OFF The rotation speed of the polygonal motor M2 switches from a high speed to a low speed e STUDIO520 600 720 READY appears and the equipment enters the ready state e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Timing chart for copying A4 sized sheet fed from the 1st drawer e STUDIO520 600 720 440 JOSUOS pun Jesn vise 8684 Ho 1252 330 vier ol NO yosiq 330 seq Jodoigne 9ELY 92v NO q 440
137. sensor out the harness 3 Remove 2 screws to take off the auto toner sensor Fig 12 29 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 21 G Guide roller G 1 Guide roller on the front side 1 Take off the developer unit CO P 12 19 Developer unit 2 Remove 2 screws take off the bracket and then remove 3 gears 3 Remove 1 E ring and then the spring 4 Remove 2 E rings and take off 2 guide roll ers G 2 Guide roller on the rear side 1 Take off the developer unit LO P 12 19 Developer unit 2 Remove 1 E ring and then the gear 3 Remove 1 E ring 1 spring and then the bushing 4 Remove 4 screws the rear side frame and then disconnect the bias connector e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT Screw Bracket Screw Fig 12 30 Spring E ring Guide roller Fig 12 31 Screw Gear Fig 12 32 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 22 5 Remove the bias plate and the spring 6 Remove 2 E rings and take off 2 guide roll Spring E ring ers Bias plate Note Make sure that the color of the guide roller is correct when assembling upper side white Guide roller lower side black Whit Guide roller Black E ring Fig 12 33 H Scattered toner recovery roller Deve
138. sensor S59 has detected the top side of the original The original empty sensor 560 detects whether or not there is a next original when a specified time passes after the original registration sensor 555 has detected the trailing edge of the original If not the tray lift motor M38 starts to rotate to lower the tray and the original set signal turns OFF The tray lift motor M38 stops rotating when the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor 562 has detected the tray When the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section the SCN STR turns OFF and both the read and large original exit motors M36 M39 start to accelerate Fig 16 42 When the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller then proceeded a specified distance the large original exit motor M39 starts to slow down and the read motor M36 stops rotating The large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the large original exit sensor 568 then proceeded a specified distance The large orig inal exit solenoid SOL5 turns OFF and the operation ends when the original has been discharged Fig 16 43 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 23 16 5 4 two sided feeding Operational condition
139. sui Wun March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Fig 4 2 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION 4 2 4 Bypass feed copying 1 A sheet of paper is inserted into the bypass tray The bypass feed sensor 527 is turned ON gt Set media type appears Select the media type and paper size gt Ready for bypass feeding appears 2 Pressing the START button Ready for bypass feeding changes to COPYING The drum developer unit transfer belt and fuser roller rotate The main charger developer bias and discharge LED ERS are turned ON Each fan rotates at a high speed 3 Bypass feeding The bypass pickup solenoid SOL3 is turned ON The feed motor M20 is turned ON The bypass pickup roller is lowered The bypass feed clutch CLT4 is turned ON The bypass pickup roller and bypass feed roller start to rotate Aligning operation The paper reaches the registration roller After a certain period of time the bypass pickup solenoid SOL3 and bypass feed clutch CLT4 are turned OFF 4 Hereafter the operation 3 to 6 of 4 2 3 Drawer feed copying with START button is repeated 4 2 5 Interruption copying 1 Pressing the INTERRUPT button The LED INTERRUPT is turned ON The copying operation in progress stops temporarily Carriage 1 and 2 return to their appropriate positions Job interrupted job 1 saved appears The automatic density and reproduction ratio 100 a
140. sure to attach the pin 2 The remaining portion of the cleaning web checked from the small square hole of the fuser unit Fig 14 22 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 21 Notes When the web has been replaced check the following items 1 When the web pushing roller has been replaced reel the web for 3 to 5 turns by hand Check the cleaning web is tightly reeled after it has been installed in the fuser unit Turn the jam access knob of the fuser unit for 10 to 15 times to fit the web and the fuser roller Check if there are not any slacks or creases on the cleaning web Start the PM Support Mode 65 to reset the counter of the cleaning web At the first power ON after this counter reset the web motor rotates for 65 sec onds Turn the power of the equipment ON Then confirm that the message READY has appeared on the touch panel Perform the final check of the fuser unit cleaning web the same checking as Step 4 When the web motor is rotated at the output check in the Test Mode 03 124 the cleaning web may be slackened Do not rotate the motor for more than 10 seconds to prevent the web from being slackened D coil 1 Take off the fuser unit LU P 14 18 B Fuser unit 2 Take off the cleaning web unit LU P 14 19 Cleaning web unit Clean ing
141. the bracket 2 Disconnect 1 connector release the latch and take off the Standby side mis stacking sensor J 2 Tandem LCF end fence motor M42 1 Remove 1 E ring and take off 1 bushing 2 Disconnect 1 connector remove 3 screws and take off the motor with the bracket e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM Tandem LCF Fig 9 65 Standby side mis stacking sensor Fig 9 66 Tandem LCF end fence motor E ring Bushing Fig 9 67 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Release 2 gear latches and remove the gear Fig 9 68 4 Remove 3 screws and take off the tandem LCF end fence motor Tandem LCF ia hm end fence motor 9 Fig 9 69 9 3 Tandem LCF end solenoid SOL8 1 Remove 4 screws and take off the bracket 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the tray up unit Bracket e side wall lt SA WS 3 Remove 2 screws disconnect 1 connector 12 SEN and take off the tandem LCF end fence sole GE N noid NO sp Side wall Re TER Z el DONE LAr 35 D I Aal end solenoid 9 70 March 2005 TOSHIBA e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM J 4 Tandem LCF bottom sensor S71 1 Remove 2 screws and take off the plates 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the tray
142. the carriage A lo 3 z Drive pulley Uu gt 2000 eoo o 11000 SS 22 d OF E Fig 6 27 F Scanning section control PC board SLG 1 Take off the lens cover LU 6 16 B Lens cover 2 Disconnect 8 connectors and remove 4 e screws to take off the SLG board SLG board Fig 6 28 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION Lens unit 1 Take off the lens cover 25 P 6 16 B Lens cover Disconnect 1 connector remove 4 screws and remove 2 washers to take out the lens unit Notes 1 When replacing the lens unit do not touch 10 screws denoted with arrows in gt the figure 2 Handle the unit with extra care Do not touch the adjusted area or lens Fig 6 31 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC H Carriage 1 1 Take off the lens cover LU 6 16 B Lens cover 2 Move the carriage 1 to the left side and remove 2 screws o CRE o
143. the image signals so that the input output characteristics would match with the copy mode 5 Gradation processing This function switches the type of gradation processing depending on the copy mode A type which selects the printer characteristics giving the priority to resolution such as for text data and another which selects the printer characteristics giving the priority to gradation reproducibility such as for photographic images 6 External output system interface This function controls the output of the output interface e STUDIO520 600 720 850 IMAGE PROCESSING March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 7 Scanner high guality image processing This function corrects the image signals scanned by the scanner and reproduces them in a higher image guality March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 IMAGE PROCESSING 7 4 Laser Control PC Board PLG 7 4 1 Features 1 The image processing section on the PLG board PLG is controlled by the CPU mounted on the PLG board PLG 2 The image processing functions of the PLG board PLG realizes the followings Smoothing processing External input system interface Image area control Laserrelated control Printer high quality processing 7 4 2 Functions of image processing 1 Smoothing processing This function removes jaggy area and output images after processing the smoothing the character outline 2 External input system interface This funct
144. the original has been transported to the intermediate transport section and come to a specified distance before the intermediate transport roller The large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse Fig 16 17 The SCN SCR turns OFF when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section When the trailing edge of the original has proceeded a specified distance after passing the 3 roller the large original exit motor M39 starts to accelerate Fig 16 18 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 10 7 After the original trailing edge has passed the 3 roller When the leading edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the small original exit roller the small original exit motor M40 starts to rotate forward Fig 16 19 When the original intermediate transport sensor 570 detects the trailing edge of 1st original the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating unless the leading edge of 2nd original has come to a given place If it has the large original exit motor M39 slows down to the speed of scanning When the trailing edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the small original exit roller the small original exit motor M40 starts to slow down
145. the transfer belt Fig 2 14 18 26 Transfer belt motor M15 TRB CAM MOT Driving the contact release movement of Fig 2 14 18 7 Transfer belt cam motor the transfer belt M16 RGST MOT Driving the registration roller Fig 2 16 16 26 Registration motor M17 MT MOT Driving the intermediate transport roller Fig 2 16 17 2 Transport motor M18 EXIT MOT Driving the exit roller Fig 2 17 13 24 Exit motor M19 REV MOT Driving the reverse section Fig 2 17 13 5 Reverse motor M20 FEED MOT Driving the feed roller and pickup roller of Fig 2 21 6 2 Feed motor each drawer or the bypass feed unit M21 5 1 Lifting up the trays in the 1st and 2nd draw Fig 2 21 6 20 Tray up motor 1 ers M22 CST TRY MOT2 Lifting up the trays in the 3rd and 4th draw Fig 2 21 6 20 Tray up motor 2 ers Only for JPD NAD SAD model of all equip ments and TWD model of e STUDIO600 720 M23 SLG FAN MOT Cooling down the SLG board Fig 2 5 34 10 SLG board cooling fan Fig 2 6 M24 REV FAN MOT1 Cooling down the reverse section Fig 2 17 15 12 Reverse section cooling fan 1 rear side e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Symbol Name Function Remarks 25 REV FAN MOT2 Cooling down the reverse section Fig 2 17 15 12 Reverse section cooling front side fan 2 M26 Cooling down the board Fig 2 18 24 17 IH board cooling fan M27 DCT O
146. time lag Document feed motor M37 Tray lift motor M38 Large original exit motor M39 Small original exit motor M40 RADF opening closing switch SW9 Jam access cover opening closing switch SW10 Small original exit solenoid SOL4 Large original exit solenoid SOL5 Large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 36VA LGC board Fuser motor M3 F7 8A Semi time lag Feed motor M20 36VB LGC board Drum motor M11 F7 Semi time lag Transfer belt motor M14 36VC PLG board Polygonal motor M2 F7 8A Semi time lag Only for e STUDIO520 600 720 model 36VD SLG board Scan motor M1 F7 8A Semi time lag e STUDIO520 600 720 850 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 17 6 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 17 5 Configuration of Power Supply Uni 4 291 ZOVNO VO NJYMA 915 pleog 91 pleog 291 p1e0q 291 pleog Jav Jeusiut4 pieog 97S preog 91d preog 291 pleog 91 pleog SAS pieoq 91 pleog pleog 091 915 pleog 91 SAS 04 SAS Joysiuly preog 91d preog 91d preog 97S pyeoq 997 BIA 1eusIul4 pieoq Ddl pyeoq 997 BIA 497 291 pseog SAS SAS p1e0q 291 p1e0q 915 pleog 9 1d pleog SAS pleod SAS preog 97S preog O1d pieoq 291 SAS VOVNO OVNO ZOVNO ZOVNO VOVNO DOEN VOVNO ZOVNO ZOVNO GON OLYNO 90 80 Z0VNO GON SOVNO DOEN 20 Z0VNO 80 N9
147. to maintain a proper image density and line width Drum thermistor 5 Since the charging amount changes depending on the temperature of the drum surface the drum thermistor detects the temperature of the drum surface Drum cleaning brush It eliminates the paper dust and extraneous substances adhering to the drum surface after the paper has been separated It also decreases the friction of the drum cleaning blade to lengthen its life span which improves the image reliability Drum motor M11 It drives the drum through the timing belt pulleys and couplings 10 Cleaning brush driving motor M13 It drives the drum cleaning brush and recovered toner transport auger through the timing belt pulleys and gears 11 Drum separation finger solenoid SOL1 It works only when the leading edge of the paper is passing the drum The drum separation finger is pressed against the drum by this solenoid and the finger separates the paper forcibly from the drum e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 11 3 Drum Temperature Detection Circuit The drum temperature detection circuit is composed as shown in the figure below It converts the input voltage from the drum thermistor into a digital signal by means of the A D converter embedded in the main CPU on the LGC board The drum thermistor is an element whose resistance value is smaller when the temperature is higher Therefore when the temperature becomes higher the
148. tray Switch back pro hibited sensor receiving KR x OB z YES Original length Size 1 Size 2 Width width detection 196 0 mm or over 268 4 mm 9 or over sensor at standby position D E D E e esse E 5i emere Emme Tray guide width Tray guide width receiving scannin ORG IN decided mm ORG IN mm detected receiving Not over 160mm March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 44 LT series Size decided 8 5 8 5 288 2 mm Reversal Reversal reading width length reading length detected decided or over Original sensor 2 2 hibited receiving Original length 196 0 mm or over sensor at 268 4 mm 9 or over standby position receiving scannin ORG IN receiving Not over 160mm e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 45 16 9 Flow Chart 1 Power ON Start of communication line Jig board installed No YES Program rewritten Data read from EEPROM A Cover closed Sensor adjusted Communication
149. up unit 3 Disconnect 1 connector release the latch and take off the tandem LCF bottom sensor e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM Fig 9 71 Tray up unit Tandem LCF bottom sensor Fig 9 73 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC J 5 X End fence home position sensor 573 Standby side empty sensor 574 End fence stop position sensor 575 1 Remove 1 screw and take off the plate cover End fence Plate cover 2 Disconnect the connector for each sensor and take off the sensor End fence End fence stop position sensor home position sensor e 1 Standby side empty sensor Fig 9 75 J 6 Tandem LCE tray up motor M41 1 Take off the switching regulator LU P 2 51 JEJ Switching regulator PS 2 Disconnect 1 connector remove 3 screws and take off the Tandem LCE tray up motor Tandem LCF tray up motor Screw Fig 9 76 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 10 PRO
150. 0 1 Take off the ADF board with its bracket LU P 16 87 RADF control PC board Connector Tension spring Screw ADF board 2 Remove the tension spring 3 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws Then take off the small original exit motor with its tension bracket 4 Remove 2 screws to take off the small origi nal exit motor from its tension bracket lt Installation procedure gt 5 When the small original exit motor has been installed on the tension bracket fix the Screw Small original exit motor bracket temporarily with 2 screws at the posi tion where the bracket is pulled to the down Fig 16 124 end of the right side while the timing belt is hanged over the pulley of the motor 6 Attach the tension spring 7 Loosen the screws fixing the bracket tempo rarily Then tighten these screws so that the timing belt will be tightened Note Be sure that the timing belt has been tight ened completely March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 91 E 5 Large original exit motor M39 1 Take off the ADF board with its bracket P 16 87 C RADF control PC board ADF board 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 spring 3 Loosen 2 screws to release the tension of the belt Then tighten these screws tempo rarily 4 Remove 2 screws to take off the large origi nal exit motor with its bracket 5 Rem
151. 0 5 3 Description of operation 10 7 10 6 Temperature humidity detection circuit 10 8 10 6 1 ss ikonu nn U kn pr r kov non 10 8 10 6 2 Construction EE 10 8 10 7 Disassembly and Replacement non 10 9 11 DRUM CLEANER UNIT 2 4 4444 11 1 TAA Senseo 11 1 NEUE 11 2 11 3 Drum Temperature Detection Creunt enne 11 3 11 4 Image Quality Control oci ai Etre n nee Sgen e mates Pa Sgen eu 11 4 Ee m 11 4 11A Z 11 4 11 4 3 Principle of Image Quality Sensor 11 5 11 4 4 Flow of control 11 5 11 5 Drum Motor control ERR Era eeer 11 6 11 6 Disassembly and Replacement nennen nennen nnns 11 7 12 DEVELOPER UNIT ccce cone erronee co canon cadence co oro ra ala 12 1 12 1 nme 12 1 ays 12 2 12 3 Developer Unit Drive 12 7 12 4 Motor gel ur e 19 TEE 12 8 12 4 1 New toner supply motor control circuit 12 8 12 4 2 Developer unit motor control 12 9 12 5 Auto toner r r r r 12 11 12 5 1 General EE 12 11 12 5 2 Operation of auto toner sensor rn 12 13 12 6 Disassembly and Replacement 12 15 13 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 242 4 4
152. 0 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 8 5 Laser Unit Cooling Fan Control Circuit The laser unit cooling fan is a DC fan motor which sends air to the laser unit heated by the polygonal motor to cool down the unit This fan is controlled to switch its rotation among three high speed low speed and stopping according to the condition of the eguipment LGC board Laser unit cooling fan LDFAN 0 LDFOF 1 Fig 8 11 Signal Function LDFAN 0 Laser unit cooling fan high speed rotation signal LDFOF 1 Laser unit cooling fan low speed rotation signal Relation between each signal level and the rotation of the fan L Low level H High level LDFOF 1 LDFAN 0 Rotation of Fan L L High speed H L L H Low speed H H Stopping March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT 8 6 Disassembly Replacement A Laser unit cooling fan 1 Take off the top right cover right upper cover right center cover and right rear cover CI P 2 44 C Top right cover P 2 45 F Right upper cover P 2 45 G Right center cover P 2 45 H Right rear cover 2 Remove 1 screw loosen 9 screws and take off the plate cover Plate cover 3 Remove 1 screw fixing the Laser unit Not reguired for e STUDIO850 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the laser unit fixing stay
153. 0 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 2 7 b series e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 1 c Heater thermostat DH1 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 1 2 Control panel INV LCD K lt TCP LCD e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC N 1 3 Laser unit a e STUDIO520 600 720 N PLG Fig 2 9 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE b e STUDIO850 OS GLV M2 Fig 2 10 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Fuser related section THM4 Fig 2 11 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 5 Toner cartridge related section S 6 aif Fig 2 12 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 6 Toner used toner recovery unit M7 Fig 2 13 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 15 7 Developer unit drum transfer belt unit related section a Motor sensor switch solenoid lamp thermistor 913 SW3 M
154. 0 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 14 Tandem LCE 572 5018 M42 M41 575 Fig 2 22 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 15 Eguipment rear view MOT HDD HVT LGC Fig 2 23 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 16 AC input section a e STUDIO600 720 JPD model NF1 BRK1 SC Fig 2 24 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC b e STUDIO850 JPD model 1 Fig 2 25 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE e STUDIO520 NAD model e STUDIO600 720 NAD SAD TWD model e STUDIO850 NAD SAD model BRK1 d Fig 2 26 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 AUD MJD model e STUDIO600 720 850 ASD ASU AUD MJD CND KRD model e STUDIO850 TWD model Fig 2 27 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 17 Reversing automatic document feeder a Sensor 553 554 557 556 Fig 2 28 b Sensor Fig 2 29 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Motor sensor switch solenoid PC board M39 SOL5 565 Fig 2 30 d Sensor 6 567 566 Fig 2 31 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 7
155. 0 PC BOARDS 2 FR 40 lt Fig 18 10 18 6 STK672 600 mmm O mmm HALOGEN FREE PWB 1 LEAD FREE PCBA March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 11 PWA F DSP CH SET BO a 1 SEA 844 ate m 00 e gr Br 7 Se 1 0 Br OD to SECHS COE O EY Ne 12 PWA F KEY 1 O 40h o DO De tee s CO D nt g igk 142 By bys o Fig 18 12 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PC BOARDS 18 7 13 PWA F KEY2 SET o Ca KY 2 LED2 SET H Fig 18 13 14 PWA F FUS Optional for NAD MJD model standard for other models TOSHIBA PWB F FUS 3907 6LE09534000
156. 00 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 33 5 Start of back side registering Same operation as 16 5 2 6 6 Start of back side feeding Both the large original exit and read motors M39 M36 start to rotate forward After the leading edge of the original has reached the read sensor 569 and been transported a specified distance by the read motor M36 the large original exit roller release solenoid 5016 ON Then the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating The large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse after the original has been transported to the large original exit and the leading edge of the original has reached the 3 roller Fig 16 61 The large original exit motor M39 starts to slow down when the trailing edge of the original has pro ceeded a specified distance after passing the 4th roller After the large original exit sensor 568 has detected the trailing edge of the original the read motor M36 stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance The original is nipped by the large original exit roller Fig 16 62 7 Back side registering to set the top side Same operation as 16 5 2 6 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC
157. 1 screw and take off the sensor with the bracket 2 Disconnect 1 connector release the latch and take off the sensor e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM Fig 9 59 Bushing Bushing A 2 NN Gear Pin Fig 9 60 Registration sensor March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC G 3 Paper dust removal brush 1 for the rubber registration roller 1 Remove 1 screw and take off the paper dust removal brush Paper dust removal brush 1 Fig 9 62 H Paper dust removal brush 2 for the metallic registration roller 1 Take off the developer unit LU P 12 19 Developer unit Paper dust removal brush 2 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the paper dust removal brush I Registration motor M16 1 Take off the SYS board LU P 2 47 L Rear cover 2 Remove 3 screws and take off the flywheel 3 Remove 3 screws and take off the motor with the bracket 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the motor d ST 07 a cel di e 9 2 o O o 8 F3 0 i p Screw le Screw Fig 9 64 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM Tandem LCE 1 Pull out the tandem LCF 2 Remove 4 screws and take off the tandem LCF J 1 Standby side mis stacking sensor S72 1 Remove 1 screw and take off
158. 103 1 E 4 DAI K SC m IC9 2 169 5 ou pl mo 8 2 S B ed ide i9 1 gt RxDI 7 SGND dii 1 108 6 77 2 2 SGND SGND 777 777 SGND SGND KH 5V 1 18 3 R113 Geo 109 3 168 4 o 10 ack HE 2 ve 3 E 1 gt P40 1 1 cos SGND Lee 77 SGND SGND 5V 5V 1 TP13 3 DAJ K SE Se 169 1 169 5 9 cN 2 Rea 12 T d 13 ape 1 gt 1 1 85 2 2 SGND 777 SGND SGND This is an input circuit to communicate with the engine 1 substitutes 5 V and 0 substitutes 0 V The same logic is used in both the connector and CPU input port e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 80 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 2 RXD SCN STR DF ACK DF REO signals CPU 5V 2 12 1 6 en E as i REB CNI 5 SGND 5 R131 1 021 1 1 1 2 4 3 1 p B Y A TxD 77 De R53 SGND 1 2 CPU 5V 77 i TP15 S CN1 9 SCN STR 2 R25 45 Bias IC8 1 1 013 1 E 1 2 2 Y jj 1 m P64 1 2 89 CPU 5V ERA 2 sa TP16 CN1 4 pF 4 R1293 TW 11 1 014 1 z 1 A 1 1 P63 0 CPU 5V 77 E SGND 3 DF REO 3 T CNI 3 e Cd R128 IC8 6 RAI 014 2 1 2 EE 1 Ja 1 ES Bei 77 SGND Fig 16 104 This is an input circuit to communicate with the copier 1 substitu
159. 11 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 7 3 Start of separation 4 The document feed motor M37 starts to rotate forward When the original length detection sensor 563 detects the leading edge of the original the tray lift motor M38 starts to rotate to lower the tray to a specified level The document feed motor M37 stops rotating when the original has been transported a specified distance after the original registration sensor 555 had detected the leading edge of the original From 2nd original feeding starts after the admission signal to start feeding is received Fig 16 12 Start of feeding The document feed motor M37 starts to rotate in reverse After the document feed motor M37 has finished accelerating the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward With 1st original both the document feed and read motors M37 M36 start to slow down when the leading edge of the origi nal has come to a specified distance before the read sensor S69 From 2nd original the document feed motor M37 starts to slow down when the leading edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the 1st roller The document feed motor M37 stops rotating when the original length detection sensor S63 has detected the trailing edge of the origi nal At the same time the tray lift motor M38 starts to rotate to lift the tr
160. 12 22 D Developer material 1 Take off the developer unit CO P 12 19 Developer unit 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the top cover Fig 12 23 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 19 3 Tilt the developer unit and take out the old developer material by rotating the gear on the rear side Gear Fig 12 24 4 Putin the new developer material 5 Rotate the gear on the rear side several times so that the developer material is mixed evenly Note When installing the top cover make sure that the latches insert completely the cover does not catch in the urethane seal and the ure thane sheets are overlapped correctly Urethane seal inside Urethane seal Fig 12 26 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 20 E Doctor blade 1 Take out the developer material 25 12 19 D Developer material 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the doctor Screw blade Doctor blade Fig 12 27 Note When installing the doctor blade butt both Doctor blade edges to the protrusion on the front and rear side frame and tighten the screw The doc tor sleeve gap does not need to be adjusted Protrusion Fig 12 28 F Auto toner sensor 512 1 Take out the developer material LO 12 19 D Developer material 2 Release the harness from the clamp and pull Auto toner
161. 14 SOL1 THM5 515 12 516 ERS 514 Fig 2 14 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 1 b Heater thermostat PC board THMO4 Fig 2 15 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 1 N 8 Paper transport unit M16 918 CLT3 CLT2 519 Fig 2 16 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 9 Paper exit reverse section 922 923 19 TX MOT2 RV SC 5 P SOL2 M25 S SW5 Fig 2 17 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 1 a lt o 10 Eguipment left view SW6 M27 Pd Xi 29 SW8 Fig 2 18 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 20 11 Eguipment right view M32 TJ 9 M31 925 MOT2 MT ei SOY 526 Fig 2 19 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 12 Bypass feed unit 527 CLT4 SOL3 S28 Fig 2 20 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 13 Paper feeding section 530 539 538 537 536 540 Fig 2 21 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 72
162. 2 S3 54 1 Take off the lens cover P 6 16 B Lens cover LT series 2 Take off 3 APS sensors by disconnecting 1 connector and removing 1 screw for each sensor 54 Fig 6 22 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION D SLG board cooling fan M23 1 Take off the lens cover LU 6 16 B Lens cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to take off the SLG board cooling fan E Exposure lamp EXP 1 Take off the top rear cover P 2 44 E Top rear cover 2 Take off the original glass LU P 6 15 A Original glass 3 Move the carriage 1 to the left side 4 Disconnect the connector release the clamp and remove 1 screw of the exposure lamp e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION SLG board cooling fan Carriage 1 5 Li b D EN 02 v Fig 6 25 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 5 Move the carriage 1 to the position where the side of the frame is cut out 6 Lift up the exposure lamp by holding its rear side to take it off Exposure lamp Note Rotate the drive pulley to move
163. 20 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 2 3 column shows the page and item number in the parts list Symbols and Functions of Various Components 1 Motors Symbol Name Function Remarks 1 SCAN MOT Driving the carriages Fig 2 5 35 6 Scan motor Fig 2 6 M2 POL MOT Driving the polygonal mirror Fig 2 9 32 1A Polygonal motor Fig 2 10 32 1B M3 FUS MOT Driving the fuser Fig 2 11 24 5 Fuser motor M4 WEB MOT Reeling in the cleaning web Fig 2 11 25 16 Web motor M5 TNR MOT Rotating the toner cartridge Fig 2 12 45 27 New toner supply motor M6 TNR TR MOT Transporting toner from the toner cartridge Fig 2 12 45 26 New toner transport motor to the developer unit M7 HOP MOT Driving the recycle toner hopper Fig 2 13 47 15 Hopper motor M8 RCY TNR MOT Transporting recycle toner from the drum Fig 2 13 47 15 Recycle toner transport cleaner unit to the toner hopper motor 9 USD TNR MOT Transporting used toner scraped off from Fig 2 13 46 2 Used toner transport motor the transfer belt with the transfer belt clean ing blade M10 DEV MOT Driving the developer Fig 2 14 42 22 Developer unit motor M11 DRM MOT Driving the drum Fig 2 14 41 18 Drum motor M12 CH CLN MOT Driving the charger wire cleaner Fig 2 14 39 8 Wire cleaner drive motor M13 DRM CLN MOT Driving the cleaning brush and transporting Fig 2 14 31 12 Cleaning brush drive motor recycle toner M14 TRB MOT Driving
164. 229 43 Jeof op JeoD 4 j 1896 Scd Jeep 524 ee ME 879 yun sedojaneq 1696 om Aer ay epis 30014 022 009 024010 115 Fig 12 4 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 7 12 4 Motor Control Circuit 12 4 1 New toner supply motor control circuit The new toner supply motor which is a DC motor driven by control signals from the main CPU on the LGC board rotates the toner cartridge This motor is driven when the on off signal TNRMTON 0 output from the main CPU moves to a high level The motor rotation direction switching signal TNRMTCW 0 switches the rotational direction of this motor LGC board 58 TNMTON 0 New toner supply motor TNMTCW 0 Fig 12 5 Driving signal of new toner supply motor L Low level H High level Signal Motor Status 0 TNMTCW 0 L Off H L Reverse rotation detecting cartridge installation H H Forward rotation when supplying toner e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 4 2 Developer unit motor control circuit The developer unit motor which is a DC motor driven by control signals from the ASIC on the LGC board drives the
165. 30 46 30 50 34 LT ST R discharging Back side 45 28 46 30 46 30 50 34 discharging A4 R B5 R Top side 37 28 38 30 38 30 42 34 LT R discharging Back side 37 28 38 30 38 30 42 34 discharging B4 FOLIO Top side 32 28 34 30 34 30 38 34 LG discharging COMPUTER Back side 32 28 34 30 34 30 38 34 discharging A3 LD Top side 28 28 30 30 30 30 34 34 discharging Back side 28 28 30 30 30 30 34 34 discharging Tolerance Within 0 5 from 1 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 5 Thick 3 Paper weight From over 163 g m 90 Ib Bond to 209 g m 115 7 Index Paper source Drawers Tandem LCF Option LCF e STUDIO520 e STUDIO600 e STUDIO720 e STUDIO850 4 B5 A5 R Top side 52 60 65 72 LT ST R discharging Back side 52 60 65 72 discharging A4 R B5 R Top side 42 46 80 52 LT R discharging Back side 42 46 48 50 discharging B4 FOLIO Top side 37 41 43 44 LG discharging COMPUTER Back side 37 38 40 41 discharging A3 LD Top side 33 36 37 37 discharging Back side 31 32 34 34 discharging Tandem LCF A4 LT only Option LCE A4 B5 LT only Tolerance Within 0 5 from 1 Thick 3 Paper weight From over 163 g m 90 Ib Bond to 209 g m 115 7 Ib Index Paper source Bypass feed e STUDIO520 e STUDIO600 e STUDIO720 e STUDIO8
166. 400TC 22 9110 RA17 RA18 0000000 D 0000000 1 95 063 CH 1012 VHC245 E53 C13 DS90C385AMTD HALOGEN FREE PWB CNG LEAD FREE PCBA m m gt EP GW FR 40 34 1 R35 GS T R36 1C21 I c57 S 4 c58 41 18 vucr244 pm Fig 18 4 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PC BOARDS 18 3 5 PWA F PLG 6 PWA F LDR 8 57 LOX245 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PC BOARDS
167. 444024648 8 13 1 13 1 General Description eee 13 1 LS due te de en 13 2 13 3 General Description of Transfer Belt Unit Operation 13 4 13 4 Transfer belt motor control 13 5 13 5 Disassembly and Replacement nn 13 6 14 FUSER UNIT WE 14 1 JC Ee E oo 14 1 er e EE 14 2 14 3 FUNCIONS Tm 14 3 14 4 Fuser Control EE 14 5 14 4 1 Configuration seen 14 5 14 4 2 Heating principle of IH co ss 14 6 14 4 3 control circuit interface 14 7 14 4 4 Abnormality in the IH control Circuit 14 7 14 4 5 Temperature detection sechon 14 9 14 5 Fuser Motor Control Circuit esse 14 15 14 6 Disassembly and Replacement 14 17 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTENTS 15 EXIUREVERSE SEE TRANS s ok n i a a do bikini pa vin aka 15 1 15 1 General Description see 15 1 15 2 FUNCIONS T 15 2 15 3 Driving of Exit Reverse sechon 15 3 e Mee CU e EE 15 4 15 5 Exit motor control circuit 15 9 15 6 Reverse motor control 2 sise 15 10 15 7 Disassembly and nen 15 11 16 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 1 16 1 General
168. 50 Size specified Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No 4 B5 A5 R Top side 45 28 46 30 46 30 46 30 LT ST R discharging Back side 45 28 46 30 46 30 46 30 discharging A4 R B5 R Top side 37 28 38 30 38 30 38 30 LT R discharging Back side 37 28 38 30 38 30 38 30 discharging B4 FOLIO Top side 32 28 34 30 34 30 34 30 LG discharging COMPUTER Back side 32 28 34 30 34 30 34 30 discharging A3 LD Top side 28 28 30 30 30 30 30 30 discharging Back side 28 28 30 30 30 30 30 30 discharging Tolerance Within 0 5 from 1 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 1 6 e System copy speed Sec EE e STUDIO520 e STUDIO600 e STUDIO720 e STUDIO850 Single sided originals 1 set 20 17 18 11 17 20 14 89 4 3 sets 43 13 38 30 32 95 29 86 Single sided copies 5 sets 65 20 57 72 49 56 43 93 Single sided originals 1 set 23 79 21 83 20 56 18 63 4 3 sets 46 44 41 78 37 03 32 59 Double sided copies 5 sets 69 30 62 37 54 52 46 65 Double sided originals 1 set 41 18 35 57 35 14 33 96 4 3 sets 87 04 75 26 68 23 61 79 Double sided copies 5 sets 132 36 114 96 101 34 89 88 Double sided originals 1 set 37 00 31 28 30 88 30 54 4 3 sets 82 38 70 87 63 86 58 79 Single sided copies 5 sets 128 19 110 63 97 23 86 92 The system copy speed including scanning time is available when 10 sheets of A4 LT size original are
169. 6 20 21 Horizontal transport section and 4 driving clutch 3 CLT4 SFB FEED CLT Driving the transport roller separation Fig 2 20 11 13 Bypass feed clutch roller feed roller and pickup roller of the bypass feed unit CLT5 CST1 TR CLT Driving the transport roller of the 1st drawer Fig 2 21 7 26 1st drawer transport clutch CLT6 CST1 FEED CLT Driving the separation roller feed roller and Fig 2 21 7 26 1st drawer feed clutch pickup roller of the 1st drawer CLT7 CST2 TR CLT Driving the transport roller of the 2nd Fig 2 21 7 26 2nd drawer transport clutch drawer CLT8 CST2 FEED CLT Driving the separation roller feed roller and Fig 2 21 7 26 2nd drawer feed clutch pickup roller of the 2nd drawer CLT9 CST3 TR CLT Driving the transport roller of the 3rd Fig 2 21 7 26 3rd drawer tandem LCF drawer or the tandem LCF transport clutch CLT10 CST3 FEED CLT Driving the separation roller feed roller and Fig 2 21 7 26 3rd drawer tandem LCF pickup roller of the 3rd drawer or the tan feed clutch dem LCF CLT11 CST4 TR CLT Driving the transport roller of the 4th drawer Fig 2 21 7 26 4th drawer transport clutch Only for JPD NAD SAD model of all equip ments and TWD model of e STUDIO600 720 CLT12 CST4 FEED CLT Driving the separation roller feed roller and Fig 2 21 7 26 4th drawer feed clutch pickup roller of the 4th drawer Only for JPD NAD SAD model of all equip ments and TWD model of e STUDIO600 720 e STUDIO520 600
170. 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Solenoids Symbol Name Function Remarks SOL1 SPRT FING SOL Driving the drum separation fingers Fig 2 14 31 17 Drum separation finger solenoid SOL2 GATE SOL Driving the exi reverse gate Fig 2 17 15 2 Gate solenoid SOL3 SFB SOL Driving the lifting movement of the bypass Fig 2 20 10 8 Bypass pickup solenoid pickup roller SOLA DF SD SOL Driving the small original exit flapper Fig 2 30 87 1 Small original exit solenoid 88 7 SOL5 DF LD SOL Driving the large original exit flapper Fig 2 30 89 3 Large original exit solenoid SOL6 DENG SOL Driving the contact release movement of Fig 2 30 89 4 Large original exit roller the large original exit roller release solenoid 5017 LCF PICK SOL Driving the lifting movement of the tandem Fig 2 21 7 36 Tandem LCF pickup sole LCF pickup roller noid Only for ASD ASU AUD MJD CND KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e STUDIO850 SOL8 LCF ENDF SOL Driving of the lever to detect the paper mis Fig 2 22 8 9 Tandem LCF end fence stacking at the standby side of the tandem solenoid LCF Only for ASD ASU AUD MJD CND KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e STUDIO850 5 PC boards Symbol Name Function Remarks CCD PWA F CCD Scanning originals with CCD Fig 2 5 34 1 CCD driving PC board Fig 2 6 CCD board SLG PWA F SLG Controlling the s
171. 761 Original length detection sensor S63 E762 Original registration sensor S55 E763 Original width detection sensor S56 E764 Read sensor S69 E765 Original intermediate transport sensor S70 E766 Small original reverse sensor S66 E767 Small original exit sensor S67 E768 Large original exit sensor S68 Detection timing This detection is judged as jam when power is turned ON or the RADF and RADF jam access cover are closed March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 41 16 7 Errors Errors can be divided into the sensor adjustment error EEPROM error tray lift motor M38 error and temperature detector error 1 Sensor adjustment error 2 3 4 There are 4 kinds of sensor adjustment errors Original length detection sensor S63 adjustment error C830 Read sensor 569 adjustment error C820 Large original exit sensor S68 adjustment error C860 Small original reverse sensor S66 adjustment error C840 The D A output voltage is adjusted so that the A D input voltage for each sensor is kept within the range between 3 16V and 3 55V while carrying out the all sensor adjust ment at the adjustment mode At this time the sensor adjustment error occurs when the D A output voltage cannot be adjusted within the range between 0 04V and 2 90V EEPROM error C730 The EEPROM error occurs when the initialization v
172. 7E28 E29 RAI O 24 8 2 2 R c29 E55 5 MS ZI iesonesiocorr 51 3025 C4 LM98510CCMT RAT RAS 57 TN R11 RITI E34 Ic30c23 1 00000000 cil 0000000 100 50 E36 I 631 K L 341 1 R13 2 Fe iu LM358M Q TPS GND CEST PRET TES VHCO4 C49 OO 4 1 35 E 038 39 R17 C40 R18 R19 C41 C42 C83 41 50 R20 R205 o RAI RA12 VHC08 1C8 85 47 50 RA14 38 E39 E40 QI OE 3 Hie E460 Otas eMe tte RA15 RA13 a ei wC88 220 10 1016 KS6M4U2225CBP ees E79O OE80 O 2 144 OO ae TOSHIBA OE50 0 1 I 29027014 PYB F SLG 39 0M 261809587000 C92 220 10 51832 1 1098 Q111 mmm T MBM28F
173. C or above 270 or above 250 or C468 26 above At paper jam 1 240 or C449 29 On usual above 250 C or above 270 C or above 250 C or 468 28 above The figures in the Condition field denote the priority of error checking figures in the Error code and Counter fields with parentheses denote that an error status has not vet been determined error status is detected only e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 14 14 5 Fuser Motor Control Circuit The fuser motor which is a DC motor driven by control signals from the ASIC on the LGC board drives the fuser roller A driving PC board is embedded in this motor to perform the following controls LGC board Fuser motor PC board section Motor section 1C58 FG pulse Main CPU 5 1VC 36VA Phase V ave Difference T correction comparator 1 1 1C39 Buffer A jetection SE Speed circuit Excitation comparator phase L switching Lem section Difference Counter Pressure roller thermistor temperature detection signal 5 1VC Hall element C Rotation Rotor 56 control position Hall element B Comparator detection ASIC Fig 14 9 1 ASIC outputs the
174. CESS RELATED SECTION 10 1 Construction This chapter describes the following unit regarding the image forming process Main charger Charger wire cleaner Discharge LED Ozone filter Surface potential sensor High voltage transformer Temperature Humidity sensor The drum cleaner unit is described in chapter 11 the developer unit is described in chapter 12 and the transfer transport unit is described in chapter 13 Charger wire cleaner Main charger 3 Discharge LED Drum surface potential sensor Drum Fig 10 1 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION 10 2 Functions 1 4 Main charger The main charger is configured by stretching a charger wire between two insulation blocks pro vided at both ends of the U shaped metal rod When a high voltage is applied to the charger wire the air around the wire is ionized electrostat ically charged and this ionized air is attracted onto the drum s surface This phenomenon is referred to as the corona discharge In the dark the surface of the drum is negatively charged by the corona discharge of the main charger Charger wire cleaner It removes stains on the charger wire regularly to avoid poor charging and drum irregularities The charger wire cleaner p
175. DF 16 19 16 5 3 A4 single sided feeding Operational condition original Reproduction ratio 100 1 Original setting Same operation as 16 5 1 1 2 Lifting of the lifting tray Same operation as 16 5 1 2 3 Start of separating Same operation as 16 5 1 3 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 20 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Start of feeding 5 The document feed motor M37 starts to rotate in reverse When the document feed motor M37 has completed acceleration the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward Both the document feed and read motors M37 M36 start to slow down when the leading edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the read sensor S69 They stop rotating and the original stop signal turns ON when the leading edge of the original has been detected by the read sensor 869 then proceeded a specified distance Fig 16 37 Start of 1st original scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine At the same time the original stop signal is reset When the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward the feed document motor M37 also starts to rotate in reverse and the large original exit solenoid SOL5 turns ON The SCN STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section The large original exit motor M39 starts to
176. E for MJD PS TB6510 for other March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 11 System List 1 5 1 007 1 391 0009 4 0901 49 JM ejeg OLOT IND Jjeuueos OvOc INO Jjeuueos OSOL WO Jejuud 0LOZ NO 0 01 NY SSeJeJIM OLOE ND 0701 49 O LL 19 8cOL TW 1 A A U 090 09 0ZLL d9 19 009 314 15 ejdejs S 4 4 N 009 fIN yun yound L00Z7PIN Jeuesu ZVOL NM JeUSIUI 007 3 ldVlS ejdejs March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 12 2 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 2 1 Sectional View A Front side view NAD and SAD models 4 1 2 A5 C1 A7 E10 E9 E8E7E6 E5 A8 EA 9 2 E1A10 AA T
177. E OF THE MACHINE 0Z 009 0ZS01GN L S e 10 AJUO 22 OS8OIGN LS 2 10 AIUO 21 be 1 JOLILU OIUENJE 920 be ndo 105095 J P AU0I Jose be pJeog SNS Josues Jese Z 1804 SNS 91d Di peojumog DOE DCH WOH 01 Di peojumo g oBEU pleog 2407 gep eBeuu via pieoq 991 ejeq gt sou gen sJayjo pue Spiouejos seuoini SJOSU9S SIOJOW O I Jeued 0 9U09 1 jeuueog Jejuud 2 32 9 March 2005 TOSHIBA 2 42 2 4 System Block Diagram
178. FAN MOT Suctioning ozone generated at charging Fig 2 18 33 3 Duct out fan M28 FUS FAN MOT Cooling down the fuser Fig 2 18 33 3 Fuser cooling fan M29 EXIT FAN MOT Cooling down the exit section Fig 2 18 33 3 Exit section cooling fan M30 DCT I FAN MOT Cooling down the developer unit Fig 2 19 42 25 Duct in fan M31 DEV FAN MOT Suctioning toner Fig 2 19 42 13 Developer unit fan M32 LSU FAN MOT Cooling down the laser unit Fig 2 19 32 9 Laser unit cooling fan M33 SYS FAN MOT Cooling down the SYS board and hard disk Fig 2 23 54 8 SYS board cooling fan M34 PS FAN MOT1 Cooling down the switching regulator Fig 2 23 52 14 Switching regulator cool rear side ing fan 1 M35 PS FAN MOT2 Cooling down the switching regulator Fig 2 23 52 14 Switching regulator cool lower side ing fan 2 M36 DF READ MOT Driving the read roller for originals Fig 2 30 83 27 Read motor M37 DF FEED MOT Driving the feed roller pickup belt and reg Fig 2 30 86 19 Document feed motor istration roller for originals M38 DF TRY MOT Driving the original lifting tray Fig 2 30 86 20 Tray lift motor M39 DF L EXIT MOT Driving the large original exit roller and the Fig 2 30 87 14 Large original exit motor intermediate reverse roller M40 DF S EXIT MOT Driving the small original exit roller and the Fig 2 30 87 13 Small original exit motor small original reverse roller M41 LCF TRY MOT Lifting up the tray in the tandem LCF Fig 2 22 31 34 Tandem LCF tray up motor Only for ASD ASU
179. HIBA TEC 12 26 3 Remove 1 screw 1 E ring and then the pad dle bushing on the rear side 4 Replace the oil seal pressed into the paddle bushing if necessary Procedure for replacing an oil seal LU P 12 27 Fig 12 47 5 Remove the gear 1 E ring and then paddle bushing on the front side 6 Replace the oil seal pressed into the paddle bushing if necessary 7 Take out the paddle Procedure for replacing an oil seal GQ P 12 27 Fig 12 47 lt lt Procedure for replacing an seal gt gt In the developer unit the oil seals are used at the following 9 places Rear side of the upper and lower developer sleeve 1 for each Frontside of the transport sleeve 1 Rearand front side of the mixer 2 for each Rearand front side of the paddle 1 for each Replace the oil seal according to the procedure below 1 Insert the fine screwdriver or the like into the inside of the oil seal and then take out the oil seal by hooking it out 2 Make sure of the direction of the new oil seal and push it in parallel to the frame bushing or the like See the figure on the right 3 Apply the grease Alvania No 2 approx 2 grains of rice all around the inside diameter of the oil seal Note Wipe off the grease which has run off to the inner side of the oil seal March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 27 Paddle bushing Fig 12 45 Paddle Paddle bushing Fig 12 46
180. ING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 52 8 Control for next original detection Control for next original detection started Lifting tray up Specified time passed Next original Lifting tray down Lifting tray up completed Lifting tray down completed Next original separation started Control for next original detection completed Fig 16 73 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 53 Leading edge control during scanning started Original trailing edge on separation side Original trailing edge passed original length detection sensor Document feed motor reverse rotation Previous original trailing edge passed the 3rd roller YES Large original exit motor reverse rotation 9 Leading edge control during scanning Leading edge transported to large original exit side Large original exit motor forward rotation Large original exit solenoid ON Large original exit roller release solenoid ON Read motor started Scanning position reached Scanning start signal set Fig 16 74 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 54 Original trailing edge on large origin
181. Inser tion Mode 29 d originals are scanned Paper jam occurred during copying Start copy job from next RADF scanning page 30 Add paper Displayed when the paper in selected drawer is running out 31 Cannot duplex this size Displayed when the paper size which is not specified for duplex copying is set 32 Cannot use this media type Displayed when the paper size which is not specified for the functions such as stapling or hole punching is set 33 Set standard size Displayed when the paper size which Re set the paper size is not acceptable is set depends on the setting 34 Cannot staple this paper Displayed when the paper type which Re set the paper type type can not be stapled is set at Cover Sheet Copying Mode Sheet Inser tion Mode 35 Cannot duplex copy Displayed when the paper type which Re set the paper type can not be duplexed is set at Cover Sheet Copying Mode Sheet Inser tion Mode 36 Cannot use transparency Displayed when the paper type which Re set the paper type film can not be punched is set at Cover Sheet Copying Mode Sheet Inser tion Mode 37 Copy size A4 LT only Displayed when the paper size which is not specified for Book type duplex copying or Dual page is set March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL Message State of eguipment Note 38 Copy size A4 LT and A4 D
182. KRD Korea drawer configuration of each model differs depending on its destination machine version NAD SAD and TWD e STUDIO600 720 models have 4 drawers Other models have 2 drawers and a tandem LCF In this manual a standard LCF is called the Tandem LCF and MP 4004A L is called the Option LCF O LCF Accepted originals Sheet book and 3 dimensional object The reversing automatic document feeder RADF only accepts paper which not pasted or stapled Single sided originals 50 to 127 g m 13 to 34 Ib Bond Double sided originals 50 to 105 g m 13 to 28 Ib Bond Carbon paper are not acceptable either Maximum size A3 LD Copy speed Copies min e STUDIO520 Drawer Tandem Bypass feed Option Paper size ast 2 374 4th LCF 2 Size Size not LCF 3 1 1 specified specified 4 B5 Top side 52 52 52 52 52 45 28 52 A5 R LT discharging ST R Back side 52 52 52 52 52 45 28 52 discharging A4 R Top side 42 42 42 42 37 28 B5 R discharging Back side 42 42 42 42 37 28 discharging B4 FOLIO Top side 37 37 37 37 32 28 LG discharging COMPUTER Back side 37 37 37 37 32 28 discharging A3 LD Top side 33 33 33 33 28 28 discharging Back side 31 31 31 31 28 28 discharging March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCE
183. M16 and transport clutch CLT5 7 are turned ON and paper is transported to the transfer unit March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 9 3 6 Description of Tandem LCF Operation A 1 1 2 1 2 After power is ON to ready When the eguipment is turned ON the pre running operation at warming up is started The tan dem LCF tray up motor M41 starts to rotate forward and raises the feeding side tray When the tray turns ON the tandem LCE tray up sensor 544 the tandem LCE tray up motor M41 is turned OFF and then the tray is stopped At this time when the tandem LCF empty sensor 543 is ON it is judged that there is paper in the feeding side tray On the other hand the absence of paper in the feeding side tray is assumed when the tandem LCE empty sensor 543 is OFF and the standby side empty sensor 574 is subseguently checked When the standby side empty sensor 574 is OFF that means there is no paper in the standby side tray and it is therefore assumed that there is no paper in the tandem LCE When the standby side empty sensor 574 is ON the paper in the standby side tray is moved to the feeding side tray The tandem LCF tray up motor M41 is rotated in reverse and lowers the feeding side tray The lowered tray turns ON the tandem LCF bottom sensor 571 and the tandem LCF tray up motor M41 is turned OFF to stop the tray The tandem LCF end fence solenoid SOL8
184. N 4 4 Flowchart 4 4 1 Power ON to ready Main SW ON DC power supply ON Is cover opened NO IH coil ON Start initializing Scan motor ON Tray up motor ON Is registration YES sensor ON Is intermediate YES transport sensor ON YES Is exit sensor ON Is horizontal YES dd transport sensor ON 15 reverse YES 2 E030 Fig 4 3 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 4 12 Polygonal motor rotating Scanning section initialization Is toner bag full detection sensor ON Drum motor ON for 6 sec used toner full clear operation YES Toner bag replacement Is toner empty Toner supply Is initialization finished Is toner bag full detection sensor ON Have 20 sec passed after initialization started YES Call for service C260 C270 roller temperature high enough to start D Pre running started 5 fuser roller temperature high enough to be ready 15 d YING Is thermistor cut down Call for service Is heater cut down Call for service YES Call for service YES C410 C440 CA10 Pre running finished READY Fig 4 4 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION 4
185. NNING SECTION Lens Cover 1 Take off the original glass P 6 15 A Original glass A4 series p Eer 2 Disconnect 2 connectors 3 Remove 10 screws to take off the lens cover _ gt Connector a a Sg mag d Wi LI I I 1 a zs tt 1 Lens Cover Connector Fig 6 17 LT series CE D de v Lens cover Connector Fig 6 18 C Automatic original detection sensor APS sensor 51 S2 53 54 S5 1 Take off the lens cover LU 6 16 B Lens cover 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the remaining APS sensor with its bracket e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Remove 1 screw to take off this APS sensor S5 from its bracket APS sensor S5 9 Bracket Fig 6 20 C 1 4 series 51 52 53 54 1 Take off the lens cover P 6 16 B Lens cover A4 series 2 Take off 4 APS sensors by disconnecting 1 c connector and removing 1 screw for each S4 00 sensor H S3 5 une 51 aw H Z E Sek 52 e o Fig 6 21 C 2 series 5
186. NSPORT UNIT 13 11 G 1 Remove the transfer transport unit CI P 13 9 E Transfer Transport unit 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 E ring to take off the each clutch Horizontal transport section driving clutch 2 CLT2 3 CLT3 Horizontal transport section driving clutch 2 Horizontal transport section driving clutch 3 Fig 13 20 H Horizontal transport section driving clutch 1 CLT1 1 Take off the transfer transport unit CI P 13 9 E Transfer Transport unit 2 Disconnect 1 connector 3 Remove 1 E ring and 3 screws to take off the bracket 4 Take off the driving clutch from the shaft Note Fix the stopper of the clutch in the R marked side e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT Bracket Screw Fig 13 21 Horizontal transport section driving clutch 1 Fig 13 22 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 13 12 Notes 1 When fixing the clutch with the E ring be E ring sure that the one side of the E ring latch does not overlap the flat part of the shaft 2 Be sure that the stopper of the clutch is inserted into the groove of the bracket 3 Make sure that the bearing and gear are installed correctly OO Fig 13 23
187. NT FEEDER 16 66 8818 7808 0928 5988 05 8 9598 7868 9898 7988 8 9798 7998 05 8 LELOL 1288 8198 7608 7298 000 sw wun 0056 0006 0068 0008 NO 330 NO 330 NO 330 MOO 1 M99 dois 1 MO NO 440 NO 330 NO 440 NO 330 M99 1 M99 dois D MO MO NO 330 das D MO MO NO 330 NO 330 330 IN M99 M99 dois MO NO 330 das 330 NO 330 yxe jews Josues jews Josues jews 100w yxe jews 105 5 podsue Josuas 1 piouojos 491101 yxe 1 eBie1 1 ALS N9S rubis yes Buipeay peay Josues peay 105 5 Josues ujBue Deet 108095 due Jojouu yy Josues emo Aen Dun Josuas
188. R3 14 4 4 Abnormality in the IH control circuit When an abnormality is detected in the IH control circuit it stops the power supply to the IH coil and displays a message call for service LGC board IH board H1ERR1 0 777 H1ERR2 0 77 H1ERR3 0 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 77 Fig 14 5 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 7 Relation between IH status signal and IH errors L Low level H High level Checking timing Signal Status IHERR1 IHERR2 IHERR3 Error code Counter 08 400 Front cover upper is closed at power ON On usual L L L Abnormality detected at initialization An abnormal status is detected at the initial ization C471 11 Power voltage abnormal ity AC power is not sup plied to the IH board C472 12 Power voltage upper limit abnormality Surge detec tion AC input voltage has exceeded 122 of the rated voltage C473 13 Switching element IGBT abnormality Wire breakings short circuits abnormal fluc tuations or overheating insufficient cooling of IGBT C481 14 IH abnormality C480 15 al No abnormality Power voltage lower limit detection not error AC input voltage has dropped to less than 85 of rated voltage Input current lower limit abno
189. RANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 9 Transfer transport unit lock unlock mechanism The transfer transport unit lock release mechanism locks the unit in the eguipment and unlocks it to draw the unit out to the front side when the paper jam is being cleared The mechanism also separates the transfer belt unit from the drum when the transfer transport unit is drawn out When the unit is being drawn out the mechanism can prevent the erroneous operation of the handle When the handle is turned clockwise a horizontal position the unit can be drawn out Insert the transfer transport unit into the eguipment and turn the handle counterclockwise in a vertical position so that the unit can be locked in If the unit is not inserted completely the handle can not be turned from the horizontal position 10 Transfer belt unit contact release mechanism When printing is completed or a paper jam has occurred the mechanism releases the transfer belt unit from the photoconductive drum When printing is started the mechanism contacts the unit with the photoconductive drum The cam is rotated by the drive of the transfer belt cam motor M15 Along with this rotation the lever on the rear side of the transfer transport unit moves up and down and thus the transfer belt unit and the drum are contacted or released The phase of the cam is controlled by the transfer belt release detection sensor 515 and the transfer belt contact detection se
190. Remove 2 screws Then release the harness from the clamp to take off the ADF board with its bracket 4 Remove 1 screw and release 2 locking sup ports to take off the ADF board ADF board Fig 16 113 D Roller D 1 Pickup belt Feed roller 1 Open the jam access cover 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the upper guide cover 3 Remove 2 clips of the pickup unit Then slide 2 bushings to take off the pickup unit Fig 16 115 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 87 4 Remove 1 clip to pull out the shaft 5 Remove 1 clip to pull out the shaft and then take off the pickup belt 6 Remove 1 clip to pull out the shaft and then take off the feed roller Notes 1 There 3 types of clips with different sizes 2 Be sure to install the feed roller in the proper direction D 2 Separation roller 1 Take off the pickup unit LO 16 87 D 1 Pickup belt Feed roller 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the upper guide unit 3 Remove 2 screws to take off the paper sepa rating unit e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Pickup belt Clip large Metal bushing Clip small H Clip middle Feed roller Fig 16 116
191. SATPF 108 1 102 5 1 EE 1c38 VHC123AMTCX FT VHC123AMTCX FT cigs cise 408 70 8 5012 T z m cs 1050 1034 AAA mn Wei 1 HC213MTCX FT TOS2503FG EL F TD62503FG EL F 8946 RES dcm CC Le d 2 E 1 Nile gt FR 40 lt e TD62308AFG EL F 1074 ER TD6238SAFG EL F TOB230BAFG EL F MMTAHC2A4MTCX FT wei 8HCZASAMTOX FT amp f LL HALOGEN FREE PWB er as LEAD FREE PWB F LGC 390M 6LE09516000 1083 re VHCTS41 ANTCX FT 0248 cur I I Fig 18 2 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PC BOARDS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 18 2 3 PWA F CCD 390 29 wo AER LE09573000 EEN Kier C38 47 16 C53 C56 7 FB ico Di ACTOR TOSHIBA E60 E61 62 63 E64 E65 E66 E67 E68 E69 E70 E71 E72 7 E74 1 19 STK672 56 E33 E26 E2
192. SSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 1 e STUDIO600 Drawer Tandem Bypass feed Paper size ast 2na 319 4th LCF 2 Size Size no we 1 1 specified specified 4 B5 Top side 60 60 60 60 60 46 30 60 A5 R LT discharging ST R Back side 60 60 60 60 60 46 30 60 discharging A4 R Top side 46 46 46 46 38 30 B5 R LT R discharging Back side 46 46 46 46 38 30 discharging B4 FOLIO Top side 41 41 41 41 34 30 LG discharging COMPUTER Back side 38 38 38 38 34 30 discharging A3 LD Top side 36 36 36 36 30 30 discharging Back side 32 32 32 32 30 30 discharging e STUDIO720 Drawer Tandem Bypass feed Option Paper size ast 2nd 3rd 4th LCF 2 Size Size not LCF 3 1 1 specified specified 4 5 side 72 72 72 72 72 46 30 72 A5 R LT discharging ST R Back side 72 72 72 72 72 46 30 72 discharging A4 R Top side 52 52 52 52 38 30 B5 R LT R discharging Back side 50 50 50 50 38 30 discharging B4 FOLIO Top side 44 44 44 44 34 30 LG discharging COMPUTER Back side 41 41 41 41 34 30 discharging A3 LD Top side 37 37 37 37 30 30 discharging Back side 34 34 34 34 30 30 discharging e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 2 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e
193. STUDIO850 Drawer Tandem Bypass feed Option Paper size ast 2 4th LCF 2 Size Size not LCF 3 1 1 specified specified 4 B5 Top side 85 85 85 85 85 50 34 85 A5 R LT discharging ST R Back side 85 8 85 85 85 50 34 85 discharging A4 R Top side 61 61 61 61 42 34 B5 R LT R discharging Back side 56 56 56 56 42 34 discharging B4 FOLIO Top side 52 52 52 52 38 34 LG discharging COMPUTER Back side 45 45 45 45 38 34 discharging A3 LD Top side 43 43 43 43 34 34 discharging Back side 37 37 37 37 34 34 discharging 1 The 3rd drawer and 4th drawer are standard equipments for NAD SAD TWD e STUDIO600 720 versions 2 The Tandem LCF is a standard equipment for ASD ASU AUD MJD CND TWD e STUDIO850 and KRD versions Only A4 LT can be used for the Tandem LCF 3 Only A4 B5 and LT can be used for the Option LCF Each copy speed has been measured in the Continuous Copy Mode using single sided originals placed on the original glass manually Accuracy Within 2 sheets Bypass feed Within 1 sheet Other paper sources A hyphen indicates that the combination is invalid for the subject paper source Values may vary depending on its use condition and environment When the RADF is used each copy speed per minute of e STUDIO520 600 720 850 has reached 52 60 72 85 sheets These copy
194. TATUS button Scanning is enabled e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Message State of eguipment Note 18 READY Finisher is full of paper Resumes printing by removing paper FINISHER FULL e Scanning is enabled from the finisher 19 READY Punching dust box is full Resumes printing by removing HOLE PUNCH DUST BIN Scanning is enabled punching dust from the dust box IS FULL 20 READY Saddle stitcher tray is full of paper SADDLE STITCH TRAY Scanning is enabled FULL 21 READY Incorrect paper size setting CHANGE DRAWER TO CORRECT PAPER SIZE 22 Ready for bypass feeding Paper is set on the bypass tray 23 COPYING At the copying state 24 Auto Start Auto Start is set during printing Cleared by pressing FUNCTION CLEAR button or STOP button 25 Place Doc Feeder in the RADF is open when original is placed Cleared by closing RADF down position on RADF 26 Place originals in the docu Displayed when the conditions are Cleared by setting the original ment feeder set and START button is pressed with no original placed 27 Change direction of original Displayed when the direction of origi nal placed is different from the setting 28 PRESS BASIC and select Displays the warning that the copy is normal paper size not enabled when any drawer but bypass feed is selected at Cover Sheet Copying Mode or Sheet
195. TOSHIBA SERVICE MANUAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS 570010920 600 720 890 File No SME040039B0 04102168700 02 2005 07 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION rights reserved GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR e STUDIO520 600 720 850 The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician Transportation Installation When transporting installing the equipment employ four persons and be sure to move it by the casters while lifting the stoppers The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 210 kg 463 Ib therefore pay full atten tion when handling it Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units e g the RADF when transporting the equipment Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115 V 16 A 127 V 16 A 220 V or 220 240 for its power source The equipment must be grounded for safety Select a suitable place for installation Avoid excessive heat high humidity dust vibration and direct sunlight Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone To insure adequate working space for the copying operation keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm 32 on the left 80 cm 32 on the right and 10 cm 4 on the rear The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over it
196. Upper guide unit Screw Paper separating unit Fig 16 118 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 88 4 Remove 1 clip on the rear side Then slide the bushing to take out the separation roller with its shaft Separation roller Bushing Clip Fig 16 119 5 Remove the clip Then pull out the pulley and pin from the shaft to pull out the separation roller Separation roller Pulley Pin Clip Fig 16 120 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 89 1 5 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Motor Document feed motor M37 Take off the ADF rear cover LU P 16 86 B 2 ADF rear cover Remove 2 screws of the harness duct to slacken the harness Disconnect 1 connector and remove the ten sion spring Then remove 2 screws to take off the document feed motor with its bracket Remove 2 screws to take off the document feed motor from its bracket Installation procedure When the document feed motor has been installed on the tension bracket move the motor to the direction of the white arrow in the figure Then fix it temporarily with 2 Screws Hang the timing belt over the pulley of the motor Loosen the screws fixing the bracket tempo rarily and attach the tension spring Then tighten these s
197. a aana aa E Eaa Eaa 7 1 T 1 General Descriptions 7 1 Lee Men e UE e TTT 7 3 7 3 Scanning Section Control Board SLG ENNEK NEEE REREN ENNA EKKON ERR 7 4 7 31 1 7 4 7 3 2 Functions of image 7 4 7 4 Laser Control PC Board PLG a e Dana Pede ia Dog 7 8 TAA MH 7 8 7 4 2 Functions of image Drocessinmg 7 8 7 5 Laser Driving PC Board LDR sise 7 9 9 LASER OPTICAL UNIT al 8 1 8 1 General Description 8 1 MEM IM H 8 4 8 2 1 Laser optical unt 8 4 8 2 2 Polygorial motor uiri eei eicere ta ENEE EREECHEN 8 5 8 2 3 fO lenses 1 E 8 7 8 2 4 H sync detection PC board SNS board ee 8 7 8 2 5 Laser driving board LDR1 LDR2 board 8 7 PAESI c M 8 8 8 3 Laser Diode Control Circuit 8 9 8 4 Polygonal Motor Control Circuit ss 8 10 8 5 Laser Unit Cooling Fan Control Circuit 8 11 8 6 Disassembly and Replacement ss 8 12 9 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM uana yuan 9 1 9 1 General Description 9 1 9 2 lee 9 4 9 35 Operation nn
198. ad is pushed against the charger wire and moved to and fro on the wire to clean it The charger wire cleaner drive motor M12 moves the charger wire cleaner to and fro It cleans the wire when the power is turned ON the cover interlock switch SW8 is turned ON or 2000 or more continuous copies have been made since the previous cleaning Discharge LED ERS Discharging is a process of reducing or eliminating the electrostatic charges on the drum The discharge LED have two effects a cleaning effect and a pre exposure one The cleaning effect neutralizes and eliminates the residual charges on the drum surface by lowering the electrical resistance of the photosensitive surface as a result of exposing it to the light and the pre expo sure effect keeps a fixed drum surface potential before the charging process There is an array of 14 LEDs with a 660 nm wavelength Ozone filter Ozone produced by corona discharge of the main charger is exhausted through this filter The catalyzer of the ozone filter degrades the ozone Drum surface potential sensor S13 It detects the surface potential of the photoconductive drum and performs control to keep the dif ference between the surface potential and the development bias constant High voltage transformer This board creates the output control voltage of the main charger charge grid power supply roller and developer bias Temperature Humidity sensor S7 This sensor 57 and drum thermistor THM5
199. ade L7 3rd drawer feed sensor E15 Drum separation finger M1 4th drawer F1 Transfer belt driven roller M2 Ath drawer transport roller F2 Transfer belt power supply roller M3 Ath drawer feed roller F3 Transfer belt M4 Ath drawer separation roller F4 Transfer belt drive roller M5 Ath drawer pickup roller F5 Transfer belt cleaning blade M6 Ath drawer transport sensor F6 Transfer belt cleaning brush M7 4th drawer feed sensor G1 Exit roller N1 Tandem LCF G2 Reverse exit switching gate N2 End fence home position sensor G3 Reverse path roller 1 N3 Standby side empty sensor G4 Reverse path roller 2 N4 Standby side mis stacking sensor N5 End fence stop position sensor March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 8 Rear side view NAD and SAD models A 11 D6 E13 E14 F7 F8 C10 G7 DS G8 a 56 18 Lo 1 M9 d SES Te 112 Fig 2 3 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC TWD ASD ASU AUD CND and KRD models A11 D6 E13 E14 F7 F8
200. aked by the separation roller and is not transported any further Feed roller Separation roller Fig 9 6 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 9 3 4 Driving The drive of each motor in the paper feeding area activates the paper transfer roller as follows Feeding area of the drawer or tandem LCF Feeding motor Timing belt Drawer feed clutch Gear Drawer transport clutch M20 Gear Pulley CLT6 8 10 12 CLT5 7 9 11 Drawer pickup roller Transport roller Drawer feed roller Drawer separation roller Bypass feeding area Gear Bypass feed clutch CLT4 D Bypass pickup roller Bypass Transport roller Bypass separation roller Registration motor Timing belt Registration roller M16 Pulley Transport motor gt Timing belt Intermediate transport roller M17 Pulley Tray up motor 1 Tray in the first and second drawer M21 Tray up motor 2 Tray third and fourth drawer M22 For NAD SAD TWD e STUDIO600 720 Tandem LCF Tray up motor gt Tray of the Tandem LCF M41 Except for NAD SAD TWD e STUDIO600 720 Tandem LCF end fence motor Gear Timing belt End fence M42 Except for NAD SAD TWD e STUDIO600 720 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 9 3 5 General operation A 1
201. al exit side Large original exit roller release solenoid ON completed Large original exit motor stopped The 3rd roller reached March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Leading edge NO transported to large original exit side Large original exit motor used in RADF NO Large edge control transporting operation YES during transporting started Large original exit roller release solenoid ON Large original exit motor stopped 4 Large original exit motor started The 4th roller reached Large original exit sensor ON Large original exit roller Leading edge control during scanning completed March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Fig 16 75 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 55 10 Trailing edge control during scanning Trailing edge control during scanning started Transported to large original exit side Original trailing edge on separation side Read motor accelerated until max speed Original trailing edge passed the 1st roller Large original exit motor accelerated until max speed Read sensor OFF Large original exit roller release solenoid OFF Scanning position passed Scanning start signal reset F
202. al registration sensor S55 24 6mm further from the original length detection sensor 563 until it reaches the original registration sensor 555 Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is three times as much time as it takes to transport an original from the middle position between the original length detection sensor S63 and original registra tion sensor S55 to the registration sensor 3 Time out of lifting tray up E715 Detection range This jam is detected during the time after the lifting tray starts to be lifted until the lifting tray upper limit sensor S59 detects Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the motor driving pulse 1 5 times as mush as the normal pulse when the lifting tray moves from the lower to upper limit 4 Time out of lifting tray down E716 Detection range This jam is detected during the time after the lifting tray starts to be lowered until the lifting tray upper limit sensor S62 detects Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the motor driving pulse 1 5 times as mush as the normal pulse when the lifting tray moves from the upper to lower limit 16 6 2 Jams at transporting section 1 Original jammed at the original length detection sensor S63 E713 Jam detection This jam is detected during time after the document feed motor M37 starts to rotate in reverse so that the registration roller starts to transport an original to the read rol
203. al signals 4 Writing Converts image electrical signals into opti cal signals laser emission and exposes them to the surface of the photoconductive drum v 5 Development Makes the negatively charged toner adhere to the photoconductive drum and forms a visible image March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Transfers the visible image on the photo conductive drum onto paper Separation Separates the paper from the drum together with the toner 7 Fusing Fuses the toner onto the paper by applying heat and pressure 8 Brush cleaning Cleans dirt and paper dust on the drum 9 Blade cleaning Forcibly removes the residual toner on the drum 10 Discharging Discharges any remaining negative charge on the drum e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY PROCESS 3 2 Details of Copy Process 1 Photoconductive drum The photoconductive drum consists of two layers an outer and inner layer The outer layer is a photoconductive layer made of an organic photoconductive carrier OPC The inner layer is an aluminum conductive base in a cylindrical form The photoconductive carrier has the characteristic that its electrical resistance changes depending on the strength of the light exposed Example Strong light Resistance is decreased works as a conductor Weak light Resistance is increased works as an insulator pea Photoconductive layer Aluminum conductive base Structure of the photoconductive drum OPC Fig
204. all original exit motor forward rotation For paper no removal detection specified time passed Original found on YES the transporting path NO Paper no removal detection Initialization completed Jam Fig 16 69 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 49 5 Control for separation Control for Separation started Lifting tray up Lifting tray up completed Document feed motor forward rotation Original length detection sensor ON Lifting tray down Original registration sensor ON Document feed motor stopped Original registration sensor OFF Document feed motor forward rotation From original length detection sensor ON specified pulse passed NO Original registration sensor ON Specified pulse passed Document feed motor stopped Fig 16 70 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 50 Pre feeding control from registration roller started Pre feeding trailing edge control started Control for Separation completed March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 6 Control for pre feeding from registration roller Control for pre feeding from registration roller started Feed acceptable
205. alue cannot be written on the EEPROM while carrying out the EEPROM initialization at the adjustment mode or when data cannot be read out from the EEPROM after turning ON the power Tray lift motor M38 error C850 The tray lift motor M38 error occurs when a feeding jam because of which the upper limit lower limit cannot be detected within a specified time while lifting lowering the tray takes place 3 times continuously Temperature detector error C870 The temperature detector error occurs when the temperature detector on the ADF board detects having exceeded the upper or lower limit of the specified temperature The detection timing is when the power is turned ON or the operation is started After detecting the error the ADF operates with the lower motor speed as the temperature rise mode e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 42 16 8 Original Size Detection The original position base code is transmitted to the engine during the time after the feed signal is sent until 1st original passes through the original width detection sensors S56 S57 S58 The original size is detected whenever feeding an original and transmitted to the engine as a code before scanning starts 16 8 1 Original size detection method 1 Original position base code The tray guide width is measured and stored when the feed signal is received Altering of the tray guide position during the operation is
206. ams when paper remains s nn nor 16 41 NO 7 le 16 42 UR Ree EIER e 16 43 16 8 1 Original size detection method 16 43 16 8 2 Original size detection 222 1 aaae ln li 16 44 EN Re NL S 16 46 16 10 ill Le CPI dE 16 62 AG 11 EE 16 74 16 1 2INPUlOUTPUESIG irte ot ete ee o eh nep dee oa deu be Rd ees RS PR REN Kn GO XR 16 80 16 13Disassembly and Replacement 16 85 17 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 1er eee re festege ek iE roo oca oca dna laka ria 17 1 eene Im 17 1 17 2 Operation of DC Output Circuit iii 17 2 17 3 Output Channel 17 3 12A EE 17 5 17 5 Configuration of Power Supply 17 7 17 6 Power Supply Sequence iecit tne gera vr Ty 17 8 17 7 AC Wire 9 17 9 18 163 19 RT 18 1 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTENTS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 1 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 1 Specifications Destinations machine versions of e STUDIO520 600 720 850 machine versions of e STUDIO600 720 850 as follows e STUDIO520 is for NAD AUD MJD only NAD North America Central and South America TWD Taiwan SAD Saudi Arabia ASD Asia Central and South America Other ASU Asia Other AUD Australia MJD Europe CND China
207. an Filter duct dl 4 Fig 12 51 5 Remove 3 screws to take off the fan Developer unit fan Fig 12 52 O Toner bag full detection sensor 511 1 Take off the SYS board case LU P 2 48 A System control PC board SYS board SYS board case 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw to take off the toner bag full detection sensor Toner bag full detection sensor gt Fig 12 53 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 29 Used toner transport motor 9 1 Take off the rear cover LU P 2 47 L Rear cover 2 Take off the left rear cover LU P 2 46 K Left rear cover 3 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to take off the used toner transport motor Used toner transport motor Fig 12 54 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 30 13 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 13 1 General Description The transfer transport unit consists of the following 3 sections Transfer section Separates the paper from the drum with the transfer belt and transports the paper to the fuser unit Fuser unit Fuses the toner onto the paper Horizontal transport section Transports the reversed paper to the intermediate transport roller dur ing duplex printing The general descriptions of the transfer section and the horizontal transport section are shown below T
208. and come to a specified distance before the intermediate transport roller the large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse Feeding of 2nd original starts when the original has been transported a specified distance by the read motor M36 after the original length detection sensor S63 had detected the trailing edge of the original Fig 16 14 The SCN STR turns OFF when the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section and before the trailing edge of the original passes the 3rd roller 2nd original reaches the scanning waiting section and stops being transported Fig 16 15 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 9 6 Start of 2nd original scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine At the same time the original stop signal is reset Then the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward and the large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse The SCN SCR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section When the trailing edge of 1st original has proceeded specified distance after passing the 3rd roller the large original exit motor M39 starts to accelerate Fig 16 16 When the leading edge of
209. and reversed and then transports it to the exit roller or transfer section March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Exit roller Exit reverse gate Reverse path roller 1 Reverse path sensor 1 I Reverse section cooling fan 1 and 2 Reverse path roller 2 Reverse path sensor 2 ka Fig 15 1 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXITIREVERSE SECTION 15 2 Functions 1 Exi reverse gate This gate switches the paper from the fuser unit in the direction of the exit roller or reverse path This is operated by the gate solenoid SOL2 2 Exit roller The exit roller exits the paper from the fuser unit to the outside of the equipment This is driven by the exit motor M18 3 Reverse path rollers The path roller feeds the paper and switches back at the reverse path This is driven by the reverse motor M19 and switches the feeding speed to high after the trailing edge of paper goes through the fuser transport sensor S9 4 Reverse section cooling fan 1 and 2 M24 M25 These fans are equipped to cool down the reverse section 5 Reverse sensor 1 and 2 S23 S24 These sensors detect the state of paper feeding e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 15 3 Driving of Exit Reverse section The paper feeding roller in the exit reverse sect
210. ange the rotation direction within 6 25usec before the first pulse of the MOTCLK 1 becomes ON and after the last pulse becomes OFF Cut off the drive MOTEN O Input Excitation drive is forcibly turned ON OFF output H Normal operation Excited L Excitation drive is forcibly shut off Not excited Voltage to set MOTREF 0 Input Motor wire current value is set in the range of to 3 A phase value for the motor by applying the analog voltage 0 to 5 V current Set the excitation MOTMD1 0 Input Set the excitation mode mode 1 to 3 MOTMD2 0 Note MOTMD3 0 Do not change the setting within 5 after the first pulse of the MOTCLK 1 becomes ON and the last pulse becomes OFF Reset MOTRST 0 Input Reset for the whole system Internal circuit of the driver is initialized by setting the motor to L level pulse interval 10 sec or March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION 6 4 Control for Exposure Lamp 6 4 1 General description Control circuit of the exposure lamp consists of the following 3 blocks 1 Lighting device for the Xenon lamp Lamp inverter board Turns the exposure lamp ON OFF 2 CCD sensor circuit This circuit works to the convert the reflected light amount from the original surface and the shading correction plate to the electrical signals The reflected light amount from the shading correction plate is read to control the exposure amou
211. aration roller A 2 Drawer empty sensor 531 537 543 549 1 Disconnect 1 connector to take off the drawer empty sensor A 3 Tray up sensor 532 538 544 550 1 Disconnect 1 connector 2 Pull the lever and take off the tray up sensor while the pickup roller is lowered e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM Feed roller a Separation e EE 9 18 Drawer empty sensor Fig 9 19 Tray up sensor March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC A 4 Transport sensor 533 539 545 551 1 2 Remove 1 screw to take off the transport sensor with its bracket Disconnect 1 connector to take off the trans port sensor Note When installing the sensor make sure the sensor arm moves properly A 5 Release the harness from the harness clamp Then remove 1 screw to take off the clutch cover 1 Disconnect each connector and remove 1 E ring to take off the feed clutch and transport clutch Notes 1 When installing the clutch do not insert the wrong harness 2 Fit in the protrusion of the clutch to the stopper 3 When fixing the clutch with the E ring be sure that the one side of the E ring latch does not overlap the flat part of the shaft 2 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e Transport sensor Fig 9 21 Feed clutch CLTG CLT8 CLT10 CLT 12 and Transport clutch CLTS CLT7 CLT9 CLT11 Clutch cover Fig 9 22
212. as detected the trailing edge of the original the read motor M36 stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance Then the original is discharged Both the read and document feed motors M36 37 stop when 2nd original has reached the scan ning waiting section Fig 16 41 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 22 6 Start of 2nd original scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine At the same time the original stop signal is reset When the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward the document feed motor M37 also starts to rotate in reverse The large original exit solenoid 5015 has been from 1st original The SCN STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section The large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse when the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and come to the 3 roller When the original registration sensor S55 has detected the trailing edge of the original the docu ment feed motor M37 stops rotating and the tray lift motor M38 starts to rotate to lift the tray The tray lift motor M38 stops rotating when a specified number of counts is counted after the lifting tray upper limit detection
213. aser is as shown below Beam emission starts when the forward current exceeds threshold current and then the laser outputs a monitor current which is proportionate to the optical output Since semiconductive lasers have an individual variability in their threshold current and monitor current the optical output needs an adjustment to be maintained at a certain value The optical output of a semiconductive laser decreases as the laser temperature rises Therefore Auto Power Control needs to be performed to maintain a constant optical output 4 Regulation High temp n 4 1 Ty 1 2 rog 5 S Fi 2 H 7 42 1 cx 2 Low temp 1 eur Forward current M Monitor current Current mA Threshould current Fig 8 8 A block diagram of the semiconductive laser control circuit is shown below The semiconductive laser performs a monitor efficiency regulation a process to control a monitor current for beam emission amount The initial beam emission is adjusted to be approx 2 5 mW 510 uW on the drum surface in the e STUDIO520 600 720 and approx 3 0 mW 300 uW on the drum surface in the e STUDIO850 The voltage of the monitor output which has been regulated by this adjustment is then fed back to a laser power comparison circuit In the laser power comparison circuit this voltage fed back and a laser power voltage set for the control circuit are compared
214. at raised tion When a drawer is inserted or removed in the standby state the tray is raised again to check the availability of paper Bypass feeding bypass feed sensor 527 detects the availability of paper bypass feed clutch CLT4 is turned ON and the bypass pickup roller and bypass feed roller rotate The bypass pickup solenoid SOL3 is turned ON and the bypass pickup roller is lowered to start feeding The leading edge of the paper turns ON the registration sensor 518 and the paper is aligned with the registration roller bypass feed clutch CLT4 is turned OFF and the bypass pickup roller and the bypass feed roller are stopped and then the bypass pickup roller is raised registration motor M16 is turned ON and paper is transported to the transfer unit D Drawer feeding feed clutch CLT6 8 is turned and the pickup roller and feed roller rotate to start feeding e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC The leading edge of paper turns ON the transport sensor S33 39 45 51 the feed clutch CLT6 8 is turned OFF and the transport clutch CLT5 7 is turned ON leading edge of paper turns ON the registration sensor 518 and paper is aligned with the reg istration roller The transport clutch CLT5 7 is turned OFF and the transport roller is stopped The registration motor
215. atio 100 0 5 Zooming 25 to 400 in increments of 1 25 to 200 when using RADF Resolution Gradation Scanning 600 dpi x 600 dpi Printing Eguivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi Gradation 256 steps March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 7 Eliminated portion e Paper feeding Leading edges 3 0 2 0 mm Side trailing edges 2 0 2 0 mm copy Leading trailing edges 5 0 2 0 mm Side edges 5 0 2 0 mm print Drawers 2 drawers Tandem LCF or 4 drawers Depends on versions Drawer Stack height 55 mm equivalent to 500 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib Bond Tandem LCF Stack height 137 mm x 2 equivalent to 2500 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib Bond Bypass feeding Bypass tray Stack height 11 mm equivalent to 100 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib Bond Option LCF MP 4004 Stack height 428 mm equivalent to 4000 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib Bond Capacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder e Automatic duplexer e Toner supply e Density control Weight Power requirements The acceptable A3 to A5 R LD to ST R Stack height 16 mm or less 100 sheets 80 g m 22lb Bond Stackless Switchback type Automatic toner density detection supply Toner cartridge replacing method There is a recycle toner supplying mechanism Automatic density mode and manual density mode sel
216. ation phase switching section is changed namely the pulse and the reference clock are controlled to be equal The developer unit motor rotates at a constant speed Lock range 8 When the DVMBK signal from the ASIC moves to a low level the developer unit motor is braked When the DEVON signal moves to a high level the motor is stopped March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT Control signal of developer unit motor DEVON signal This signal switches the on off of the developer unit motor When this signal moves to a low level the motor is rotated and when this moves to a high level the motor is stopped e DEVCK signal This signal is a reference clock which keeps the developer unit motor rotation at a constant speed When the cyclic change of the FG pulse period against this reference signal is within 6 25 this is defined as a lock range the normal rotation of the motor When the cyclic change is within this range the LED on the driving PC board of this motor is lit DVMBK signal This signal applies a brake on the developer unit motor When this signal moves to a low level brake is applied to the rotation of the motor e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 10 12 5 Auto toner Circuit 12 5 1 General description 1 Function of the auto toner circuit Detects the toner density in the developer material and supplies toner when the density is lo
217. awer Only for JPD NAD SAD model of all equip ments and TWD model of e STUDIO600 720 53 DF TRY SNR Detecting the length of the original set on Fig 2 28 93 102 Original tray sensor the original feeding tray 54 DF TRY VR SNR Detecting the width of the original set on Fig 2 28 93 14 Original tray width sensor the original feeding tray 555 DF RGST SNR Detecting the transporting status of the Fig 2 28 91 103 Original registration sensor original at the registration roller section 556 DF SIZE SNR1 Detecting the width of the original Fig 2 28 91 103 Original width detection sensor 1 S57 DF SIZE SNR2 Detecting the width of the original Fig 2 28 91 103 Original width detection sensor 2 S58 DF SIZE SNR3 Detecting the width of the original Fig 2 28 91 103 Original width detection sensor 3 S59 DF U LMT SNR Detecting the upper limit position of the Fig 2 29 81 29 Lifting tray upper limit original lifting tray detection sensor S60 DF EMP SNR Detecting the presence of the original set Fig 2 29 81 29 Original empty sensor on the original feeding tray S61 DF COV SNR Detecting the opening closing status of the Fig 2 29 81 29 Jam access cover sensor jam access cover S62 DF L LMT SNR Detecting the lower limit position of the Fig 2 29 82 36 Lifting tray lower limit original lifting tray detection sensor S63 DF LENG SNR Detecting the length of the original Fig 2 29 82 31 Original length detection sensor S64 DF APS SNR Switching ON OFF of the APS sensor by
218. ay When the tray has come to a specified level after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor 562 had detected the top side of the original it stops rotating The original empty sensor 560 detects whether or not there is a next original with a specified delay after the original length detection sensor 563 has detected the trailing edge of the original Without a next original the tray lift motor M38 starts to lower the tray to turn the original set signal OFF When the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor 562 has detected the tray it stops rotating With a next original the separation begins at the same time the scanning begins When the original has been transported a specified distance by the read motor M36 after the read sensor S69 had detected the leading edge of the original the read motor M36 stops rotating and the original stop signal turns ON Fig 16 13 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 8 5 Start of 1st original scanning The scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine At the same time the original stop signal is reset Then the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward and to separate the next original The SCN STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section When it has been transported to the intermediate transport section
219. ays SCAN button Screen changed changed Screen Screen Press e FILING Displays Display not Display not Displays Displays e FIL e FILING screen changed changed e FILING screen ING screen Press JEXTEN Display not Display not Display not Display not Display not SION button changed changed changed changed changed Press TEM Displays TEM Display not Display not Displays TEM Display not PLATE button PLATE screen changed changed PLATE screen changed Press USER Displays USER Display not Display not Displays USER Display not FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS changed changed FUNCTIONS changed button screen screen March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 5 11 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL Printing out the During paper When When display During energy copy jam interrupting ing HELP saving mode screen Press HELP Displays HELP Display not Displays HELP Switches to the Display not button screen changed screen screen previ changed ously displayed Press START Displays Display not Displays Displays Energy saving button with the COPYING and changed COPYING and COPYING and mode is cleared original set on RADF starts RADF starts RADF starts and displays RADF feeding feeding feeding BASIC screen e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL 5 12 March 2005 TOSHIBA 5 4 Operation 5 4 1 Dot matrix LCD circuit 1 Structure 640 x 240 dots
220. canner warming WARMING UP 10 Ready Ready for scanning Performing Auto Calibra Displayed when the equipment is tion ready for scanning and waiting for the operator to select the copying conditions Performing the auto calibration 11 READY Printing out the data PRINTING Scanning is enabled 12 READY Ready for scanning Printing is resumed when the ADD INSERTER PAPER The equipment is ready for scan START button is pressed under the ning and waiting for the operator condition the printing UI is displayed to select the copying conditions STATUS button pressed after No inserter paper adding inserter paper 13 READY Ready for scanning Printing is resumed when the ADD TAB SHEET The equipment is ready for scan START button is pressed under the ning and waiting for the operator condition the printing UI is displayed to select the copying conditions JOB STATUS button pressed after No tab paper adding tab paper 14 READY Ready for scanning Printing is started when pressing the FINISHER IN USE The equipment is ready for scan START button ning and waiting for the operator to select the copying conditions Finisher manual operating 15 READY No staples in finisher Cleared by supplying the staples CHECK STAPLER Scanning is enabled 16 READY Stapling jam occurred in finisher CHECK STAPLER 17 READY ADD PAPER No paper in drawer Cleared by supplying papers Press JOB S
221. canning section Fig 2 5 38 1 Scanning section control Fig 2 6 PC board SLG board DSP PWA F DSP Controlling the whole control panel Fig 2 8 3 29 Display PC board DSP board KEY1 PWA F KEY1 Mounting the key switches and LEDs Fig 2 8 3 31 Key PC board 1 at the center and right side of the control KEY1 board panel KEY2 PWA F KEY2 Mounting the key switches Fig 2 8 3 32 Key PC board 2 at the left side of the control panel KEY2 board PLG PWA F PLG Controlling the laser unit Fig 2 9 32 7A Laser control PC board Fig 2 10 32 7B PLG board LDR1 PWA F LDR1 Driving the laser diode Fig 2 9 32 1A Laser driving PC board 1 Fig 2 10 32 1B LDR1 board LDR2 PWA F LDR2 Driving the laser diode Fig 2 10 32 1B Laser driving PC board 2 Only for e STUDIO850 LDR2 board SNS PWA F SNS Detecting the laser beam position Fig 2 9 32 1A H sync detection PC board Fig 2 10 32 1B SNS board FUS PWA F FUS Relaying power to the drum damp heater Fig 2 15 21 30 Fuse PC board FUS board Optional for NAD MJD model standard for other models March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE Symbol Name Function Remarks PWA F IH Controlling the IH coil of the fuser unit Fig 2 18 24 16 Heater control PC board IH board MOT PWA F MOT Controlling the drive of the drum motor and Fig 2 23 41 22
222. ch 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 30 12 Start of 2nd original back side feeding Same operation as 16 5 2 7 13 Start of 2nd original back side scanning Same operation as 16 5 2 8 Fig 16 57 14 ldle reversing and discharging of 2nd original Both the large original exit and read motors M39 M36 start to rotate forward When the leading edge of the original has reached the read sensor S69 then been transported a specified distance by the read motor M36 the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 turns ON The large original exit motor M39 stops when the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 has turned ON When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and reached the 3rd roller and the large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse The large original exit motor M39 starts to slow down when the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller and proceeded a specified distance The read motor M36 stops rotating with out a next original The large original exit motor M36 stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the large original exit sensor S68 and proceeded a specified distance The large origi nal exit solenoid 5015 turns OFF and the operation ends when the original has been discharged
223. control signals for the fuser motor rotation HTRMT signal Motor rotation command 2 The excitation phase switching section excites each phase of the fuser motor The fuser motor is rotated 3 Hall elements detect the rotation position of the motor rotor 4 The excitation phase switching section switches the excitation of each phase The motor keeps rotating by repeating from 2 to 4 5 Freguency Generator pulse is generated by the rotation of the motor 6 The FG pulse and the reference freguency from the ASIC are compared in terms of the phase and speed and the difference is added to the excitation phase switching section Fluctuations in the power supply voltage are also added to the value Signal generation 7 According to the result of step 6 the switching timing of the excitation phase switching section is changed namely the pulse and the reference clock are controlled to be equal The fuser motor is rotated at a constant speed Lock range 8 When the signal moves to a high level the fuser motor is stopped 9 When the pressure roller temperature is lowered to less than the reference value during the ready status the HTRML signal output from the ASIC moves to a low level Thus the motor is rotated at a low speed March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 15 Control signal of fuser motor e HTRMT signal This signal switches
224. crews so that the timing belt will be tightened Tray lift motor M38 Take off the ADF board with its bracket P 16 87 C RADF control PC board ADF board Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws Then take off the tray lift motor with its bracket Remove 2 gears and 2 screws to take off the tray lift motor from the bracket 16 90 Document feed motor Screw Connector z Tension spring Fig 16 121 Tray lift motor Fig 16 122 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC E 3 Read motor M36 1 Take off the ADF rear cover P 16 86 B 2 ADF rear cover Tension spring Screw 2 Remove the tension spring 3 Disconnect 1 connector 4 Remove 3 screws to take off the read motor with its bracket 5 Remove 2 screws to take off the read motor from its bracket lt Installation procedure gt 6 When the read motor has been installed on the bracket hang the timing belt over the pul ley on the equipment side and the read Read motor motor pulley Then pull the bracket down ward to fix it temporarily with 2 screws Fig 16 123 7 Attach the tension spring 8 Loosen the screws fixing the bracket tempo rarily Then tighten these screws so that the timing belt will be tightened Note Be sure that the timing belt has been tight ened completely E 4 Small original exit motor M4
225. d pull out the main charger Ty e E CTS 5 4 e TED 55 CE L2 7 77 Fig 10 6 4 Press the button to release the tension of the main charger grid and then release the hook to remove the grid Main charger grid Fig 10 7 5 Take off 1 finger and then the front terminal cover Terminal cover Latch Fig 10 8 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION 10 9 6 Take off 2 fingers and then the rear terminal cover Terminal cover 7 Pull up the terminal remove the spring and release the hook on the rear side to take off the charger wire 8 Remove 1 screw and take off the cleaning pad Screw Cleaning pad Fig 10 11 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 10 10 Note When assembling the main charger install it so that the charger wire passes through the Cleaning pad Charger wire center of the pad Cleaning pad Fig 10 12 B Wire cleaner drive unit Wire cleaner drive motor M12 1 Take off the cleaner unit LU P 11 7 Cleaner unit 2 Disconnect 1 connector remove 1 screw and then take off the wire cleaner drive unit 3 Disconnect 1 connector remove 1 screw and then take off the wire cleaner drive motor M12 with the bracket 4 R
226. de the exhaust duct to Rh Screw the front side to release the hook and then 02 m FG lu pull H out toward KEEN n Exhoust duct Fig 10 22 G Duct out fan M27 Exit section cooling fan M29 1 Take off the exhaust duct LU P 10 14 F Exhaust duct 2 Disconnect 1 connector and pull out the duct out fan 3 Disconnect 1 connector remove 2 screws and then take off the exit section cooling fan with the bracket 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the exit sec tion cooling fan from the bracket Duct out fan Exit section cooling fan Fig 10 23 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 10 14 H Ozone filter 1 Remove 1 screw on the left face of the rear cover and pull out the ozone filter 2 Remove the ozone filter from the case A Fig 10 24 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION 10 15 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 10 16 11 DRUM CLEANER UNIT 11 1 Construction This chapter describes the drum and cleaner unit The cleaner unit consists of the drive section clean ing section recovered toner transport section image quality sensor 514 drum separation finger etc Laser beam Drum cleaning blade Drum thermistor Drum Drum cleaning br
227. detect the temperature and humidity inside of the equipment since the drum developer material and paper are affected by environmental elements such as temperature or humidity Thus the main charger grid transfer belt developer bias laser output and auto toner output are controlled to be at their optimum states The temperature humidity sensor S7 is installed in the control panel e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 10 3 Charger Wire Cleaner Control Circuit 10 3 1 General description The charger wire cleaner control circuit drives the main charger wire cleaner in a periodical reciprocat ing movement to clean the main charger wire on purpose of eliminating defective or irregular charging over the drum 10 3 2 Configuration The configuration of this control circuit is shown below Wire cleaner drive motor Drives the wire cleaner in a reciprocating movement Wire cleaner position detection switch Detects that the wire cleaner has reached to its home position front side or its stop position rear side Control section LGC board Outputs the drive signal to the wire cleaner drive motor and detects the input signal from the wire cleaner position detection switch Real LGC board Main charger wire cleaner drive unit MCLSW 0A Wire cleaner Wire cleaner position drive motor detection switch Ka IO 58
228. detection sen sor 536 CST2 BTM SNR Detecting the lowering status of the tray in Fig 2 21 30 26 2nd drawer bottom sensor the 2nd drawer 937 CST2 EMP SNR Detecting the presence of the paper in the Fig 2 21 7 18 2nd drawer empty sensor 2nd drawer 538 CST2 TRY SNR Detecting the lifting status of the tray in the Fig 2 21 7 18 2nd drawer tray up sensor 2nd drawer 539 CST2 TR SNR Detecting the paper transport at the paper Fig 2 21 7 18 2nd drawer transport sen feeding system of the 2nd drawer sor 540 CST2 FEED SNR Detecting the paper feeding status of the Fig 2 21 7 18 2nd drawer feed sensor 2nd drawer 541 CST3 SNR Detecting the presence of the 3rd drawer or Fig 2 21 7 18 3rd drawer detection sen the tandem LCF sor 542 CST3 BTM SNR Detecting the lowering status of the tray in Fig 2 21 30 26 3rd drawer bottom sensor the 3rd drawer Only for JPD NAD SAD model of all eguip ments TWD model of e STUDIO600 720 543 CST3 EMP SNR Detecting the presence of the paper in the Fig 2 21 7 18 3rd drawer tandem LCE 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF empty sensor 544 CST3 TRY SNR Detecting the lifting status of the tray in the Fig 2 21 7 18 3rd drawer tandem LCE 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF tray up sensor S45 CST3 TR SNR Detecting the paper transport at the paper Fig 2 21 7 18 3rd drawer tandem LCF feeding system of the 3rd drawer or the transport sensor tandem LCF S46 CST3 FEED SNR Detecting the paper feeding status of the Fig 2 21 7 18 3rd dra
229. dsuejy Josuas 1 Jojoui uo 1 HLS NOS yes Builpeay je peay Josues peay Josues Josues paa 105 5 jduie Josues uonosjep Jomo Dun Josues uonoejep jeddn Aen Fig 16 91 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 71 971 6tev SW gun 650 0766 976 969 904 0607 8067 66 6 2882 Cove 126 vosv Svvv seer 5 6 _ 968 Lgze 6896 8282 622 6192 8 50 2 80 56 2 8092 8104 9967 2019 1219514 De 2892 80 4245 0056 211 82 2 7646 6192 56 2 8092 8 50 81051 596 Svvy Gest vesc 1205 9817 Cor 6LEE 7852 1292 vere VBLE J9LE vere St OLTE 6176 208 PIP veve 6 vove
230. e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION Scan motor Screw Belt tension jig March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC L Carriage home position sensor 56 1 Take off the top left cover P 2 44 D Top left cover 2 Remove the protection sheet 3 Disconnect 1 connector to take off the car riage home position sensor Note When the sensor has been replaced be sure to put a new protection sheet March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Protection sheet Carriage home position sensor Fig 6 44 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 7 IMAGE PROCESSING 7 1 General Description The following diagram shows the process of the eguipment from the input date to writing data on the photoconductive drum surface Image processing section Writing section Original K S T i O Original glass I 1 Lens Image processing Image processing Scanning 8 section scanning control writing control Laser drive section CCD section section SLG PLG S eee
231. e leading edge of the paper The registration sensor 518 is not turned ON within a fixed period of time after the leading edge of paper passes the transport roller Paper jam E200 E210 E300 E330 E260 E110 and The intermediate transport sensor S17 detects jamming of the leading edge of the paper The intermediate transport sensor is not turned ON within a fixed period of time after the leading edge of paper passes the 151 drawer transport sensor 533 i Paper jam E201 E211 E301 E331 E3C1 E261 and E2A1 Each drawer transport sensor 533 39 45 51 detects jamming of the leading edge of the paper The transport sensors 533 39 45 51 are not turned ON within a fixed period of time after the leading edge of the paper passes each drawer feed sensors 534 40 46 52 i Paper jam E230 E240 E250 E370 E380 E3F0 When sheet of reversed paper is transported horizontal transport sensor 1 2 S19 20 or reverse sensor 1 S23 does not detect paper within a fixed period of time Paper jam E511 E512 E540 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC When a sheet of paper is fed the feed sensor 534 40 46 52 is not turned ON after the feed clutch CLT6 8 10 12 is turned ON Paper jam E130 E140 E150 E160 E180 E190 The error codes change depending on the drawer used D The developer unit is not installed properly Disconnecting the connectors of the
232. e reference clock signal 0 and output only when the enable signal 0 is L level Also the rotation speed of the motor can be switched by changing the output timing of each pulse signal LGC board MOT2 MT board MTMCK 0 MTMRF 0 1 57 Transport motor Motor driver 0 0 MTMEN 0 Fig 9 9 Transport motor drive signal Signal Motor status MTMCK 0 0 MTMRF 0 Pulse signal L L Rotation when accelerating decelerating L H Rotation at a constant speed H Stop March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 9 7 Registration motor control circuit The registration motor is a stepping motor driven by the control signal output from the main CPU on the LGC board and rotates the registration roller The main CPU outputs each phase signal RGTA 0 RGTB 0 RGTC 0 RGTD 0 to the motor driver The motor driver converts this phase signal into 24 V pulse signal RGTA 0A RGTB 0A RGTC 0A RGTD 0A and outputs it to the motor Also the rotation speed of the motor can be switched by chang ing the output timing of each pulse signal LGC board 58 RGTVR 0 5 RGTA 0 RGTB 0 Registration motor drive signal IC82 Motor driver Fig 9 10
233. e separation fingers The thermistors THM 2 and 3 detect the fuser roller temperature to control it and when the temper ature becomes abnormally high which is detected by thermostats 1 and 2 the power supply to the IH coil IH COIL is cut off e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 3 Functions 1 coil IH COIL Induction heating The IH coil is inside the fuser roller and applies the induction heat to the fuser roller This IH coil IH COIL is divided into two parts the center IH coil heating the center of the fuser roller and the side IH coil heating both ends of the fuser roller Those parts become ON OFF separately in order to maintain the fuser roller at a certain temperature without wasting excessive electric power Fuser roller The fuser roller is made of iron and induction heated by an IH coil IH COIL It is pressed by the pressure roller which is mentioned below and the toner is fused on the paper while the paper is passing between these two rollers with the toner image on the paper facing the fuser roller So the toner is made to soak into the fibers of the paper by being melted with the heat of the fuser roller and having heat conductivity improved due to pressure from the pressure roller The surface of the fuser roller is coated with fluoroplastic to prevent the toner adhering to it this is called offset and help it become separated from the roller Pressure r
234. e voltage of the 5 V power supply is decreased to 4 25V or lower for some rea son the level of IC5 6 pin becomes L and the CPU is reset e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 77 7 circuit 8 CPU 5V 2 RI16 men TP amp 0 men TPSB 1 E2R DO S 1 1 T E2R DII 3 pr po 1 E2R_CS gt CS TEST ERR SK C 2 sx nc a 2 2 2 163 777 81562 RIS R158 pu 1 1 SGND Fig 16 100 This circuit is an EEPROM to store RADF data and its peripheral circuit IC3 is a memory to store the adjustment value for reflection type sensors and data are sent received between IC3 and CPU using a 4 line type serial interface Data saved in the 1 is not erased even if the power is turned OFF IC3 1 pin CS is a chip selection terminal and its level is H when data are being sent received IC3 2 pin SK is a serial clock terminal and the serial data are sent synchronization with the clock input which is input to this terminal IC3 3 pin Dl is a input terminal for serial data and IC3 4 pin DO is an output terminal for serial data Conversion circuit for D A 62354CP 14 ej E 4 U I ET I M D D D D SGND Fig 16 101 This is a circuit of the D A converter to converse the digital signal from CPU to the analog signal Controls of CPU are d
235. ectable in 11 steps Approximately 210 kg 463 Ib NAD TWD SAD Approximately 204 kg 450 Ib ASD ASU AUD MJD CND KRD AC 115 V 16 A 127 V 16 A 220 V or 220 240 V 9 A 50 60 Hz value of each voltage is 10 Power consumption 2 0 kW or less The electric power is supplied to the options through the equipment 1 5 kW or less TWD version of e STUDIO520 600 720 only e Dimensions of the equipment See the figure below W 698 x D 789 x H 1213 mm 1213 mm e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 1 8 1 2 Accessories Unpacking setup instruction 1 pc Operators manual 1 pc not available for MJD ASU KRD CD ROM 4 pcs Drum 1 pc Toner bag Installed inside of the equipment 1 pc Operator s manual pocket 1 pc Original feeding tray spacer 1 pc Tab paper end guide 1 pc Cleaning cloth 1 pc Cloth case 1 pc Power cable 1 pc for TWD ASD ASU AUD MJD CND KRD Setup report 1 set for ASU MJD Customer satisfaction card 1 pc for ASU MJD KRD Approval sheet 1 pc for CND Envelope 1 pc for CND Packing list 1 pc for CND Label 2 pc for MJD March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 9 1 3 Options Large Capacity Feeder LCF MP 4004L A Fini
236. ection as the origi insertion sheet sheet 1 is different nals from that of other pages at Sheet Insertion Mode 49 Set insert2 sheets in the Displayed when the direction of same direction as the origi insertion sheet sheet 2 is different nals from that of other pages at Sheet Insertion Mode 50 READY Displays when the printing is stopped CHANGE THE PAPER because of media type mismatch TYPE 51 Set transparency film in 4 Displayed when the selected paper LT direction size is other than A4 LT at OHP mode 52 CANNOT PUNCH THIS Displayed when the selected paper SIZE PAPER size is not specified for hole punching 53 Remove paper from the fin Displayed when the paper sizes are isher mixed at Staple Sorting Mode 54 Cannot staple this size Displayed when the paper size is not specified for stapling at Staple Sort ing Mode 55 Remove paper from the fin Finisher is full of papers isher 56 Examine stapler Trouble in the stapler unit in finisher 57 Check staple cartridge No stapler in finisher section 58 Job interrupted job 1 saved Interrupt copying is accepted 59 Ready to resume job 1 Interrupt copying is cancelled fin ished e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Message State of eguipment Note 60 Cannot use AMS mode Displayed when reproduction ratio is Set the reproduction ratio 200 or set to be over
237. ectrical signals image signals which are then sent to the image processing section NANNAN gt con Image processing section Fig 3 5 Example CCD light Value of image receiving signals to be amount output Light 255 Difference between light and dark is divided into 256 steps Dark 0 Fig 3 6 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY PROCESS 4 Writing Writing is a process of converting the image signals sent from the image processing section into optical signals and exposing the drum surface to the light Semiconductor laser element converts image signals sent from the image processing section into optical signals laser emission and exposes the drum surface to the light to form an electrostatic latent image on it Image Laser driving PC board Polygonal mirror Semiconductor laser element Photo conductive drum Fig 3 7 5 Development Development is a process of making the electrostatic latent images visible to the eye visible images Developer material is supplied to the photoconductive drum surface by magnetic roller The toner in the developer material adheres to the areas on the drum surface where the potential is lower than the developer bias which is applied to the magnetic roller reverse development method Drum Magnetic roller Magnetic roller Toner Carrier always attracted o
238. ed The developer unit is judged as empty The empty status of the developer unit is released in the following procedure The new toner supply motor and the new toner transport motor are driven new toner is supplied to the developer unit from the toner cartridge The output value of the auto toner sensor is changed The toner density returns to its normal value The empty status of the developer unit is released March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 13 2 Auto toner sensor drive circuit The auto toner sensor is composed of the following circuits Drive winding Magnetic head primary side with a high freguency magnetic field which forms a magnetic cir cuit in the developer material Detection winding Receiving the changes in the magnetic resistance of the developer material via a magnetic circuit secondary side DC conversion circuit Converting the high freguency output from the detection winding to a DC signal auto toner out put ATS 1A Developer material DC Auto toner sensor E Drive Detection e output To the main CPU Magnetic resistance gt winding 3E winding eene LGC board 5 1 Magnetic circuit Fig 12 8 When the toner density is low Toner ratio to the carrier in the developer material decreased Magnetic resistance decreased Detection output increased Auto t
239. ed the 3 roller When the original registration sensor 555 detects the trailing edge of the original the document feed motor M37 stops rotating and the tray lift motor M38 starts to rotate to lift the tray Then the tray lift motor M38 stops lifting the tray when a specified number of counts is counted after the lift ing tray upper limit detection sensor S59 has detected the top side of the original The original empty sensor 560 detects whether or not there is a next original when a specified time passes after the original registration sensor S55 has detected the trailing edge of the original With a next original separating begins Without it the tray lift motor M38 starts to rotate to lower the tray and the original set signal is reset The tray lift motor M38 stops rotating when the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor 562 has detected the tray The large original exit motor M39 starts to slow down when the trailing edge of the original has pro ceeded a specified distance after passing the 4th roller After the large original exit sensor 568 has detected the trailing edge of the original the read motor M36 stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance The original is nipped by the large original exit roller Fig 16 60 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 6
240. eed motor P 9 33 D Feed motor M20 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 5 screws to take off the AC input Release the harness from the clamp and remove 6 screws to take off the feed driving unit e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM Tray up motor Qr Boss lt UR Boss 54 22 CO SZ Fig 9 53 AC inlet Fig 9 54 Feed drive unit Screw March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC G Registration roller unit 1 Take off the cleaner unit 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the fixing Registration roller unit bracket 3 Open the right center cover and disconnect 1 connector 4 Pull out the registration roller unit toward the front side while tilting it Fixing bracket Fig 9 56 G 1 Registration roller rubber 1 Remove 2 screws and take off the paper guide 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the plate spring Paper guide 3 Remove 1 clip and 2 springs Fig 9 58 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 4 Slide the registration roller to the front side then take off the rear side to remove it Registration roller rubber 5 Take off 2 bushings gear and pin G 2 Registration sensor 518 1 Remove
241. eed the distance from the intermediate transport roller to the small original reverse sensor S66 plus 60 mm 2 Original jammed at the small original reverse sensor S66 to the small original reverse side E741 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the deceleration which is set to finish at the position 20 mm short of the small original reverse sensor S66 starts until an original passes through the small original reverse sensor S66 Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is the time mentioned above plus necessary time for an origi nal to proceed 60 mm 3 Original jammed not reaching the small original reverse sensor S66 from the small original reverse side to the small original exit side E742 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after discharging starts at the small original reverse section until an original reaches the small original reverse sensor S66 Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is three times as much time as mentioned above 4 Original jammed at the small original exit sensor S67 from the small original reverse side to the small original exit side E741 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original reaches the small original exit sensor S66 until it passes through the small original reverse sensor Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is 1 5 times as much time as it takes for an LT wh
242. egistration roller etc feeds originals one by one to the ADF original glass Original transporting scanning section This section consisting of the read roller transport roller etc transports an original on the ADF orig inal glass and scans it at the same time Original reverse exit section This section consisting of the exit roller reverse flapper reverse roller etc discharges an original to either the large or small receiving tray after scanning is finished When two sided scanning is car ried out the original is reversed by switching the reverse flapper and fed again to the ADF original glass Original length detection sensor Pickup belt Original tray sensor Original registration sensor Separation roller Original width Feed roller detection sensor Registration roller Original empty sensor Small original exit sensor 6 Reverse flapper 2 e 9 1st roller Small original exit roller Le Original intermediate E transport roller gt Large original Small original reverse roller exit roller Read sensor S 2 A X 5 2nd roller Large original Small original reverse sensor Read roller 3rd roller 4th roller Intermediate transport sensor Small original reverse flapper Large original exit flapper Small original exit flapper Fig 16 1 Note Large sized original A3 A4 R B4 B5 R
243. el unit 1 Take off the front cover front right inner cover toner cartridge driving unit and toner recycling unit LO P 2 43 A Front cover Upper Lower P 2 43 B Front right inner cover P 12 15 A Toner cartridge drive unit P 12 18 B Toner recycle unit 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the toner car SS tridge catcher Toner cartridge catcher Fig 5 10 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the control panel lower cover 4 Disconnect 2 connectors Fig 5 12 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL 5 Remove 3 screws Then open the RADF take off the control panel unit Note When assembling the unit be sure that the harness is not caught Fig 5 13 B Display PC board DSP 1 Take off the control panel unit P 5 17 A Control panel unit 2 Disconnect 6 connectors and release 2 flat harnesses 3 Remove 4 screws and take off the DSP board Note When installing the board be sure to fix the shielding wire of the LCD Fig 5 14 LCD inverter board NV LCD 1 Take off the control panel unit P 5 17 A Control panel unit 2 Take off the DSP board LU P 5 18 B Display PC board DSP 3 Remove 8 screws and take off the base stay Fig 5 15 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Disconnect 2 connectors
244. emove 2 screws and open the lower sepa Ee ration finger unit 3 Remove the spring to take off the lower sep aration fingers Spring Lower separation finger Fig 14 28 G Fuser roller front center rear thermistor THM1 THM 2 THM 3 Fuser roller center side thermo stat THMO1 THMO2 1 Take off the fuser unit LU P 14 18 B Fuser unit 2 Take off the cleaning web unit LU P 14 19 Cleaning web unit Clean ing web 3 Loosen 2 pressure screws completely Pressure screw cy o ojo o o PoE Ss d hors Ge bOe d0000e o000e eoo Fig 14 29 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 24 4 Remove 2 screws take off the stay Screw Stay Screw Fig 14 30 5 Disconnect each connector remove each screw and take off the thermistor and ther Thermistor Thermostat Thermistor mostat Fig 14 31 Notes 1 When installing the thermostats be care ful not to deform the thermostats and their 2 0 2 5mm brackets 2 Adjust the gap between each thermostat and the fuser roller to be 2 0 2 5 mm Th
245. emove 2 screws and take off the wire cleaner drive motor Wire cleaner drive motor Fig 10 14 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION 10 11 5 Disconnect 2 connectors remove 1 screw and then take off the wire cleaner position detection switch SW4 Note Push the switch in the direction of arrow A to fix it Also carefully insert the connector into the terminal of the color of the harness and then bend the terminal 45 C Discharge LED 5 1 Take off the wire cleaner drive unit Black Purple Connector Fig 10 15 P 10 11 B Wire cleaner drive unit Wire cleaner drive motor M12 2 Disconnect 1 connector Connector 3 Liftthe connector side of the discharge LED Fig 10 16 slightly to release the lock and then slowly pull out the discharge LED from the guide Note Assemble the discharge LED so that all fin gers of the guide are hooked Discharge LED e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION 10 12 Fig 10 17 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC D Drum surface potential sensor 513 1 2 Take off the cleaner unit LU P 11 7 Cleaner unit Disconnect 1 connector remove 1 screw and then take off the sensor bracket 3 Disconnect 1 connector remove 1 screw and then take off the surface potential sensor detection section 4 Disconnect 1 connecto
246. empty sensor 560 detects whether or not there is a next original when a specified time passes after the registration sensor S55 has detected the trailing edge of the original With a next original separating of the next original begins Fig 16 45 When the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section the SCN STR turns OFF and both the read and large original exit motors M36 M39 start to accelerate Fig 16 46 The large original exit motor M39 slows down when the trailing edge of the original has passed the Ath roller and proceeded a specified distance After the large original exit sensor S68 has detected the trailing edge of the original the read motor M36 stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance Then the original is nipped by the large original exit roller March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 25 Fig 16 47 6 Start of 1st original back side registering Same operation as 16 5 2 6 7 Start of 1st original back side feeding Same operation as 16 5 2 7 Fig 16 48 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Marc
247. enough before taking it off If the unit still heated should be taken off wear a pair of gloves before working 3 Hold B sections of the fuser unit when installing removing it Fig 14 16 C Cleaning web unit Cleaning web 1 Remove 2 screws to take off the clean ing web unit Screw Note The cleaning web unit can be taken off with out removing the fuser unit Fig 14 17 2 Remove 4 E rings Then remove 4 bushings to take off the cleaning web 3 Remove 1 E ring 1 bushing 1 E ring 2 E ring Cleaning web gears 1 pin and 1 bushing in order from the shaft E ring E ring Fig 14 18 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 19 Note When the cleaning web has been installed be sure that the web is tightly reeled 4 Remove 2 E rings 2 washers and 2 one way bearings Then take off the web pushing roller Notes 1 When assembling the unit be sure that the one way bearings are in the correct directions 2 Be sure that the web pushing roller rolls only in the direction of the arrow in the fig ure e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT OS 57 Q Fig 14 19 Washer One way bearing One way bearing gt Web pushing roller AI Pe SA Mark side Washer Fig 14 20 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 20 Notes 1 When replacing the cleaning web make
248. er frame A in the figure on the right E Cleaning brush 1 Take off the drum LU P 11 7 B Drum thermistor 5 and Drum 2 Pull out the shaft held on the rear side to take out the cleaning brush F Image quality sensor S14 1 Take off the cleaner unit LU P 11 7 A Cleaner unit 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to take off the image quality sensor e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT 11 10 Recovery blade Drum Cleaner flame Fig 11 15 Cleaning brush Holding shaft Fig 11 16 Image quality sensor Fig 11 17 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Note Do not touch the board parts especially the 3 variable resistors shown in the figure of the image quality sensor Variable resistor Variable resistor O Fig 11 18 G Drum separation finger 1 Take off the drum LU P 11 7 B Drum thermistor 5 and Drum 2 Take off the image quality sensor o o LU 11 10 Image quality sensor 514 6 NV 2 7 3 Remove 2 screws to take off the plate on the 2 rear side SET 19 Screw Plate Fig 11 19 4 Remove the E ring to take off the cam E ring Cam Fig 11 20 March 2005
249. er is installed The drawer is detected i Tray goes up the drawer empty sensor S31 37 43 49 is turned OFF i Add paper appears Y The START button is disabled e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC When the power is turned ON or the feed unit performs initialization Detecting the presence of paper The tray up motor M21 22 is turned ON gt The tray goes When the drawer tray up sensor 532 38 44 50 is not turned ON within a fixed period of time it means that the tray is in an abnormal condition gt Add paper appears regardless of whether paper is on the tray or not It is cleared by turning the power ON OFF drawer tray up sensor 532 38 44 50 is turned ON within a fixed period of time The tray up motor M21 22 stops At this time if the drawer empty sensor S31 37 43 49 is ON It is judged that there is paper OFF Itis judged that there is no paper drawer area of the LCD panel blinks when the drawer is selected Paper in the drawer runs out during copying The drawer tray up sensor 532 38 44 50 is turned OFF The mam motor M21 22 is turned ON The tray goes up The tray up sensor 532 38 44 50 is turned ON tray up motor M21 22 stops drawer empty sensor 531 37 43 49 is turned OFF during the copying although the drawer tray up sensor 532 38 44 50 is ON It is
250. ermostat Heat roller Fig 14 32 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 25 H Fuser roller 1 Take off the fuser unit LU P 14 18 B Fuser unit 2 Take off the cleaning web unit LU P 14 19 Cleaning web unit Clean ing web 3 Loosen 2 pressure screws completely Pressure screw lt lt les Fig 14 33 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the fuser unit cover rear Fuser unit cover rear 5 Open the lower separation finger unit NI CO P 14 24 F Lower separation finger unit Lower separation finger GS E 6 Remove 2 screws and open the entrance E guide unit Screw Entrance guide unit Fig 14 34 7 Remove 2 screws release 2 harness clamp and take off the bracket with releasing the catching section Fig 14 35 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 26 8 Remove 2 screws disconnect 1 connec tor 9 Remove 1 C ring rear C ring rear 10 Remove 1 E ring and take off the gear and one way clutch 11 Remove 2 screws and take off the bearing rear Gear One way clutch Fig 14 37 12 Remo
251. ews and then take off the reverse section driving unit 3 Release 4 locking supports to take off the MOT2 RV board e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION 15 14 Reverse section driving unit Br D Fig 15 18 Reverse motor driving PC board Fig 15 19 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC I Reverse motor M19 1 Take off the reverse section driving unit LU P 15 14 Reverse section driving unit Reverse motor driving PC board MOT2 RV board 2 Disconnect 1 connector remove 2 screws and then take off the reverse motor Reverse motor Fig 15 20 J Reverse roller 1 Reverse roller 2 1 Take off the reverse section driving unit 25 P 15 14 H Reverse section driving unit Reverse motor driving PC board MOT2 RV board 2 Take off the reverse motor P 15 15 I Reverse motor M19 Belt Gear 3 Remove 2 E rings 2 gears and 2 belts A Fig 15 21 4 Remove 2 E rings and 2 bearings to take off the reverse roller 1 Reverse roller 2 Reverse roller 1 5 Remove 2 E rings and 2 bearings to take off the reverse roller 2 Bearing Fig 15 22 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXITIREVERSE SECTION 15 15 K Exit motor M18 1 Take off the reverse section driving unit LU P 15 14 Reverse section driving unit Reverse motor driving PC board MOT2 RV board 2 Take off the
252. for every scanning As the result of this a laser driver circuit increases its forward current when the laser power is insufficient and decreases it when the laser power is excessive to main tain a constant optical output Power source Laser power Laser driver Semiconductive laser comparison See Lam circuit circuit Constant optical output Monitor efficiency regulation circuit Monitor output Fig 8 9 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT 8 4 Polygonal Motor Control Circuit The polygonal motor is a DC motor rotated by a clock signal PMCLK 1 output from the Laser CPU This motor is controlled under PLL Phase Locked Loop to realize an accurate and constant rotation Its rotation status is converted to a status signal 0 and then output to the Laser CDU 0 signal moves to a low level only when the rotation status of the motor is constant The Laser CPU detects the rotation status with this signal and emits a laser beam only when the rotation status is con stant PLG board PMON 0 PMCLK 1 25 Laser CPU Polygonal motor Fig 8 10 Signal Function Low level High level PMON 0 Polygonal motor ON signal ON OFF 1 Polygonal motor reference clock PMOK 0 Polygonal motor PLL control signal Rotating at a constant Stopping or error speed e STUDIO520 60
253. g Approx 60236 22 rpm 600 dpi Approx 61597 53 rpm FAX 15 4 x 16 0 Approx 59287 62 rpm FAX 16 0 x 15 4 e STIDIO850 During printing Approx 36318 898 rpm 600 dpi Approx 37139 685 rpm FAX 15 4 x 16 0 dot mm Approx 35746 946 rpm FAX 16 0 x 15 4 dot mm b Polygonal mirror The e STUDIO520 600 720 has a 1 beam type of laser unit One laser beam emitted from the laser diode is reflected by this mirror As the polygonal mirror is rotated by the polygonal motor M2 the reflected laser beam moves in sync with the rotation The direction of the movement is the primary scanning direction of the image One scan is performed on 1 plane of the polygonal mirror As the polygonal mirror has 8 planes 8 scans are performed in 1 rotation e STUDIO850 has a 2 beam type of laser unit Two laser beams emitted from the laser diode are reflected by this mirror Two scans are performed on 1 plane of the polygonal mirror As the polygo nal mirror has 8 planes 16 scans are performed in 1 rotation March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT AJ Drum Laser Laser Laser Laser Laser Laser Fig 8 5 e STUDIO520 600 720 e STUDIO850 One scan is completed by completion of steps A Two scan is completed by completion of steps to C One scan is performed on one plane
254. h 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 26 8 Start of 1st original back side scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine At the same time the original transport signal is reset When the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward the large origi nal exit motor M39 also starts to rotate forward and the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 turns ON The large original exit solenoid 5015 has been ON from 1st original The SCN STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section The large original exit motor M39 stops when the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 has turned ON When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and come the 3rd roller the large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse Fig 16 49 The SCN STR turns OFF when the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section At the same time both the read and large original exit motors M36 M39 start to accelerate and the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 turns OFF Fig 16 50 The large original exit motor M39 slows down when the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller and proceeded a specified distance After the large original exit sensor 868 has detected the tra
255. h control cir cuit To prevent this the supply of these voltages stops after the PWR DN signal is output and the minimum retaining time 3 3VA 5 1VA 50 ms or more 12VA 5 ms or more elapses 3 Output protection Each output system includes an overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits a fuse and inter nal protection circuit This is to prevent the defectives damage or abnormal operation of the secondary circuit which may be caused by an overcurrent due to a short circuit or an overvolt age due to a short circuit between different voltages If the protection circuit is activated except the case the fuse is blown out remove the causes such as short circuit Turn ON the power again 1 minute later to clear the overcurrent protection e STUDIO520 600 720 850 POWER SUPPLY UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 17 3 Output Channel The following are 3 output channels for the main switch line 1 3 3V 3 3VA CN405 Pins 19 and 20 Output to the SYS board 3 3VB CN407 Pin 5 Output to the PLG board 3 3VC CN408 Pin 1 Output to the SLG board 3 3VD CN406 Pin 1 Output to the LGC board 2 5 1V 5 1VA CN405 Pins 15 and 16 Output to the SYS board 5 1VB CN405 Pin 14 Output to the SYS board 5 1VC 406 Pin 2 Output to the LGC board external LCF via LGC board IPC board finisher via LGC board 5 1VD 408 Pins 3 and 4 Output to the SLG board 5 1VE CN407Pin1 Output to the PLG board 5 1VF CN407 Pin 2
256. he general description of the fuser unit is written in Chapter 14 Transfer section The paper transported from the registration roller and the toner on the drum are transferred to the trans fer belt by a static attraction the paper is separated from the drum here and then the separated paper is transported to the fuser unit The toner adhered on the transfer belt is cleaned in the belt cleaning mechanism and then transported to the used toner bag The transfer section is driven by the transfer belt motor M14 Horizontal transport section The reversed paper for duplex printing is transported to the horizontal transport section At the horizon tal transport section the paper is transported to the intermediate transport roller The section includes 4 transport rollers controlled by clutches CLT 1 2 3 The fuser motor drives the operation of this section Transfer section 10 LO J Horizontal transport section Fig 13 1 No Name No Name 1 Follower roller 7 Cleaning blade 2 Power supply roller 8 Transport guid 3 Transfer belt 9 Horizontal transport roller 1 4 Transfer belt drive roller 10 Horizontal transport roller 2 5 Cleaning brush 11 Horizontal transport roller 3 6 Recovery auger 12 Horizontal transport roller 4
257. he large original exit motor M39 starts to slow down when the trailing edge of the original has pro ceeded a specified distance after passing the 4th roller At the same time the read motor M36 stops rotating unless there is a next original The large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has pro ceeded a specified distance after being detected by the large original exit sensor 568 Then the original is discharged If this is the last original the operation ends when the large original exit solenoid SOL5 turns OFF e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 36 16 6 Jams 16 6 1 Jams at feeding section 1 Original jammed not reaching the original length detection sensor S63 E711 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the document feed motor M37 begins to rotate for ward to start separation until an original reaches the original length detection sensor S63 Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is three times as much time as it takes to transport an original from the pickup position where the original empty sensor S60 detects the original to the origi nal length detection sensor S63 2 Original jammed not reaching the original registration sensor S55 E712 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original comes to the position 10 mm short of the origin
258. ich is the longest original of all kinds of small sized paper when discharging small originals to pass through the small original reverse sensor S66 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 39 16 6 5 Jams at small original exit section 1 Original jammed not reaching the small original exit sensor S67 from the intermediate transport section side E728 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original reaches the intermediate transport roller until it reaches the small original exit sensor S67 Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the intermediate transport roller to the small original exit sensor S67 plus 60 mm 2 Original jammed at the small original exit sensor S67 from the intermediate transport section side E732 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the deceleration which is set to finish at the position 20 mm short of the small original exit sensor S67 starts until an original passes through the small original exit sensor S67 Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is the time mentioned above plus necessary time for an origi nal to proceed 60 mm 3 Original jammed not reaching the small original exit sensor from the small original reverse side E743 Jam detection This
259. ified in the code 08 1520 When the number of sheets being exited exceeds this specified number the printing is interrupted When the cover is closed the printing is resumed e Detecting lowered toner density in the developer unit printing is disabled The auto toner sensor S12 detects that the toner in the developer unit has been consumed by detecting the toner density in the unit Note Calculation of the pixel counter is not used for the above detection of the amount of toner remain ing e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 2 Toner cartridge drive unit The toner cartridge drive unit consists of the toner cartridge holder which rotates the toner car tridge and the sub hopper New toner supply motor Toner cartridge detection switch Toner cartridge holder Toner cartridge empty sensor New toner transport motor Sub hopper Fig 12 2 Toner cartridge holder The toner cartridge holder includes a coupling to hold the toner cartridge the new toner sup ply motor M5 to rotate the cartridge the toner cartridge detection switch SW2 to detect the rotation of the cartridge and the toner cartridge empty sensor S10 to detect the empty sta tus of the cartridge New toner supply motor M5 The drive of the new toner supply motor M5 is transmitted to the toner cartridge holder through the pulley timing belt and gear and thus the coupling of the holder is rotated The cartridge
260. ig 16 76 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 56 3 roller passed large original exit side NO 3rd roller pass margin passed The 4th roller passed Trailing edge control The 4th roller pass i during transporting started margin passed Trailing edge control for large original discharging started Trailing edge control during scanning completed Fig 16 77 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 57 11 Trailing edge control for large original discharge Trailing edge control for large original discharging started Large original exit motor decelerated Large original sensor OFF NO Original reversed After transporting the specified pulse large original exit motor stopped Read motor stopped Discharged NO on large original exit side YES Large original exit solenoid OFF Large original exit roller passed Large original exit roller pass margin passed Large original exit motor stopped The 1st roller reached Back side aligned forward rotation Large original exit motor Large original exit motor forward rotation
261. igh voltage transformer HVT Discharge LED ERS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDI0520 600 720 850 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 17 5 Voltage Board unit Part Fuse type 24VC LGC board Registration motor M16 F3 8A Semi time lag Tray up motor 1 M21 Tray up motor 2 M22 Reverse section cooling fan 1 M24 Reverse section cooling fan 2 M25 IH board cooling fan M26 Duct out fan M27 Exit section cooling fan M29 Tandem LCF tray up motor M41 Tandem LCF end fence motor M42 Horizontal transport section driving clutch 1 CLT1 Horizontal transport section driving clutch 2 CLT2 Horizontal transport section driving clutch 3 CLT3 Bypass feed clutch CLT4 1st drawer transport clutch CLT5 1st drawer feed clutch CLT6 2nd drawer transport clutch CLT7 2nd drawer feed clutch CLT8 3rd drawer transport clutch CLT9 3rd drawer feed clutch CLT10 4th drawer transport clutch CLT11 4th drawer feed clutch CLT12 Gate solenoid SOL2 Bypass pickup solenoid SOL3 Tandem LCF pickup solenoid SOL7 Tandem LCF end fence solenoid SOL8 External LCF 24VD PLG board Polygonal motor M2 F4 8A Semi time lag Only for e STUDIO850 model 24VE SLG board SLG board cooling fan M23 F4 8A Semi time lag Lamp inverter board INV EXP 24VF Finisher F5 Semi time lag 24VG ADF board Read motor M36 F6 4A Semi
262. igi QS Xe Z Ss nal exit sensor from its bracket 6 10 Read sensor 569 1 Take off the ADF left cover P 16 86 B 3 ADF left cover 2 Remove 1 screw to take off the read sensor with its bracket 3 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw Then take off the read sensor from its bracket Read sensor Fig 16 148 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 99 G 11 Original registration sensor 555 Original width detection sensor 1 2 3 556 557 558 1 Take off the ADF left cover LU P 16 86 B 3 ADF left cover 2 Open the jam access cover Then remove 5 screws to take off the upper transport guide 3 Disconnect the connector of each sensor Then take off the original registration sensor and the original width detection sensors 1 2 and 3 G 12 RADF opening closing sensor 565 1 Take off the ADF front cover LU P 16 85 B 1 ADF front cover 2 Remove 1 screw to take off the RADF open ing closing sensor with its bracket 3 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 spring Then take off the RADF opening clos ing sensor e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Screw Upper transport guide Fig 16 149 Original registration sensor Original width detection sensor 3
263. iginal status During warming up reserved RA printing out the copy Press START Displays Wait Warming Up Display not changed Display not changed button with the COPYING Auto Start is original set on RADF displayed e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL 5 10 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Printing out the During paper When When display During energy copy jam interrupting ing HELP saving mode screen Press ENERGY Display not Display not Display not Switches to Energy saving SAVER changed changed changed energy saving mode is cleared button mode and displays BASIC screen Press ACCESS Displays depart Display not Displays depart Displays depart Display not button ment code entry changed ment code entry ment code entry changed screen when screen when screen when department department department management is management is management is available available available Press Displays print Display not Displays print Displays print Display not JOB STATUS job list screen changed job list screen job list screen changed button Press Display not Display not Returns to the Switches to Display not INTERRUPT changed LED changed status before interrupting changed button blinking interrupting mode Press FUNC Copy mode is Display not Copy mode is Displays BASIC Display not TION CLEAR cleared after the
264. iginal exit solenoid 5055 Small original exit solenoid SOL4 open close sensor S65 e APS operation sensor 564 Jam access cover open close switch SW10 e open close switch SW9 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 2 16 3 Drive System 1 Document feed motor M37 rotating forward seen in front One way pulley lock Document feed motor Document feed motor rotates clockwise to feed originals Fig 16 3 2 Document feed motor M37 rotating in reverse seen in front One way pulley idling One way pulley lock Document feed motor rotates counterclockwise to feed originals Fig 16 4 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 3 3 Read motor M36 rotating in reverse seen in front Large original Large original exit motor exit roller Rear Large original exit motor switches to the backside of an original by rotating clockwise and registers that side Read motor rotates counterclockwise to transport scan and discharge originals Read roller Fig 16 5 4 large original exit motor M39 rotating in reverse seen in front One way pulley Small original exit motor Large original exit motor Small original exit motor rotates clockwise to trans port and discharge originals Small original exit roller Large original exit r
265. iginal has passed the 4th roller and proceeded a specified distance the large original exit motor M39 starts to slow down When the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the large original exit sensor S68 and proceeded a specified distance it stops rotating Then the original is discharged Both the read and document feed motors M36 M37 stop rotating when 2nd original has reached the scanning waiting position Fig 16 54 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 29 10 Start of 2nd original top side scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine At the same time the original stop signal is reset When the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward the document feed motor M37 also starts to rotate in reverse The large original exit solenoid 5015 has been from 1st original The SCN STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section The large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse when the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and come to the 3 roller When the original registration sensor 555 has detected the trailing edge of the original the docu ment feed motor M37 stops rotating and the tray lift motor M38 starts to rotate to lift the tray The tray lift motor M38 s
266. iling edge of the original the read motor M36 stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance Then the original is nipped by the large original exit roller March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 27 Fig 16 51 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 28 9 Reversing and discharging of 1st original Both the large original exit and read motors M39 M36 start to rotate forward When the leading edge of the original has reached the read sensor S69 then been transported a specified distance by the read motor M36 the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 turns ON The large original exit motor M39 stops when the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 has turned ON When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit and reached the 3rd roller and the large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse Fig 16 52 Feeding of 2nd original begins when the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller Same operation as 16 5 1 4 Fig 16 53 When the trailing edge of the or
267. ing and waits at the released position from the photo conductive drum after the completion of printing e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 13 4 Transfer belt motor control circuit The transfer belt motor is a stepping motor driven by the control signal output from main CPU on the LGC board and rotates the transfer belt The transfer belt motor is driven by the pulse signal TRMA 0 TRMB 0 TRMAB 0 TRMBB 0 output from the motor driver These pulse signals are formed based on the reference clock signal TRMCK 0 and output only when the enable signal TRMEN 1 is L level Also the rotation speed of the motor can be switched by changing the output timing of each pulse signal LGC board MOT board TRMCK 0 TRMVR 0 Transfer belt TRMAB 0 motor 58 Motor driver Main CPU TRMBB 0 TRMEN 1 Fig 13 2 Transfer belt motor drive signal signal Motor status TRMCK 0 TRMEN 1 TRMVR 0 Pulse signal L L Rotation when accelerating deceler ating L H Rotation at a constant speed H Stop March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 13 5 Disassembly Replacement A Transfer unit 1 Open the front cover and take out the trans fer transport unit by turning the lever clock wise 2 Remove 1 screw to ta
268. ion controls the input of the input interface 3 Image area control This function sets the effective image area in horizontal and vertical directions to be output 4 Laser related control This function performs the APC Auto Power Control 5 Printer high quality processing This function reproduces the image signals output from the printer controller sharper e STUDIO520 600 720 850 IMAGE PROCESSING March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 7 5 Laser Driving PC Board LDR Image signals processed on the PLG board PLG are then processed by ASIC for writing control and LDR board LDR The signal is then laser controlled and written on the drum LU 8 7 8 2 5 Laser driving board LDR1 LDR2 board March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 IMAGE PROCESSING e STUDIO520 600 720 850 IMAGE PROCESSING March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 7 10 8 LASER OPTICAL UNIT 8 1 General Description When scanned images and print data are printed the laser optical unit creates a latent image by con verting the digital image signals into laser beams and radiating them onto the photoconductive drum The image signals are converted into a light emission signal of the laser diode on the laser driving board LDR1 LDR2 and are radiated on the drum through optical elements such as the cylinder lenses polygonal mirror and 0 lens This unit must not be disassembled in the field because it is finely adjusted and very sensitive to dust The laser unit with 2
269. ion is driven by the following mechanism Exit motor G19 gt Gears 621 G20 G19 gt Exit roller Reverse motor T21 gt Timing belt and Pulleys T23 T23 gt Reverse path roller March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXITIREVERSE SECTION 15 4 Operation The paper from the fuser unit is transported to the reverse path by the exit reverse gate which is usu ally directed toward the reverse path and switched by the gate solenoid SOL2 only when the reverse operation is not carried out When the trailing edge of the paper has passed through the fuser transport sensor 59 the paper transport speed at the reverse path is switched to a high one and switched back in a specified time after that The paper is transported to the exit roller with keeping the high speed and discharged to the out side of the eguipment When carrying out a duplex printing the paper switched back at the reverse path is transported to the horizontal transport section which is under the transfer transport unit and switches the paper transport speed to a normal one at this time and it is again transported to the transfer section and fused there Then after the duplex paper has passed through the fuser unit and the exit reverse gate has been switched it is discharged to the outside of the eguipment by the exit roller without being transported to the reverse path e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e sheets
270. isplayed when the paper size which R LT R is not specified for Rotate Sort 39 CHANGE DRAWER TO Displayed when the selected paper CORRECT PAPER SIZE size is not in the drawer 40 Change the paper type Displayed when the selected media type is not in the drawer 41 Select a paper size for Displayed when paper size needs to bypass feeding be specified for bypass feeding such as duplex copying 42 Place the blank sheets in Displayed when no paper is in the bypass tray and select the selected feeder at Cover Sheet paper size Copying Mode 43 Place the blank sheets in Displayed when the direction of the same direction as the cover page is different from that of originals other pages at Cover Copying Mode 44 Place the same size blank Displayed when the paper size of sheets as the originals cover page is different from that of other pages at Cover Copying Mode 45 Place insertion sheets in Displayed when no insertion sheet is the bypass tray and select in the selected drawer at Sheet Inser the paper size tion Mode 46 Select the same size Displayed when the size of insertion insert1 sheets as the origi sheet sheet 1 is different from that nals of other pages at Sheet Insertion Mode 47 Select the same size Displayed when the size of insertion insert2 sheets as the origi sheet sheet 2 is different from that nals of other pages at Sheet Insertion Mode 48 Set insert1 sheets in the Displayed when the direction of same dir
271. it front cover 4 Remove 2 screws and open the lower sepa ration finger unit Lower separation finger unit 2 Fig 14 43 5 Release the clamp and disconnect 1 connec tor 6 Remove 2 screws and take off the web motor Fig 14 44 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 29 7 Disconnect 1 connector to take off the fuser L transport sensor Pressure roller thermistor 4 1 Take off the fuser unit 3 P 14 18 B Fuser unit 2 Disconnect 1 connector of the pressure roller thermistor 3 Remove 2 screws to take off the lower entrance guide 4 Remove 1 screw to take off the harness cover 5 Remove 1 screw to take off the pressure roller thermistor Notes 1 Use tightening torques of 0 4 0 6 N m to prevent the thermistors from damage 2 Be sure that the thermistor is contacting with the pressure roller when it has been installed e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 30 Fuser transport sensor Fig 14 45 Pressure roller thermistor Harness cover Fig 14 46 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 15 EXIT REVERSE SECTION 15 1 General Description This equipment conducts a paper reverse operation when printing more than 2 sheet of paper or carry ing out a duplex printing Its reversing device once transports the paper from the fuser unit to the reverse path where the paper is switched back
272. ke off the handle 3 Remove 2 screws to take off the cover 4 Disconnect 2 connectors Raise the belt when disconnecting the connector on the right side 5 Remove 1 clip and slide the bearing on the front side to inside 6 Remove 4 screws 7 Slide the transfer unit to the rear side and raise the front side to take it off e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT Transfer transport unit Screw Fig 13 3 Cover Fig 13 4 Screw III 11111 Connector Screw Fig 13 5 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Note When installing the transfer unit make sure that the lever comes under the cam B Transfer belt 1 Take off the transfer unit LU P 13 6 A Transfer unit 2 Turn the transfer belt unit 90 and pull it out upward 3 Remove 2 screws March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC mc 13 6 Transfer belt unit Screw 4 Link plate e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 4 Turn the driving roller to the direction of the arrow 5 Pull out the transfer belt Notes 1 Install the transfer belt in the middle so that it does not move to one side 2 Do not touch the surface of the belt 3 Fi
273. large original exit sensor 568 small original reverse sensor 566 and original length detection sensor 563 Since the read sensor 569 large original exit sensor 568 small original reverse sensor 566 and original length detection sensor 563 have almost the same circuitries only the input circuit for the read sensor 569 is described as followed 5V 1 1 4 R79 KS RIS 1P38 8 3 3 E 14 R56 IC6 bi READS CNII S READS 8 gt gt 1P39 CNI 6 READLED 1 ale Y R74 I READS SGND SGND SGND SGND 28 1 2 n READS DA Fig 16 94 This circuit consists of the voltage current conversion circuit which adjusts the amount of light of the infrared LED and the voltage comparison circuit which compares the voltage output from a pho totransistor PTr with a reference voltage and converts the output voltage into digital signals The read sensor S69 is a mirror reflection sensor and consists of a pair of emission elements infrared LEDs and a light receiving element PTr Both elements have a light axis running in the same direction There is a mirror on the extended light axis of these elements When there is no original between the elements and the mirror infrared light emitted from LED is reflected by PTr i
274. ler until the trailing edge of the original passes through the original length detection sensor S63 Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for the longest original LD to pass through the original length detection sensor S63 and proceed more 60 mm March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 37 2 Original jammed at the original registration sensor 555 E724 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the original passes through the original length detection sensor S63 until it passes through the original registration sensor S55 Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to the distance from the original length detection sensor 563 to the original registration sensor S55 plus 60 mm 3 Original jammed not reaching the read sensor 569 E721 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original comes to the 1st roller until it reaches the read sensor S69 Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the 1st roller to the read sensor 569 plus 60 mm 4 Original jammed at the read sensor 569 from the feeding side E725 detection This jam is detected during the time after an
275. llowing sections Main charger wire Main charger grid Developer bias Transfer bias Drum cleaning brush 9 Others Symbol Name Function Remarks INV EXP INV EXP Controlling the exposure lamp Fig 2 5 36 4 Lamp inverter board Fig 2 6 LCD LCD Displaying each information Fig 2 8 3 14 LCD panel TCP TCP Entering each information Fig 2 8 3 28 Touch panel INV LCD INV LCD Controlling the LCD panel touch panel Fig 2 8 3 30 LCD inverter board GLV MIR GLV Adjusting the beam angle of the 2nd laser Fig 2 10 32 1B Galvanic mirror Only for e STUDIO850 HDD HDD Saving program data and image data Fig 2 23 54 11 Hard disk PS PS ACC Generating DC voltage and supplying it to Fig 2 23 52 14 Switching regurator each section of the equipment NF1 NS FIL1 Filtering out the noise of the input AC Fig 2 24 52 4 Noise filter 1 power Fig 2 25 52 4B Fig 2 26 52 12A Fig 2 27 NF2 NS FIL2 Filtering out the noise of the AC power sup Fig 2 25 52 4 Noise filter 2 plied to the fuser unit Only for JPD model of e STUDIO850 BRK1 BREAKER Preventing overcurrent to the eguipment Fig 2 24 52 3A Breaker 1 Fig 2 25 52 12B Fig 2 26 52 101A Fig 2 27 BRK2 BREAKER2 Preventing overcurrent to the fuser unit Fig 2 25 52 3B Breaker 2 Only for JPD model of e STUDIO850 RLY RELEY Controlling AC power supplied to the fuser Fig 2 25 52 110 Relay unit Only for JPD model of e STUDIO850 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLIN
276. lock switch switching regulator voltage generating cir cuit interlocked with these covers accord ing to the opening closing status of the front cover lower or left lower cover Cover open Shut off March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE Symbol Name Function Remarks SW9 DF OPN INTLCK SW Supplying or shutting off 24 V voltage Fig 2 30 88 101 opening closing according to the opening closing status of switch the RADF RADF open Shut off SW10 DF COV INTLCK SW Supplying and shutting off 24 V voltage Fig 2 30 86 13 Jam access cover opening according to the opening closing status of closing switch the jam access cover Cover open Shut off SW11 TNR MOT INTLCK SW Supplying or shutting off 24 V voltage to the Fig 2 18 29 109 Toner motor interlock new toner supply motor M5 according to switch the opening closing status of the front cover upper Cover open Shut off 3 Electromagnetic spring clutches Symbol Name Function Remarks CLT1 HRZ DR CLT1 Driving the horizontal transport section Fig 2 16 19 21 Horizontal transport section transmitting the power of the fuser unit driving clutch 1 motor CLT2 HRZ DR CLT2 Driving the horizontal transport rollers 1 Fig 2 16 20 21 Horizontal transport section and 2 driving clutch 2 CLT3 HRZ DR CLT3 Driving the horizontal transport rollers 3 Fig 2 1
277. loper sleeves Magnetic roller 1 Take off the guide roller LO P 12 22 Guide roller Screw Front side plate 2 Remove 3 screws to take off the front side plate Fig 12 34 3 Take off the toner recovery roller 4 Remove 2 screws of the developer sleeve Developer sleeve holder Screw holder on the front side Scattered toner recovery roller Fig 12 35 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 23 5 Remove the bearing the E ring and then the gear and the parallel pin 6 Remove 2 screws of the developer sleeve holder on the rear side 7 Take off the upper and lower developer sleeve with the holder 8 Remove 2 pole position fixing bushings and then 2 E rings 9 Remove 4 E rings and then 2 gears 10 Remove the developer sleeve holder on the front and rear side e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 24 Developer sleeve holder Bearing E ring Gear Pin Fig 12 36 Pole position fixing bushing Fig 12 37 Developer sleeve holder Fig 12 38 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 11 Remove 2 seals 4 shield bushings the scraper and then take off the upper and lower developer sleeves 12 Replace the oil seal pressed into 2 shield bushings on the rear side if necessary Procedure for replacing an oil seal LU P 12 27 Fig 12 47 Shield bushing Fig 12 39 I Transport slee
278. low e Drum surface potential sensor Measures the drum surface potential Control section LGC board Calculates the main charger grid bias voltage to be applied when the image quality control is per formed then controls the high voltage transformer to adjust its bias voltage output High voltage transformer Generates and supplies the bias voltage of the main charger grid LGC board Drum surface potential sensor 8 High voltage Reference voltage Vctr Digital data transformer D A converter Main charger grid D Adjustment value i 58 DRVO 1A Fig 10 4 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 10 5 3 Description of operation 1 Correction control procedure of drum surface potential 2 The setting value of the main charger bias voltage when the surface potential stored in the NVRAM is measured is output to the Main CPU The reference voltage data digital data is output from the Main CPU to the D A converter through the ASIC The reference voltage data is converted at the D A converter into the reference voltage Vctr analog data and the data is then output to the high voltage transformer The high voltage transformer outputs the main charger bias voltage based on the reference volt age and thus the drum is charged The drum surface potential is measured by the drum surface potential sensor
279. ltage current conversion circuit consisting of IC11 R65 Q6 etc Each machine has a different D A output voltage value which is stored in the volatile memory e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 74 2 Irruptive current control circuit DC 24V DC 24V 1 2 EES He So CN3 3 COM CN3 4 COP 241 CN3 5 0 2 op ele A Ls R107 2 2 1 1 M 2 me CE aja E 1 1 L 15 R68 S REG b dl z t 5 19 M4 T D 24VOP a 22 oh 14 101 Fig 16 95 This circuit controls the irruptive current flowing into the current regeneration condensers mounted on the drive circuits for the motors to a certain value The circuit consists of a posister PTH1 which controls the current and FET 012 which supplies the current in normal conditions Base current is not supplied to Q2 and it becomes OFF after the RADF open close switch SW9 and jam access cover open close switch SW10 are turned OFF till the cathode voltage of ZD3 reaches the zener voltage At this time both voltages are set by R36 and C107 12 is turned OFF correspondingly to supply the current to PTH1 and the current regeneration condensers are charged After the current regeneration condensers are fully charged and when the cathode voltage of ZD3 exceeds the zener voltage after the ti
280. m the drum cleaner to the recycle toner hopper Hopper motor Recycle toner transport motor Drum cleaner Developer unit Fig 12 3 Recycle toner hopper This hopper includes the paddle and auger driven by the hopper motor M7 Pipe The auger is eguipped in the pipe to transport the toner This auger is driven by the toner transport motor M8 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Developer unit The developer unit of the e STUDIO850 has a different structure driving gear from that of e STUDIO520 600 720 due to its copy speed The developer unit of the e STUDIO520 600 720 has a protrusion on its rear side to prevent a wrong installation Developer material The developer material consists of the carrier and toner The carrier is a conductive ferrite whose size is 30 100 The toner consists of 5 20 um size resin particles The developer material requires a periodic maintenance since it deteriorates in a long term use and print images may be influenced by this deterioration Mixer The carrier and toner generate a friction when the developer material is mixed The carrier is positively charged while the toner is negatively charged and thus the toner is adhered on the drum by static electricity caused by this charging Paddle The paddle supplies the developer material mixed by the mixer to the transport sleeve Also the paddle returns the developer material se
281. mage formation condition based on the read result e Image formation process system This system consists of the process of charging laser exposing and developing Each process is operated based on the image formation condition set by the control section When image guality control is performed the laser unit exposes the test pattern on the drum Image formation process system Laser exposure LGC board Developing Various image formation conditions IC58 Light source amount signal 1C18 CTDVR 1A signal Main CPU D A converter Reflected light amount signal CTDS 1 signal Image quality sensor A D converter ri ha A V se Fig 11 3 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 11 4 3 Principle of Image Quality Sensor The image guality sensor applies the light to the drum and test pattern toner image developed on the drum and outputs the voltage corresponding to its reflected light amount Toner amount on the drum is calculated from the reflected light amount obtained by this sensor Image guality sensor Light emitting element Light sensing element Light source intensity signal Reflected light intensity signal Test pattern Toner Rs 2 Drum Fig 11 4 11 4 4 Flow of control Start controlling e g during the pre running after the power has been turned ON 1 Setting of the reference image
282. main CPU turns OFF the power to protect the fuser unit Error code C449 C and 8 Counter value of the fuser unit error status 9 08 400 Thermistors continue detecting the abnormal temperature even after the error codes and counter values are decided Even if the power is turned ON immediately it is automatically turned OFF again when the surface temperature of the fuser roller is still higher than the abnormal tempera ture detected Wait until the surface temperature of the fuser roller is lowered enough and turn ON the power to check the counter value while it is turned OFF again After confirming that it is the fuser unit abnormality correct the abnormality and reset the counter value 08 400 to 0 to start up the equipment normally March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 11 6 Temperature detection circuit Thermistors elements whose resistance decreases as they detect higher temperature the input voltage to the main CPU is changed and the main CPU judges whether this change is abnormal or not If one of these thermistors is broken the control circuit judges that the temperature of the fuser roller or the pressure roller is extremely low Then the circuit keeps turning the IH coil on As a result of this the fuser roller temperature rises and this may activate the thermostats a safety protection element To prevent this problem in advance the main CPU works to detect the wire
283. me allowance given by C107 and R36 a base current is sup plied to Q2 to turn it ON and 012 comes ON correspondingly The current limitation is canceled and the current flowing in the PTH1 starts to be supplied to 012 R66 R67 R68 and R69 are discharge resistors to capture charge stored in the current regeneration condensers right after either of the RADF open close switch SW9 or jam access cover open close switch SW10 is opened The circuit consisted of PTH2 and D1 captures the charge stored in C107 right after either the RADF open close switch SW10 or the jam access cover open close switch SW10 is opened and also controls incoming current for instantaneous opening closing of the cover March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 75 3 Drive circuit for read motor M36 5V 10K T A 1 1 Ciz CI 2 2 B6B XH A TP53 TP63 pass e EE 24V Jos HR PGND BI 240 CN8 6 1 1 Us gt 1 10 0 4 1 RMOT_MI gt 1 i 2T 11 MODE A 5 RMOT A CN8 1 gt 1 1 17 MODE2 AB 3 2 RMOT XA CNB 2 4 13 MODES BI 3 RMOT_CHB gt 4 5 18 CWB BB 35V RMOT B CN8 3 RMOT CLK D E i WW CLK 4 Lee 19 RESET VDD 3 RMOT xB CN8 4 RESET D
284. ment by means of the corresponding sensor so that the printing guality is not changed due to their adverse influence where the eguipment is set up and corrects the output of the auto toner sensor or similar according to the result 10 6 2 Construction The temperature humidity detection circuit is composed as shown in the figure below It converts the voltage of each analog signal output from the temperature humidity sensor into a digital signal by means of the converter embedded in the main CPU on the LGC board The voltage of each analog signal output from the temperature humidity sensor becomes higher when the temperature or humidity LGC board KEY1 board DSP board 454VC Temperature THSCH 1 humidity sensor TEMPS 1A TEMPS 1 HUMIS 1 gt 5 HUMIS 1A 1 i Fig 10 5 Signal Function Low level High level THSCH 1 Temperature humidity switch signal Temperature Humidity detection detection TEMPS 1A Temperature detection signal analog HUMIS 1A Humidity detection signal analog e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 10 7 Disassembly Replacement A Main charger 1 Take off the toner cartridge drive unit LU P 12 15 A Toner cartridge drive unit Main charger Screw 2 Remove 3 screws and take off the left inner cover 3 Remove 1 stepped screw an
285. n high reflectance If there is an original light emission to the mirror and reflected light from the mirror are blocked by the original and the reflected light entering PTr becomes extremely small When a large amount of light is entering PTr this means there is no original the optical current flow ing in the PTr is increased and the voltage of IC6 8 pin becomes higher due to a drop in voltage caused by R109 IC6 is a comparator which compares the reference voltage input to 9 pin non reverse input terminal with the signal voltage of 8 pin reverse input terminal If the voltage of 8 pin is higher the output level IC6 14 pin is L On the contrary when the amount of the incoming light is small this means there is an original the voltage of 14 pin is low and the voltage of IC6 14 pin becomes H R56 C56 and C5 are noise filters This circuit has an automatic sensitivity adjust ment function to control the unevenness of the sensor sensitivity Uneven sensor sensitivity is cor rected by controlling the machine to have a constant PTr voltage when there is no original The intensity of the infrared light emitted from the LEDs is changed to adjust the PTr voltage When the sensor sensitivity adjustment mode is selected the PTr output voltage analog value is measured by the A D input terminals of CPU The output voltage of the D A converter is changed to keep the PTr output voltage to a certain level and the LED current is adjusted by a vo
286. n if an operator turns OFF the power and back ON However if the eguipment goes into a ready state normally with the fuser unit error status counter 1 or below the counter is cleared to 0 error codes C411 to C490 are displayed and still not cleared even though the thermistor thermostat and IH coil have been repaired and the power ON OFF does not clear the error check the Setting Mode 08 400 to set the fuser unit error status counter to 0 Remark The fuser unit error status counter Setting Mode 08 400 never has values other than 0 to 29 Ifthe IH coil does not turn ON and the service call C411 or C412 is displayed immediately after the power is ON ensure the fuser unit error status counter is 2 or over If itis 2 or over be sure to check the thermistor thermostat and IH coil Reset the counter to 0 after repairing them then turn ON the power If the fuser unit error status counter is 30 or over e g 31 the data in or itself may possibly have been ruined due to causes such as leakage from the chargers Check the bias high voltage transformers and charge wires to see if any of them is defective and also look through all the data in the NVRAM When the thermistors detect overheating the main CPU decides the error code and counter value of the fuser unit error status After turning OFF each output the IH coil exposure lamp control panel display motors and so on the
287. nal length detection sensor with its bracket 3 Remove 1 screw to take off the original length detection sensor from its bracket Original length detection sensor G 4 Jam access cover opening closing switch SW10 1 Take off the ADF rear cover LO P 16 86 B 2 ADF rear cover 2 Remove 1 screw to take off the jam access cover opening closing switch Jam access cover opening closing switch Fig 16 136 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 95 6 5 Original tray sensor 553 Original tray width sensor 554 1 Lift up the tray and remove screws to take off the tray back cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector to take off the origi nal tray sensor Fig 16 137 3 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw Then take of the original tray width sensor with its stay 4 Remove the nut to take off the original tray width sensor from its stay Note When the original tray width sensor is installed install it to match the markings on the rack and pinion each other Original tray sensor Connector Fig 16 138 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Screw Connector Original tray width sensor Fig 16 139 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 96 G 6 APS operation sensor 564 1 Take off the ADF rear cover 25 P 16 86 B 2 ADF
288. ner transport motor OFF Used toner transport motor OFF Standby Fig 4 6 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION 4 15 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 4 16 5 CONTROL PANEL 5 1 Operation Area and Display Area The control panel consists of button switches and touch panel switches to operate the eguipment and select various modes and LEDs Light Emitting Diodes and an LCD Liquid Crystal Display to display the state of the equipment or messages When the operator s attention is required graphic images symbols or characters appear or blink with messages explaining the condition of the equipment in the LCD panel This eguipment has improved its operationality and visibility with an enlarged LCD panel If a paper jam or service call has occurred its error code is displayed on the LCD panel so that the user can recognize which error has occurred Fig 5 1 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL 5 2 Items Shown on the Control Panel 1 Basic display Displays buttons and messages 2005 04 01 15 17 700M gt NON SORT 1005 11 Fig 5 2 2 Paper jam display Displays error codes paper jam position and paper jam release guidance Error code Paper jam position Paper jam release guidance Fig 5 3 e
289. ng A4 R B5 R Top side 37 28 38 30 38 30 42 34 LT R discharging Back side 37 28 38 30 38 30 42 34 discharging B4 FOLIO Top side 32 28 34 30 34 30 38 34 LG discharging COMPUTER Back side 32 28 34 30 34 30 38 34 discharging A3 LD Top side 28 28 30 30 30 30 34 34 discharging Back side 28 28 30 30 30 30 34 34 discharging Tolerance Within 0 5 from 1 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 1 4 Thick 2 Paper weight From over 105 g m 28 Ib Bond to 163 g m 90 Ib Index Paper source Drawers Tandem LCF Option LCF e STUDIO520 e STUDIO600 e STUDIO720 e STUDIO850 4 B5 A5 R Top side 52 60 72 85 ST R discharging Back side 52 60 72 85 discharging A4 R B5 R Top side 42 46 52 61 LT R discharging Back side 42 46 50 56 discharging B4 FOLIO Top side 37 41 44 52 LG discharging COMPUTER Back side 37 38 41 45 discharging A3 LD Top side 33 36 37 43 discharging Back side 31 32 34 37 discharging Tandem LCF A4 LT only Option LCE A4 B5 LT only Tolerance Within 0 5 from 1 Thick 2 Paper weight From over 105 g m 28 Ib Bond to 163 g m 90 Ib Index Paper source Bypass feed e STUDIO520 e STUDIO600 e STUDIO720 e STUDIO850 Size specified Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No 4 B5 A5 R Top side 45 28 46
290. ng closing switch SW9 1 Take off the ADF rear cover P 16 86 B 2 ADF rear cover Blue Orange Brown 2 Disconnect 3 connectors 3 Remove 1 screw to take off the open ing closing switch with its bracket 4 Remove 1 screw to take off the RADF open ing closing switch from its bracket Note Connect 3 connectors to the switch in the arrangement shown in the figure opening closing switch Screw Fig 16 144 G 9 Large original exit sensor 568 1 Open the jam access cover 2 Open the reverse guide Then release the Scanning guide inserted portion on the front side to take out the guide to the front side 3 Open the scanning guide Then take it out upward by holding its both ends Fig 16 145 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 98 4 Remove 2 screws to take off the large origi nal exit guide Large original exit guide Note JL JH careful not to smudge the opening of the d LL ur 0000000 00 YY FEW ANN Screw Fig 16 146 5 Remove 1 screw and disconnect 1 connec tor Then take off the large original exit sen Large original exit sensor Screw sor with its holder 6 Remove 1 screw and take off the large or
291. ng is a process of eliminating the charge remaining on the photoconductive drum before the next charging process begins If discharging does not occur the following phenomenon will occur The charge remains on the photoconductive drum Y Uneven charge is applied to the drum during the next copy The next copy has a double image Preceding image appears Solution Expose the entire surface of the photoconductive drum to the light by the discharge LED array The photoconductive drum becomes electrically conductive All the charges remaining on the photoconductive drum are conducted to the ground The preparation for the next copy is completed Discharge LED array Drum Fig 3 21 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY PROCESS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 3 3 Comparison of Process to e STUDIO550 650 810 Process e STUDIO550 650 810 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 1 Photoconductive drum OD 6510 OPC drum lt Sensitivity Highly sensitized drum lt Surface potential 700 V grid voltage 733 V 490 V 290 to 890 V Grid 500 V 300 to 900 V 2 Charging Scolotron method constant current lt Grid output variable lt 3 Surface potential controlling Surface potential sensor lt 4 Writing Light source Semiconductor laser lt Light amount adjustment not reguired 3 8 nJ mm 3 9 nJ mm e STUDIO520 600 720 3 0 nJ mm e STUDIO850 5 Image
292. nit 5 Developer unit drive section The developer unit is driven by the developer unit motor M10 6 Developer unit fan M31 Toner filter The developer unit fan M31 suctions the toner scattered out of the developer unit and the suc tioned toner is then collected at the toner filter through the duct 7 Ductin fan M30 This fan cools down the developer unit March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT 8 Developer unit detection switch SW3 This switch detects whether the developer unit is installed or not e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 3 Developer Unit Drive Developer unit drive 49 029 Leo veo Se 19d0 819p 190 Jeof ap Jeef ojpped 1294 Jeof ejp apis 1edd i 029 121101 1810981 J9U0 5 029 919 Jeob Il 029 Jeof op 619 179 Jeof op Je96 ojpped 4 jndui eAup opis JUOJ 1 MR 4696 em Sie ee ee NS RO ey ee ey ee Z 879 yun 19dojon9g 1696 om mom au 0sgolanis e 49 269 Sco Kaal 19d0 818p 18M07 Jeof ap Jeef e pped 1294 Jeof epis 1294 029 121101 1810981 J9U0 5 029 9 9 1 Il DECH op 619
293. nsor 516 11 Drum damp heater DH3 condensation prevention The drum damp heater DH3 is installed under the transfer belt The power is supplied to this heater when the main switch SW6 is turned OFF 12 Horizontal transport section The paper reversed for duplex printing is transported to the horizontal transport section At this section the paper is transported to the intermediate transport roller This section is driven by the fuser motor M3 and controlled by the horizontal transport section driving clutches 1 CLT1 2 CLT2 and 3 CLT3 and this drive is transmitted to the transport roller The horizontal transport sensors 1 519 2 520 and 3 521 detect the paper transport March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 13 3 General Description of Transfer Belt Unit Operation 1 The transfer belt unit is released from the photoconductive drum in the ready status 2 The transfer belt is lifted as well as rotated and contacted with the photoconductive drum at the start of printing 3 The voltage of the high voltage transformer is applied on the transfer belt through the power supply roller 4 Since the surface of the transfer belt is positively charged by a dielectric polarization the belt elec trostatically attracts the paper from the drum Thus the processes of transfer separation and paper transport are continuously performed 5 The transfer belt unit is lowered stops rotat
294. nt 3 Image processing circuit The output signals from the CCD are digitized and the image processing such as gamma correction and shading correction is applied to them Original Shading correction plate Exposure lamp Xenon lamp CCD board CCD sensor Lighting device for xenon lamp WER Lamp inverter board SLG board Analog Front End AFE ASIC Scanner CPU Fig 6 5 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 6 4 2 Exposure lamp External electrode type Xenon fluorescent lamp is used as an exposure lamp in this equipment 1 Structure The fluorescer is applied to the inside surface of the lamp pipe except for a part which serves as an opening which is filled with the Xenon gas A pair of the external electrodes covered by film with adhesive agent is attached around the pipe PET film Aluminum tape electrode Glass valve Fluorescer Xenon gas Adhesive agent PET film Fig 6 6 2 Behavior inside the lamp The electron inside the pipe is led to the electric field by applying voltage to the pair of the external electrodes and the discharge is started The electrons then flow and clash with the Xenon atoms inside the pipe to excite them and allow them to generate ultraviolet rays This ultraviolet rays convert the fluorescer into visible light 1
295. nto the magnet 3 Fig 3 8 Bias voltage 394V 200 to 800V DC AC Photoconductive drum 212 5 Photoconductive layer y Aluminum conductive base Fig 3 9 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY PROCESS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC potential of photoconductive drum being higher than the developer bias The potential of the photoconductive 4 drum being lower than the developer bias Developer material L 394V White background Half tone Solid 250V 100V 4 1 1 White background 1 Image not developed Bias aaa da potential HY Image developed b toner Fig 3 10 The developer material is a mixture of toner and carrier The toner is charged to negative polarity and the carrier to positive polarity due to the friction with each other caused by mixing Toner Mainly consists of resin and carbon Carrier Consists of ferrite and resin coating on its surface to provide consistent frictional electrification Resin 90 95 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Toner Carbon 5 10 5 20 um Fig 3 11 Ferrite 30 100 um Carrier e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY PROCESS Note If the developer material is used for a long time Toner Carrier beyond its normal life span the toner is caked onto the carrier The carriers charging performance is low ered Symptom 1 Image density
296. of the drawer pushes the lever to the direc tion of A Then the pickup roller and roller holder are lowered by the spring force 9 3 3 Paper separation This model is eguipped with a separation roller which works to prevent multiple paper feeding The sep aration roller unit consists of the feed roller separation roller torgue limiter etc as shown at right The feed roller is rotated by the feed clutch in the direction of the white arrow at the same timing as the pickup roller rotation The figure at right shows how duplicate feeding is prevented Since the friction between two sheets is small the lower sheet is not transported any further while the upper sheet is transported by the feed roller in the direction of the black arrow Feed roller SE Torgue limiter AY Separation roller Fig 9 5 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM Example When only one sheet enters between the rollers Since the transporting force of the feed roller is greater than the braking force of the separation roller the separation roller follows the feed roller making the sheet go forward to the registration roller When two sheets enter between the rollers at the same time Since the transporting force of the feed roller and the breaking force of the separation roller are greater than the frictional force between two sheets the paper A is transported to the direction of the black arrow and the paper B is br
297. off RX gt LE V Bracket Gear Fig 9 28 2 Remove 1 screw on the varistor 3 Removing 4 screws and 4 bushings to take Paper guide off the paper guide Varistor 8 P ai Fig 9 29 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 4 Disconnect 2 board connectors and release 4 lock supports to take off the board Motor driving PC board Fig 9 30 B 2 Transport motor M17 1 Disconnect 1 connector 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the motor Transport motor Belt B 3 Transport roller 1 Remove 1 E ring to pull out the bearing from the shaft Bearing 2 Remove the pin of the pulley by moving the shaft toward the motor Then remove the pul i ley and bearing to take off the transport roller with its shaft 2 Bearing Fig 9 32 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Remove 2 E rings to pull out the transport rollers from the Transport roller Fig 9 33 B 4 Intermediate transport sensor S17 1 Disconnect 1 connector 2 Take off the sensor while the sensor arm is pushed downward the shield plate is pushed upward Note When installing the sensor make sure the sensor arm moves properly Intermediate transport sensor Sensor arm Fig 9 34 C Bypass feed unit 1 Take off the bypa
298. ofthe to C Two scan is performed on one plane of polygonal mirror Eight scans can be made with the polygonal mirror Sixteen scans can be made one rotation of the polygonal mirror with one rotation of the polygonal mirror c Polygonal mirror cover The polygonal mirror cover reduces wind damage and noise prevents adhesion of foreign matter on the mirror surface and releases heat by sealing the polygonal mirror e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 8 2 3 10 lenses 1 and 2 These two lenses perform the following adjustment on the laser beams reflected by the polygonal mir ror a Uniform velocity scanning Since the polygonal mirror is rotating at a uni form velocity the laser beam reflected from the mirror scans over the drum surface at a uniform angular velocity namely the pitch between the dots on the drum is wider at both ends than at the center of the scanning range The f0 lenses help to correct this difference making all the dot to dot pitches equal on the drum surface Same intervals Fig 8 6 b Face tilt connection The reflecting face of the polygonal mirror is Mirror plane is tilted tilted slightly to one side against the perfect __ Peviation vertical Horizontal deviation of the laser beam which is caused by the tilt is corrected Fig 8 7 c Sectional shape of laser beam The shape of
299. oller Small original reverse roller Large original exit motor rotates counterclockwise to discharge and reverse originals Y Fig 16 6 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 4 9 Tray lift motor M38 rotating forward seen in front Tray lift motor Tray lift motor rotates clockwise to lower the tray Lifting tray Fig 16 7 6 Tray lift motor M38 rotating in reverse seen in front Tray lift motor Tray lift motor rotates counterclockwise to lift the tray Lifting tray Fig 16 8 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 5 16 4 Signal Block Diagram Engine RADF Reversing automatic document reader EEPROM Sensor input circuit SOL4 5015 5016 RXD e Driver SGND gt gt TXD Led ACK gt e gt nication SCH STR 4 circuit DF lt DF REQ 4 DF CNT 6 DC 24V Irruptive A DC 24V A gt peus circui DC 5V A DC 5V e Fig 16 9 The following 8 lines are used for sending receiving of signals between the engine and RADF
300. oller The pressure roller is made of rubber PFA tube roller to make it easier to press against the fuser roller and its pressure is always derived from a spring force Separation fingers The separation fingers are for removing paper that has stuck to the fuser and pressure rollers Cleaning web The cleaning web is attached touching the fuser roller by means of the web pushing roller to remove any toner or paper dust that has stuck to the fuser roller during the fusing process lt is rolled up by the web motor M4 with its clean surface always touching the fuser roller It also contains silicone oil for coating the surface of the fuser roller which makes it easier to clean up any toner or paper dust The cleaning web rolled around the roller has been made thinner and lengthened This has increased the web rolling up speed and improved the cleaning performance The cleaning web s cleaning performance is the same as that of the cleaning roller so this equipment does not have a cleaning roller Fuser exit roller The fuser exit roller transports the paper separated from the fuser and pressure rollers with the separation fingers through the fuser unit Fuser transport sensor S9 This sensor is for detecting that the trailing edge of the paper has reached the fuser unit exit sen sor and also for the detecting of paper jams at the fuser unit exit section Fuser roller center thermistor THM2 and Fuser roller rear thermistor THM3 These the
301. on the tandem LCF sensor Only for ASD ASU AUD MJD CND KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e STUDIO850 S74 LCF EMP SNR Detecting the presence of the paper at the Fig 2 22 9 37 Standby side empty sensor standby side of the tandem LCF Only for ASD ASU AUD MJD CND KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e STUDIO850 S75 LCF ENDF STP SNR Detecting the end fence stop position in the Fig 2 22 8 14 End fence stop position tandem LCF sensor Only for ASD ASU AUD MJD CND KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e STUDIO850 SW1 FSR SW Supplying or shutting off AC power to the Fig 2 11 24 9 Fuser detection switch damp heater according to the installation status of the fuser unit Not installed Shut off SW2 TNR SW Detecting the presence of the toner car Fig 2 12 45 18 Toner cartridge detection tridge switch SW3 DEV SW Detecting the presence of the developer Fig 2 14 5 16 Developer unit detection unit switch SWA CH CLN POS SW Detecting the stop position of the charger Fig 2 14 39 13 Wire cleaner position wire cleaner detection switch SW5 EXIT COV SW Detecting the opening closing status of the Fig 2 17 15 11 Exit cover switch left lower cover SW6 MAIN SW Turning the power of the equipment ON Fig 2 18 29 11 Main switch OFF SW7 U FRNT COV SW Detecting the opening closing status of the Fig 2 18 29 108 Front cover switch front cover upper SW8 COV INTLCK SW Supplying or shutting off AC power to the Fig 2 18 29 24 Cover inter
302. one by the serial communications of each DI CLK LD signal The analog out put signals from Ao1 to 4 are used to adjust the light intensity of the light emitting diode LED of the reflective sensor Also Ao5 and output 5 V or 0 V and are used as the output ports e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 78 9 Analog multiplexer circuit IC P41 b 1 k 5 a 54 i g B P55 i E 6 a_i INH 13 m o 7 I LNGS A SGND 1 e 15 1 READS A 2 Latz 11065 A 9 01 3 aleon 3 SSEN A 2 SEND 4 5 dE 1 4 ANO 2 SGND Fig 16 102 This is a circuit to connect to COM with one of the four analog input signals As following table shows the digital signals input into IC7 11 pin A IC7 10 B and IC7 9 pin switch the corre sponding channels IC7 3 pin COM at a high speed and they are input into the A D input termi nal of CPU Each channel signal is an analog output signal of the reflective sensor and used to adjust the sensor automatically B A Corresponding channel L L L 0 L L H 1 L H L 2 L H H 3 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 79 16 12 Input Output Signals 1 TXD ACK REQ signals Fig 16
303. oner output ATS 1A increased When the toner density is high Toner ratio to the carrier in developer material increased Magnetic resistance increased Detection output decreased Auto toner output ATS 1A decreased e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 14 12 6 Disassembly Replacement A Toner cartridge drive unit A 1 Toner cartridge drive unit 1 Take off the right front inner cover LU P 2 43 B Front right inner cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector 3 Loosen 1 screw to take off the bracket 4 Pull down the fixing pin and rotate it by 90 5 Pull out the toner cartridge drive unit up to approx 30 and then take it off in the direc tion of the arrow A 2 Toner cartridge switch SW2 1 Disconnect 2 connectors remove 1 screw and then take off the toner cartridge switch with the bracket 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the toner car tridge switch March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 15 Fixing pin Fig 12 9 Toner cartridge drive unit JA A S A AN T VT 77 LE TT N SN up m Fig 12 10 Top cover Toner cartridge detection switch Fig 12 11 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT A 3 New toner supply motor M5 1 Remove 3 screws to take off the top cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector remove 2 screws and then take off the new toner suppl
304. ore Rec Eee ertet a AER 2 7 2 3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components 2 32 2 4 System Block Diagramme sauts dns ete eie Po UC REB SEEN 2 42 2 5 Installation and Replacement of Covers 2 43 2 6 Installation and Separation of PC Boards 2 48 2 7 Removal and Installation of Options nennen 2 52 3 COPY PROCESS e 3 1 3 1 General 3 1 KT ER Of Copy le 3 2 3 3 Comparison of Process to e STUDIO550 650 810 3 11 4 GENERAL OPERATION coii reri erat voda rana sna 4 1 4 1 Overview of Operatlon eee eed encode O aula 4 1 4 2 Description of Operation 4 2 421 Waning e DEE 4 2 4 2 2 Ready state ready for copying 4 2 4 2 3 Drawer feed copying with the START button 4 3 4 2 4 Bypass feed COPYING nn 4 7 4 2 5 Interruption copying toic cdi ceret d drames free neue teurs 4 7 4 3 Detection of nere 4 8 4 3 1 Types of abnormality siennes 4 8 4 3 2 Description of abnormality eene 4 8 4 4 2 C 4 12 4 4 1 Power ON 4 12 4 4 2 Automatic feed copying 4 14 5 CONTROL PANEL ties
305. original Reproduction ratio 100 1 Original setting Same operation as 16 5 1 1 2 Lifting of the lifting tray Same operation as 16 5 1 2 3 Start of separation Same operation as 16 5 1 3 4 Start of feeding Same operation as 16 5 1 4 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Fig 16 44 16 24 March 2005 TOSHIBA 5 Start of 1st original top side scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine At the same time the original stop signal is reset When the read motor M36 starts to rotate forward the document feed motor M37 also starts to rotate in reverse and the large original exit solenoid 53015 turns ON The SCN STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section The large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate in reverse when the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and come to the 3 roller When the original registration sensor 555 has detected the trailing edge of the original the docu ment feed motor M37 stops rotating and the tray lift motor M38 starts to rotate to lift the tray The tray lift motor M38 stops rotating when a specified number of counts is counted after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor S59 has detected the top side of the original The original
306. original passes through the 1st roller until it passes through the read sensor S69 Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the 1st roller to the read sensor S69 plus 30 mm 5 Original jammed at the read sensor S69 from the large original exit side E725 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the scanning of an original from the large original exit side set at the scanning position until the original passes through the read sensor S69 Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for the longest original LD to pass through the read sensor S69 and proceed more 30 mm 16 6 3 Jams at large original exit section 1 Original jammed not reaching the large original exit sensor S68 while discharging E722 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original comes to the 4th roller until it reaches the large original exit sensor S68 Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the 4th roller to the large original exit sensor S68 plus 30 mm 2 Original jammed at the large original exit sensor S68 while discharging E731 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the leading edge of an original passes the position 20
307. osition is controlled e STUDIO850 Other The main charger cleaner operates Pre running operation The pre running operation starts when the temperature of the fuser roller surface reaches a certain degree Pre running is not performed when the fuser roller is already hot enough The fuser motor M3 is turned ON The fuser roller rotates The drum motor M11 is turned ON The drum rotates The used toner transport motor 9 is turned ON The used toner transport auger rotates Image quality control It charges the drum and detects the drum surface potential to set the optimal condition for output ting the image It forms a patch on the drum and reads out its reflective ratio to set the optimal condition When the surface temperature of the fuser roller becomes sufficient for fusing The IH coil IH COIL is turned OFF The set number 1 and READY displayed 4 2 2 Ready state ready for copying The buttons on the control panel are enabled When no button is pressed for a certain period of time The set number 1 and reproduction ratio 100 are displayed The equipment returns to the normal ready state e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 4 2 3 Drawer feed copying with the START button 1 Pressing the START button READY changes to COPYING The exposure lamp EXP is turned ON The scan motor M1 is turned
308. ove 150 or 40 C above below Detecting 1 240 or C449 19 On usual 40 above 250 or above 270 or above 250 or C468 18 above 2 40 or C412 2 Fixed time below C411 1 40 or below Detecting 1 240 or C449 19 On usual 100 above 250 or above 270 or above 250 or C468 18 above 2 100 or C446 3 Fixed time below C443 6 100 C or below When 1 240 or C449 22 On usual running end above temperature z 250 C or 5 E ready tem above perature is 5 detected 2 T March 2005 TOSHIBA e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 13 Temperature judged Pres Error Checking Condi Center Rear Front sure Error Counter DE timing tion ther ther ther roller code 08 400 9 9 iming mistor mistor mistor ther mistor During ready 1 240 C or C449 23 On usual above 250 C or above 270 or above 2 40 or C447 7 below 40 or below 40 or below 0 C or C467 below During 1 240 or C449 25 On usual printing above 250 C or above 270 or above 2 40 or C447 24 below 40 or below 40 or below 0 C or C467 below At Energy 1 240 or C449 27 On usual Saving Mode above 250
309. ove 2 screws to take off the large origi nal exit motor from the bracket lt Installation procedure gt 6 Hang the timing belt over the pulley of the large original exit motor Then fix the bracket with 2 screws 7 Attach 1 spring 8 Loosen the screws fixing the bracket tempo rarily Then tighten these screws so that the timing belt will be tightened Note Be sure that the timing belt has been tight ened completely e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 16 92 7 ain or Tension 22 Fig 16 125 Fig 16 126 Large original exit motor Fig 16 127 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC F Solenoid F 1 Small original exit solenoid SOL4 1 Take off the large original exit motor LH P 16 92 E 5 Large original exit motor Small original exit solenoid Screw M39 2 Disconnect 1 connector 3 Release the latch Then remove the arm and plunger 4 Remove 1 screw to take off the small original exit solenoid with its bracket 5 Remove 2 screws to take off the small origi nal exit solenoid from its bracket Fig 16 128 F 2 Large original exit solenoid SOL5 1 Take off the ADF rear cover P 16 86 B 2 ADF rear cover Screw Harness duct Connector Note The jam access cover should be opened 2 Disconnect 1 connector to release the har ness from the harness duct 3
310. parated from the lower developer sleeve to the mixer section Transport sleeve Developer sleeve Magnetic roller These sleeves are aluminum rollers which include a magnet in each This magnetic force attracts the developer material to form a magnetic brush This magnet is fixed therefore only the sleeves are rotated By this rotation the developer material is transported from the trans port sleeve to the developer sleeve and the magnetic brush formed by the developer sleeve sweeps over the drum surface thus the development is performed Doctor blade The doctor blade controls the amount of the developer material transported from the transport sleeve so that the magnetic brush of the developer material can contact with the drum surface properly e Auto toner sensor 512 The ratio of the carrier and toner 7 toner density in the developer material should constantly be fixed at a certain level for a correct image printing The auto toner sensor 512 detects the inclusion ratio of the toner in the developer material with a magnetic bridge circuit When the toner becomes insufficient the new toner supply motor M6 and the hopper motor M7 are driven to supply the toner from the toner cartridge and the recycle toner hopper e Scattered toner recovery roller This roller catches the toner scattered from the developer sleeve and puts the caught toner into the developer unit so that the scattered toner will not fall out of the developer u
311. pecified period of time has passed since the end fence started to move the paper in the standby side tray itis assumed that the tandem LCF is not operational and the corresponding message is dis played on the control panel 4 When the end fence home position sensor S73 is not turned ON even though the specified period of time has passed since the end fence started to move the paper in the standby side it is assumed that the tandem LCF is not operational and the corresponding message is displayed on the control panel March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 5 states 1 to 4 are cleared by turning the power OFF and solving the problems e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 9 14 9 4 Tray up motor control circuit The tray up motor is a DC motor driven by the control signal output from the CPU on the LGC board and moves up the tray in each drawer The motor driver outputs the drive signal PUTRM 0 1A PLTRM 0 1A to the motor based on the con trol signal PUTRM 0 1 PLTRM 0 1 The motor operates the forward rotation reverse rotation brake or stop according to the status of these drive signals LGC board 57 PUTRM 0 PUTRM 1 PLTRM 0 PLTRM 1 PUTRM 0A IC72 Motor driver Tray up motor 1 PUTRM 1A PLTRM 0A 6 Motor driver Tray up motor 2 PLTRM 1A
312. r higher gt 4 10ms to 120ms Le gt lt gt lt Pi N 5 1VA Linked with main switch PWR DN 11 4V or higher Oms to 20ms 12VA 12VB Linked with main switch 200ms or lower PWR EN Oms or 1 Oms or higher ease higher 200ms or 14 lower 3 3VB Linked with main switch 200ms 14 gt lower 5 1VC to 5 1VG Linked with main switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 3 2V or higher 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 95V or higher 5 1VH Linked with door switch 12VC to 12VF Linked with main switch 24VA to 24VG Linked with main switch 36VA to 36VD Linked with door switch Lower limit of each rated voltage or higher 4 95V R V 5 1V 11 4V R V 12V 21 6V R V 24V 32 4V R V 36V Fig 17 2 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 POWER SUPPLY UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 17 8 17 7 AC Wire Harness
313. r lt No of pixels gt Larger lt gt lt gt Lower Density Higher Lower Density Higher Histogram Fig 7 4 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 IMAGE PROCESSING March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Filtering This function is enabled by low pass filter processing and high pass filter processing Low pass filter processing This processing removes image electrical noise and decreases moire by performing averaging operation between the image signals of the targeted pixel and those of the neighboring pixels to enhance the reproducibility of original lt Example gt Density of the targeted pixel position is X Density of pixel positions at front and back of the tar geted pixel and b respectively X is converted to X through the low pass filtering When the matrix is 3 x 1 atb x a Div above averaging operation is performed for all the pixels to accomplish the high reproducibil ity of original The following is the case that the low pass filtering is applied on the primary scan ning pixel Density Density After low pass filter 0123456789 0123456789 Primary scanning pixel positions Primary scanning pixel positions Fig 7 5 High pass filter processing Character outline blurs when the original such as text with big difference in density among the pixels is optically scanned and output from the CCD Characteristic of the lens and other factors cause this phenomenon In this equipment
314. r release 4 lock sup ports and then take off the surface potential sensor board section Note The drum surface potential sensor consists of the detection section and the board sec tion as a set March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Sensor braket Fig 10 18 Connector Drum surface potential sensor board section Fig 10 19 Drum surface potential sensor detection section Locking support Locking support STE Fig 10 20 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION 10 13 E Temperature humidity sensor 57 1 Take off the control panel unit 5 P 5 17 A Control panel unit Temperature humidity sensor 2 Disconnect 1 connector remove 1 screw and then take off the temperature humidity sensor Fig 10 21 F Exhaust duct 1 Take off the wire cleaner drive unit P 10 11 B Wire cleaner drive unit Clamp Connector Wire cleaner drive motor 12 2 Pull out the transfer transport unit 2 Le 3 Take off the left upper cover E SE 2 Hr P 2 46 I Left upper cover T o 4 Open the left lower cover exit cover E 22 5 Disconnect 3 connectors and release the harness from 4 clamps ned gl o EL 6 Remove 1 screw sli
315. r belt with coating holding electrical resistance which electrostatically attracts the paper toner 4 Transfer belt cleaning mechanism The transfer belt cleaning mechanism section scrapes off the residual toner or paper dusts on the transfer belt surface with the transfer belt cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning brush and also transports the used toner with the recovery auger 5 Transfer belt cleaning blade The cleaning blade removes paper dusts and foreign objects left on the transfer belt surface after the separation of the paper 6 Transfer belt cleaning brush The cleaning brush is a conductive part to clean the toner electrostatically and the voltage whose polarity is reverse to that of toner is applied on it The current flowing to the cleaning brush is controlled at a constant current of 5 JA The voltage is normally between 100V and 500V while the applied voltage changes due to this constant current control A high voltage probe is reguired for this measurement Do not use a digital voltmeter for your safety 7 Recovery auger The recovery auger transports the residual toner scraped off with the transfer belt cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning brush to the used toner transport auger section 8 Transport guide The transport guide leads the electrostatically attracted paper to the fuser unit The guide is made of a material which prevents a frictional charge caused by the paper e STUDIO520 600 720 850 T
316. r large original exit roller release solenoid 5016 small original exit solenoid SOLA and large original exit solenoid SOL5 This circuit controls the closing opening of the flappers of the large original exit roller release sole noid small original exit and large original exit solenoids SOL6 SOL4 5015 When the level of ESSOL SSOL LSOL is H 09 010 011 are turned ON and the flappers are closed The drive signal for the large original exit roller release solenoid 5016 is a PWM signal The flappers are closed in the maximum torgue of the solenoids and the duty value becomes 100 when the flappers start to be closed After finishing closing the duty value is decreased down to 50 and the flappers are kept closed while the temperature rise of the solenoids is being lowered 5501 D 24V RSOL D SSOL 24V LSOL D o u o fr ESSOL 24V 6 C93 Reset circuit Fig 16 98 CRIE C24 v l TP31 LSOL bi gt RESETIN March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC WM 77 SGND 77 SGND Fig 16 99 This circuit generates a CPU reset signal when the power is turned ON and the power voltage is detected to have become lower The level of IC5 6 OUT is normally H after the power is turned ON However when the power is turned OFF or th
317. r of the carriage 1 at half the scanning speed of carriage 1 the scanning distance is also half of carriage 1 4 Lens unit The light reflected from the mirror 3 is led to the CCD placed at the focal point of the lens which is fixed at this position 5 Automatic original detection sensor 51 5 The size of the original placed on the glass is instantly detected using the automatic original detec tion sensors S1 5 fixed on the base frame without moving the carriage 1 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 6 CCD board CCD This is a board to convert the light led through the lens unit into the minute analog signal optical to electrical conversion and transfer it to the SLG board SLG 7 SLG board SLG This is a board to perform the image correction such as the signal synthesis signal amplification A D conversion and shading correction March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION 6 3 Operation 6 3 1 Scanner motor M1 Scan motor Carriage wire Carriage 1 Pulley for carriage 2 022 7 Motor pulley Idler pulley 2GT Z24 022 2 Wire pulley 930 83 2GT Z84 Fig 6 3 Scanning an original on the original glass This motor drives the carriages 1 and 2 through the timing belt and carriage wire First the scan mo
318. ransport sensor 570 E751 Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the trailing edge of an original passes the position 20 mm further from the 3rd roller until it has passed through the original intermediate transport sen sor S70 Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for the trailing edge of an original to proceed the distance from the position 20 mm further from the 3rd roller to the original intermediate transport sensor 570 plus 60 mm 16 6 7 Jams when the cover is open 1 Jams when RADF is open E870 Detection range This jam is detected during copying Detection timing This detection is judged as jam immediately after the RADF is detected to be open during copy ing 2 Jams when RADF jam access cover is open E860 Detection range This jam is detected during copying Detection timing This detection is judged as jam immediately after the RADF jam access cover is detected to be open during copying 16 6 8 Jams when 24V power is OFF 1 Jams when 24V is OFF E800 Detection range This jam is detected during standby or copying when power is ON Detection timing This detection is judged as jam when the RADF is instructed to be started without the supply of 24V power 16 6 9 Jams when paper remains 1 Jams when paper remains at each sensor Detection range This jam is detected during standby or copying when power is ON E
319. re set The set number remains the same 2 Selecting the desired copy conditions 3 After interruption copying is finished When the LED INTERRUPT is turned OFF by pressing the INTERRUPT button the equip ment returns to the status before the interruption Ready to resume job 1 appears 4 Pressing the START button The copying operation before the interruption resumes March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION 4 3 Detection of Abnormality When something abnormal has occurred in the eguipment the symbols corresponding to the type of abnormality are displayed 4 3 1 Types of abnormality 1 Abnormality which can be cleared without turning OFF the door switch A Adding paper B Pick up failure in the bypass 2 Abnormality which cannot be cleared without turning OFF the door switch C Misfeeding in the equipment D The developer unit is not installed properly E Replacing the toner cartridge 3 Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the main switch F Replacing the toner bag G Call for service 4 3 2 Description of abnormality A Adding paper The drawer empty sensor 531 37 43 49 detects the presence or absence of paper When the drawer is not installed No drawer is detected The Ee does not go up the drawer empty sensor 531 37 43 49 is turned Add tmt button is disabled When the draw
320. reverse transport path S25 SFB COV SNR Detecting the opening closing status of the Fig 2 19 29 7 Bypass feed unit cover bypass feed unit cover sensor S26 FEED COV SNR Detecting the opening closing status of the Fig 2 19 29 7 Feed cover sensor feed cover e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Symbol Name Function Remarks 527 SFB FEED SNR Detecting the presence of the paper on the Fig 2 20 10 23 Bypass feed sensor bypass feed unit 928 SFB SIZE SNR Detecting the width of the paper on the Fig 2 20 12 9 Bypass paper size detec bypass feed unit tion sensor 529 CST1 SNR Detecting the presence of the 1st drawer Fig 2 21 7 18 1st drawer detection sen sor 530 CST1 BTM SNR Detecting the lowering status of the tray in Fig 2 21 30 26 1st drawer bottom sensor the 1st drawer 531 5 1 5 Detecting the presence of the paper the Fig 2 21 7 18 1st drawer empty sensor 1st drawer 532 CST1 TRY SNR Detecting the lifting status of the tray in the Fig 2 21 7 18 1st drawer tray up sensor 1st drawer 533 CST1 TR SNR Detecting the paper transport at the paper Fig 2 21 7 18 1st drawer transport sensor feeding system of the 1st drawer 534 CST1 FEED SNR Detecting the paper feeding status of the Fig 2 21 7 18 1st drawer feed sensor 1st drawer 535 CST2 SNR Detecting the presence of the 2nd drawer Fig 2 21 7 18 2nd drawer
321. right rear cover March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Fig 2 41 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE I Left upper cover 1 Take off the top left cover CI P 2 44 D Top left cover 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the left upper cover J Left lower cover Exit cover 1 Remove 6 screws to take off the left lower cover K Left rear cover 1 Remove 1 screw to take off the left rear cover e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE Left upper cover Left rear cover Fig 2 43 Fig 2 44 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC L Rear cover 1 Loosen 1 screw fixing the ozone filter 2 Remove 7 screws Then release 2 hooks to take off the rear cover Rear cover March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 2 6 Installation and Separation of PC Boards A System control PC board SYS board SYS board case 1 Take off the rear cover LU P 2 47 L Rear cover 2 Remove 2 screws 3 Loosen 10 screws and take off the SYS board cover by sliding it upward Note A cooling fan is installed on the SYS board cover Therefore be sure not to pull the har nesses connecting to the fan 4 Disconnect the connector of the cooling fan from the SYS board 5 Remove 5 screws to
322. rmality Wire breakings or improper installation of IH coil C490 16 Power voltage lower limit abnormality AC input has dropped to less than 75 of rated voltage 474 17 is L Other than the above Power voltage abnormal ity when the front cover upper is opened An abnormal status is detected when the cover is opened 475 10 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 8 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 4 5 Temperature detection section To maintain the fuser roller at a constant temperature the two fuser roller thermistors front and rear detect the fuser roller temperature and control the on off of the IH coil The abnormal temperature of the coil is detected by the three fuser roller thermistors front center and rear while that of the pressure roller is detected by the pressure roller thermistor 1 Relation between the thermistor output voltage and surface temperature of the fuser roller Output voltages of thermistors V Surface temperatures of fuser roller Approx 0 5 40 Approx 2 0 100 Approx 3 4 160 Approx 3 6 170 Approx 3 8 185 Approx 4 0 200 2 Control of the surface temperature of the fuser roller 160 to 200 C 1 150 to 200 C 1 155 to 200 C 2 Temperature Fusing control e STUDIO850 e STUDIO520 600 720 200
323. rmistors THM2 and 3 detect the temperature of the fuser roller to maintain it within a certain range which is higher than the lower limit which would cause poor fusing and lower than the upper limit which would cause a high temperature offset When the temperature of the fuser roller is lower than the preset temperature it is turned ON to supply power to the and when it is higher than the preset temperature it is turned OFF to cut the supply It also detects the slight difference of the temperatures at the center and rear end of the fuser roller to control the ON OFF of the center and side IH coil to keep the fuser roller at a certain tempera ture March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 9 Fuser roller front thermistor 1 This thermistor cannot be used for the temperature control of the fuser roller It detects a temper ature abnormality at the side area of the fuser roller where the paper does not pass through 10 Fuser roller center thermostat THMO1 and Fuser roller side thermostat THMO2 These thermostats cut off the power supply to the coil IH COIL when the fuser roller becomes abnormally hot as the result of a problem such as a thermistors 1 2 and 3 mal function The thermostats THMO1 and 2 of this equipment are used to prevent abnormal ation and when any abnormality is detected they must be replaced altogether with the other damaged parts of the
324. rotate in reverse when the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and come to the 3rd roller When the original registration sensor 555 has detected the trailing edge of the original the docu ment feed motor M37 stops rotating and the tray lift motor M38 starts to rotate to lift the tray The tray lift motor M38 stops rotating when a specified number of counts is counted after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor 859 has detected the top side of the original The original empty sensor S60 detects whether or not there is a next original when a specified time passes after the original registration sensor 855 has detected the trailing edge of the original With a next original separating of the next original begins Fig 16 38 When the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section the SCN STR turns OFF and both the read and large original exit motors M36 M39 start to accelerate March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 21 Fig 16 39 Fig 16 40 When the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller then proceeded a specified distance the large original exit motor M39 starts to slow down After the large original exit sensor S68 h
325. rotation CW H H L L Brake March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 9 9 Disassembly Replacement A Paper feeder unit Bypass feed unit 1 Take off the right rear cover LU 2 45 H Right rear cover 2 Open the right center cover to disconnect 1 connector 3 Remove 2 pins and take off the bypass feed unit by lifting it and the feeder side center cover up 4 Open the right lower cover and take it off by lifting it up 5 Pull out the drawer completely Note If the drawer is not pulled out completely when the paper feeder unit is taken off the sensor may get damaged e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM Bypass feed unit d di b mon 2 U DEL 22 9 12 Right ower cover Fig 9 14 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 6 Disconnect 1 connector remove 3 screws to take off the paper feeder unit Note There are 4 identical paper feeder units when the LCF is installed there are 2 Fig 9 15 A 1 Pickup roller Feed roller and Separation roller 1 Remove 1 clip to take off the pickup roller Pickup roller 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the guide Guide March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 3 Remove 1 clip to take off the feed roller 4 Remove 1 clip to take off the sep
326. rt unit from the slide rail by lifting it Notes 1 When lifting up the transfer transport unit do not hold D Transport guide because it may cause damage to the transport guide 2 When installing follow the procedure below 10 Pull out the slide rail on the left side com pletely Fig 13 18 11 the transfer transport unit on the slide rail on the left side properly 12 Extend the slide rail on the right side Make sure to extend the leading edge of the slide rail completely 13 the transfer transport unit on the slide rail on the right side 14 Fix the transfer transport unit with 2 stepped screws 15 Assemble it in the reverse order of the disas sembling procedure F Horizontal transport sensor 1 2 and 3 S19 S20 S21 1 Take off the transfer unit P 13 6 A Transfer unit Horizontal transport Horizontal transport 2 Take off the fuser unit sensor 1 sensor 3 LU P 14 18 B Fuser unit 3 Remove 1 screw to take off each sensor with its bracket 4 Disconnect 1 connector and release the latch to take off each sensor Screw Note The horizontal transport sensor 3 521 can be replaced without the transport unit being Se Ei taken off Horizontal transport sensor 2 Fig 13 19 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRA
327. s Rae RE zs oe 5 ctis 50 CN2 4 SSENLEDL 1 i 1 9 105 432 E SSEN A 2 2 2 2 177 SGND SGND SGND Son Heil R40 5 1 2 9 R57 0 1 1 De T Ci SSEN DA AB Ba 2 R52 2 SGND SGNDI 45V e R31 ER Rl 13 11 CNI1 13 5V IR 1 3 READS CN11 12 READS E CNIL 11 READLED 1 1 w li 9 EN Re QUE R10 2 2 177 SGND SGND SEND SGND TP23 2 R2 R582 Le 1 READS DA 05 11 4 1 A B 13 m 1 RUE SGND 45V a 193 SP R33 EI T R33 zm 3 CM LC ES 9 TPB 3 1 1 RII 1015 D Lours CNI2 2 LOUTS 2 Lue sf gt 27 CN12 1 LOUTLED H 1 i 1 m ZI LOUTS A 2 2 2 2 177 SEND Som SOND 5000 25 ce ER i 3 DE 10075 DA ds 5 T ij B SGND SGNDI Rid 2 R355 E St 703 CN14 10 vcc 19 he 1 gt R45 166 LNGS 5 H 1 el TP33 cni4 8 LNGLED 8 i i RI Cm R71 LNGS_A 2 2 2 2 Sen Som SGND SGND TP34 A R34 9 w 1 RSS fi 2 d C LNGS DA ai WEI Be e 1 R512 SGND SGNDI Fig 16 106 These are the input circuits from each photosensor March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 83 Signal logic Sensor Connector level 5V 1 Connector level 0V 0 559 open close sensor 565
328. s been transported to the large original exit side and come to the 3rd roller the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 turns ON The large original exit motor M39 starts to slow down when the trailing edge of 1st original has passed the intermediate transport roller The SCN STR turns OFF when the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section At the same time both the read and the large original exit motors M36 M39 start to accelerate and the large original exit roller release solenoid SOL6 turns OFF Fig 16 29 When the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller then proceeded a specified distance the large original exit motor M39 starts to slow down After the large original exit sensor S68 has detected the trailing edge of the original the read motor M36 stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance The large original exit solenoid SOL5 turns OFF when the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 16 Fig 16 30 10 Start of 2nd original back side registering Same operation as 6 Fig 16 31 11 Start of 2nd original back side feeding
329. sconnect 2 connectors and remove 1 screw to take off the ground wire 4 Remove 4 screws to take off the HDD with its bracket Note Be sure that any vibration is not transmitted to the HDD 5 Remove 4 screws and take off the HDD 6 Remove 1 screw to remove the ground wire Note When installing the HDD be sure that the ground wire is not contacting the bracket D High voltage transformer HVT LGC board case 1 Take off the rear cover LU P 2 47 L Rear cover 2 Take off the LGC board cover LU P 2 49 B Logic PC board LGC board 3 Disconnect 20 connectors of the LGC board 4 Remove 6 screws and take off the LGC board case with the board e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE Fig 2 53 LGC board case Tees EU 2 54 March 2005 TOSHIBA 5 Disconnect 6 connectors of the high voltage transformer 6 Remove 1 screw and release 3 locking sup ports to take off the high voltage transformer High voltage transformer Fig 2 55 E Switching regulator PS 1 Take off the rear cover CI P 2 47 L Rear cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector to release the har ness from the clamp 3 Remove 4 screws and take off the switching regulator cover
330. sensor and the sensor determines that there is no paper 9 Feed sensor 534 540 546 552 Transport sensor 533 539 545 551 Feed sensor 534 40 46 52 detects if the leading edge or trailing edge of paper passed the feed roller Transport sensor 533 39 45 51 detects if the leading edge or trailing edge of paper passed the transport roller They also detects jams like misfeeding 10 Registration sensor 518 This sensor detects that the leading edge of paper has reached the registration roller and the trailing edge of paper has passed the registration roller 11 Drawer tandem LCE tray up sensor 532 536 542 548 This sensor detects the tray position when the trays of the drawer and tandem LCF go up It detects the amount of sheets placed in the drawer according to the time between when the drawer bottom sensor 530 36 42 48 is turned OFF and the drawer tray up sensor 532 38 44 50 is turned ON e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 Drawer bottom sensor 530 536 542 548 This sensor detects the bottom position of the drawer 13 Tandem LCE tray bottom sensor 571 It detects the lower limit position home position on the LCF tray 14 Standby side mis stacking sensor 572 It detects if sheets of paper placed in the feeding side tray or standby side tray not within the tray sheets are not aligned correctly 15 End home position sensor
331. set on RADF and one of the copy modes in the above table is selected The period of time from pressing START to the paper exit completely out of the equipment based on the actually measured value 41st drawer is selected and copying is at the sort mode Finisher hole punch unit and inserter are installed Automatic copy density APS AMS are turned off Copy paper Duplex Tandem Drawer copy LCF Bypass copy Remarks Size to A5 R LD to ST R A4 LT A3 to A5 R LD to ST R FOLIO FOLIO COMPUTER 13 LG COMPUTER 13 LG 8 5 x8 5 8 5 x8 5 8K 16K 16K R 8K 16K 16K R Non standard or user speci fied sizes can be set Weight 64 to 209g m 17 Ib Bond to 115 7 Ib Index Special paper Tab paper Tracing paper 75g m only These special 2nd drawer is Labels OHP film Tab paper papers recom recommended mended by Toshiba Tec First copy time e STUDIO520 600 720 Approx 4 0 sec or less e STUDIO850 Approx 3 5 sec or less A4 LT 1st drawer 100 original placed manually Top side discharge Warming up time e STUDIO520 Approx 130 sec e STUDIO600 Approx 130 sec Approx 160 sec TWD e STUDIO720 Approx 130 sec Approx 160 sec TWD e STUDIO850 Approx 130 sec temperature 20 or over rated voltage rating current e Multiple copying Up to 9999 copies Key in set numbers Reproduction ratio Actual r
332. sh ROM outputs data to display the message to the System CPU The System CPU writes the data to be displayed on the LCD panel into the RAM d The LCD controller driver reads the display data from the RAM and outputs the data to the LCD panel SYS board a SS b Flash ROM K LCD controller Control panel LCD panel CPU Key switches and touch panel Control panel Fig 5 7 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL 4 Data transmission 1 1 eee PA EFU CP 640 4 pulses re SO _ 00 08 XXIX X XXX Ee ee Fig 5 8 5 4 2 LED display circuit Method of LED display Example Displaying COPY 5 1VA Current Low NN Z Sok 1 019 Q1 PX COPY LED10 1 Low 56 5 5 Fig 5 9 The transistors 019 Q1 are turned ON when the COM1 signal becomes Low level Also when OUTPS signal changes to Low level the current flows from 5 1VA via the transistor Q1 to the LED 10 1 COPY to turned ON the LED 10 1 Conditions to turn ON the LED 1 The transistor 01 connected to the LED anode is 2 The transistor 07 connected to the LED cathode side is The LED is turned ON when 1 and 2 are satisfied e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 5 5 Disassembly Replacement Control pan
333. sher MJ 1027 Saddle stitch finisher MJ 1028 Staple cartridge STAPLE 700 STAPLE 600 for saddle stitch Finisher guide rail KN 1017 Hole punch unit MJ 6003N E F S Inserter MJ 7001 Damp heater MF 6000U E Fax board GD 1170NA EU AU Printer kit GM 1050 Printer Scanner kit GM 2040 Scanner kit GM 4010 Wireless LAN adapter GN 1040 Bluetooth module GN 2010 Antenna GN 3010 Scrambler board GP 1040 Data overwrite kit GP 1060 PCI slot GO 1050 Parallel interface kit GF 1140 The finisher MJ 1027 1028 is necessary for the installation of the hole punch unit MJ 6003N E F S and the inserter MJ 7001 The PCI slot GO 1050 is necessary for the installation of the scrambler board GP 1040 the allel interface kit GF 1140 and the fax board GD 1170NA EU AU antenna GN 3010 is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module GN 1040 and the blue tooth module GN 2010 Up to 2 antennas GN 3010 can be connected to the wireless LAN module GN 1040 When the wireless LAN module GN 1040 and the bluetooth module GN 2010 are installed together only 1 antenna GN 3010 can be connected to each e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 10 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 1 4 Supplies Drum OD 6510 Developer D 6000 Toner PS ZT6000D for other PS ZT6000E for MJD PS ZT6000 for NAD Toner bag PS TB6510
334. speeds can be realized only in the following conditions Original A4 LT 1 sheet e Copy mode A4 LT Plain paper Automatic Paper Selection OFF Automatic Copy Density OFF Number of copy set 52 or more 60 or more 72 or more 85 or more Reproduction ratio 100 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 3 speed for thick paper Copies min Thick 1 Paper weight From over 80 g m 21 3 Ib Bond to 105 g m 28 Ib Bond Paper source Drawers Tandem LCF Option LCF e STUDIO 520 e STUDIO600 e STUDIO720 e STUDIO850 4 B5 A5 R Top side 52 60 72 85 LT ST R discharging Back side 52 60 72 85 discharging A4 R B5 R Top side 42 46 52 61 LT R discharging Back side 42 46 50 56 discharging B4 FOLIO Top side 37 41 44 52 LG discharging COMPUTER Back side 37 38 41 45 discharging A3 LD Top side 33 36 37 43 discharging Back side 31 32 34 37 discharging Tandem LCF AALT only Option LCE A4 B5 LT only Tolerance Within 0 5 from 1 Thick 1 Paper weight From over 80 g m 21 3 Ib Bond to 105 g m 28 Ib Bond Paper source Bypass feed e STUDIO520 e STUDIO600 e STUDIO720 e STUDIO850 Size specified Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No A4 B5 A5 R Top side 45 28 46 30 46 30 50 34 LT ST R discharging Back side 45 28 46 30 46 30 50 34 dischargi
335. ss cover sensor Note Lift up the pickup unit before taking off the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor Fig 16 131 G 2 Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor 562 1 Take off the upper guide unit P 16 88 D 2 Separation roller Screw Upper guide stay Screw 2 Remove 2 screws to take off the upper guide stay Fig 16 132 3 Open the reverse guide Then release the inserted portion on the front side of the guide Inserted portion Reverse guide to take it out to the front side HI H 4 Remove 4 screws to take off the lower guide T fam m U Note 2 screws on the front side are stepped n screws Inn D ER d n s Ir Stepped screw Lower guide Screw Fig 16 133 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 94 5 Disconnect 1 connector to take off the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor Fig 16 134 G 3 Original length detection sensor 563 1 Take off the lower guide LU P 16 94 G 2 Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor S62 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw Then take off the origi
336. ss feed unit LO P 9 20 Paper feeder unit Bypass feed unit March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM C 1 Bypass feed roller Pickup roller 1 Remove 1 clip and 1 bushing and displace the bypass transport roller 2 Remove 2 clips and take off the bypass feed roller pickup roller by sliding the bushing and pulley to the inside 3 Remove 2 clips pull out the shaft to take off the pickup roller 4 Remove 2 clips and pull out the shaft to take off the paper feed roller Notes 1 When assembling the roller do not install the wrong bushing 2 Be sure to install the feed roller in the cor rect direction because it has a one way clutch inside it 3 Make sure there is no staining such as oil on the surface of the timing belt pulley and roller e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM tet 5 A Bypass transport roller Bushing Clip Fig 9 35 Pickup feed roller unit Plastic bushing ER A 3 AJ Clip Fig 9 36 One way clutch Feed roller Metal Pickup roller bushing Fig 9 37 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC C 2 Bypass feed clutch CLT4 1 Disconnect the connector and then remove the harness band clip to take off the bypass feed clutch No
337. ss paper size detection sensor Connector Fig 9 48 Feed roller Feeding direction lt _ 5 Pickup roller Separation roller Fig 9 49 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Feed motor M20 1 Take off the rear cover LU P 2 47 L Rear cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector release 1 lock sup port and then remove 3 screws to take off the feed motor Locking support Connector Feed motor 2 Screw 4 Fig 9 50 E Tray driving unit upper lower Tray up motor M21 M22 1 Take off the switching regulator LU P 2 51 JEJ Switching regulator PS Connector 2 Remove 4 screws to take off the tray driving unit upper Note 77 Both the upper and lower sides the same tray driving units Tray drive unit 3 Reverse the tray driving unit and release 6 latches to take off the cover Note Coupling The spring which pushes open the cover is Coupling ei inside the tray driving unit so be careful when you remove the cover March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 4 F 1 2 3 4 Take off the tray up motor Note Align the boss of the gear and the hole of the cover when installing the tray up motor Feed driving unit Take off the switching regulator LU P 2 51 JEJ Switching regulator PS Take off the f
338. started Fig 16 66 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 46 2 Rewriting of flash Normal ROM NO installed on jig board YES ROM abnormality Flash ROM deleted displayed on LED Flash ROM NO succeedeg to delete YES Failure of deleting Flash ROM rewritten flash ROM displayed on LED Flash ROM NO rewriting succeeded YES Success of rewriting Failure of rewriting displayed on LED displayed on LED E Flash ROM rewriting completed Fig 16 67 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 47 3 Start of communication line gt Operation monitoring Cover closed Operation started sensors OFF Operation completed Initialization Cover opened Initialization detected jam Finished due to jam Cover open Original setting Cover opened signal received 4 Fig 16 68 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 16 48 4 Initialization 1 Initialization started Document feed motor reverse rotation Read motor forward rotation Large original exit motor reverse rotation Sm
339. surface potential charging sensor This sensor is composed of the detection section and the board section S14 TNR LVL SNR Detecting the density of toner image test Fig 2 14 50 16 Image quality sensor pattern developed on the drum surface S15 TRB SNR2 Detecting the releasing status of the trans Fig 2 14 18 2 Transfer belt release detec fer belt tion sensor S16 TRB SNR1 Detecting the contacting status of the trans Fig 2 14 18 3 Transfer belt contact detec fer belt tion sensor S17 MID TR SNR Detecting the paper transport between the Fig 2 16 17 5 Intermediate transport sen paper feeding system and the registration sor roller S18 RGST SNR Detecting the paper transport at the regis Fig 2 16 16 6 Registration sensor tration roller section S19 HRZ TR SNR1 Detecting the paper transport at the Fig 2 16 20 23 Horizontal transport sen entrance of the horizontal transport path sor 1 S20 HRZ TR SNR2 Detecting the paper transport at the middle Fig 2 16 20 23 Horizontal transport sen of the horizontal transport path sor 2 S21 HRZ TR SNR3 Detecting the paper transport at the exit of Fig 2 16 20 23 Horizontal transport sen the horizontal transport path sor 3 S22 EXIT SNR Detecting paper exit Fig 2 17 15 25 Exit sensor S23 REV SNR1 Detecting the paper transport at the upper Fig 2 17 15 14 Reverse sensor 1 section of the reverse transport path S24 REV SNR2 Detecting the paper transport at the lower Fig 2 17 15 14 Reverse sensor 2 section of the
340. t amount is maximum at the CCD center gradually decreases toward ends 3 Each of the 7 500 elements varies in the opto electronic conversion efficiency These variations need to be corrected and this correction is referred to as shading correction Based on the black and white data obtained in advance a normalization process using the following for mula is applied to the raw image data to correct lighting variance and element variation of the image data _ 5 Coefficient Image data before correction Black data stored in Black memory White data stored in White memory March 2005 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION 6 6 Automatic Original Size Detection Circuit This circuit detects the size of original standard sizes only using the reflection type photosensors arranged on the base frame of the scanner unit 6 6 1 Principle of original size detection The reflection type photosensors are placed on the base frame of the scanner unit as shown in the fig ure below Each sensor consists of an infrared light emitting diode LED on the light emitting side and a phototransistor on the light receiving side When there is an original on the original glass light beams from the LEDs are reflected by the original and led to the phototransistors This means that the size of the original is detected by checking which phototransistors are turned on or are not
341. t the separation roller It transports paper from the pickup roller to the transport roller 3 Separation roller This roller is placed against the feed roller When two or more sheets of paper are sent from the pickup roller the load of the torque limiter of the separation roller is greater than the frictional force between the sheets of paper As the result the separation roller is stopped and the lower paper is not advanced any further When only one sheet of paper is sent from the pickup roller the separa tion roller rotates following the feed roller 4 Transport roller This roller transports the paper sent from the feed roller to the intermediate transport roller 5 Intermediate transport roller This roller transports the paper sent from the transport roller to the registration roller 6 Registration roller The paper sent from the intermediate transport roller is pushed against the registration roller which aligns the leading edge of paper Then the registration roller rotates to transport the paper to the transfer section 7 Bypass feed sensor 527 This sensor detects if paper is set in the bypass tray If it is bypass feeding always comes before drawer feeding 8 Empty sensor 531 S37 543 549 This is an emission type sensor and detects the availability of paper in the drawer by using an actu ator When there is no paper in the drawer the actuator blocks the light path of the
342. take off the leaf spring 6 Disconnect 7 connectors of the SYS board 7 Remove 6 screws to take off the SYS board Fig 2 48 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 8 Remove 6 screws to take off the SYS board case SYS board case Notes 1 When any option is installed take off the option first and then take off the SYS board 2 The SYS board case can be taken off without removing the SYS board this case remove 7 screws Fig 2 49 Logic PC board LGC board 1 Take off the rear cover LH P 2 47 L Rear cover LGC board cover 2 Loosen 8 screws and take off the LGC board cover by sliding it to the right side Fig 2 50 3 Disconnect 20 connectors of the LGC board 4 Remove 6 screws to take off the LGC board LGC board TA VE E 5 Ss A S 2 51 March 2005 TOSHIBA e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE C Hard disk HDD 1 Take off the rear cover LU P 2 47 L Rear cover 2 Remove the SYS board cover LU P 2 48 A System control PC board SYS board SYS board case 3 Di
343. tate in reverse Fig 16 22 The SCN STR turns OFF after the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section and at the same time both the read and large original exit motors M36 M39 start to accelerate After the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller and proceeded a specified distance the large original exit motor M39 slows down After the large original exit sensor 568 has detected the trailing edge of the original the read motor M36 stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance Then the original is nipped by the large original exit roller The large original exit solenoid 5015 turns OFF when the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating Fig 16 23 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 13 6 Start of 1st original back side registering The large original exit motor M39 starts to rotate forward After the large original exit sensor 568 has detected the leading edge of the original then the original has proceeded a specified distance and been registered the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating Fig 16 24 7 Start of 1st original back side feeding Both the large original
344. tch SW5 1 Take off the left lower cover exit cover LU P 2 46 Left lower cover Exit cover 2 Open the exi reverse unit Then disconnect G Be the connector and release the latch to take M off the exit cover switch o C Le P Xi D Exit cover switch N 15 14 F Gate solenoid SOL2 1 Take off the left lower cover exit cover LU P 2 46 J Left lower cover Exit cover 2 Open the exi reverse unit Then disconnect 1 connector release the clamp and remove 3 screws to take off the gate solenoid Gate solenoid Fig 15 15 Note The solenoid is normally screwed at the posi tion A shown in the figure at right However the position of the solenoid can be adjusted by moving this screw to the position B when the flap valve of the solenoid is not pulled enough Fig 15 16 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION 15 13 Exit roller 1 Take off the exit reverse unit LU P 15 11 JAJ Exit Reverse unit 2 Remove the E ring gear and pin 3 Remove 2 E rings and take off the exit roller by sliding 2 bearings to the inside Exit roller Fig 15 17 H Reverse section driving unit Reverse motor driving PC board MOT2 RV board 1 Take off the exit reverse unit LU P 15 11 JAJ Exit Reverse unit 2 Disconnect 1 connector remove 6 scr
345. te When assembling be sure that the stopper of the clutch is securely inserted into the groove of the bracket Fig 9 38 31 Bypass pickup solenoid SOL3 Bypass feed sensor 527 1 Remove 5 screws disconnect 2 connectors and take off the stay Connector Screw Stay Connector Fig 9 39 2 Disconnect the connector and take off the bypass feed sensor Bypass feed sensor Fig 9 40 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 3 Remove 2 screws to take off the solenoid Notes 1 When installing the solenoid install it for the edge of the solenoid to get in phase with the edges of the plate 2 When installing the solenoid fix it at the position where the bosses of two gears are put each other 3 Puton the spring in the place shown by the figure C 4 Separation roller 1 Remove 4 screws to take off the paper guide Bypass pickup solenoid Fig 9 41 Marking O Spring Fig 9 42 Screw Paper guide Screw Screw e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM Fig 9 43 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 2 Remove 1 clip and take off the separation roller by lifting the shaft Separation roller Clip
346. tes 5 V and 0 substitutes 0 V The same logic is used in both the connector and CPU output port March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF 16 81 3 Input circuits for each sensor Seg E z E open close eurswc E CNI1 10 SGND R4 R3 IC17 4 9 sensor 8 DFOPNS 8 Lynn P30 D e APS operation sensor anaf vwe CNI1 2 SGND 51 zg 47 107 3 p CN11 3 APS S en 1 CN11 7 NC r Original width P P CNI0 2 SGND _ RAI 3 _ 5 we detetion sensor 1 51781 2 EME ENT D Ga Original width oaf ve SE 10 5 mo Ha VI SND RAIZ 1 detetion sensor 2 Nio suse E i zeen CB B Original width Tu detetion sensor 3 ETUR n CNI0 8 51753 TCLI iai i 10 SGND 42 ___ 1 1 1 Original registration sensor Rees avd Original 4 CN6 5 5 0 P empty sensor
347. the feed motor M20 is turned OFF 0 Jam detection 1 paper jam occurs in the following cases Tandem LCF feed sensor 546 is not turned ON within a specified period of time after the feeding is started The leading edge of the paper does not pass the tandem LCF feed sensor 546 in the trans port path within a specified period of time 2 Open the right lower cover remove all the paper remaining on the transport path and close the cover to clear the paper jam If either of the tandem LCF transport sensor S45 is still ON when the right lower cover is closed it is determined that there is still paper on the transport path and the paper jam status is not cleared 3 When paper jam occurs in the tandem LCE during continuous copying the sheet that was fed before the jam is copied normally E Call for Service 1 When the tandem LCF tray up sensor S44 is not turned ON even though the specified period of time has passed since the tray started to be raised it is assumed that the drawer is not opera tional and the corresponding message is displayed on the control panel 2 When the tandem LCF bottom sensor 842 is not turned ON even though the specified period of time has passed since the tray started to be lowered it is assumed that the drawer is not opera tional and the corresponding message is displayed on the control panel 3 When the end fence stop position sensor 575 is not turned ON even though the s
348. the laser beam spotted on the drum is adjusted 8 2 4 detection PC board SNS board Laser beam which has started to be scanned from one of the reflected faces of the polygonal mirror is reflected by the H sync detection mirror and goes into the PIN diode on the H sync detection PC board SNS The primary scanning synchronizing signal is generated based on this reflected laser beam For the e STUDIO850 the rudder sensor is attached to the H sync sensor to space out evenly 42 3 the intervals of the secondary scanning of the 1st and 2nd beams by its detection value 8 2 5 Laser driving board LDR1 LDR2 board This control board has the following functions a APC control function adjusts disparity of the laser intensity caused by temperature b Laser ON OFF function March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT 8 2 6 Slit glass Slit glass is located where the laser beams are output from the laser optical unit and it protects the unit from dust e STUDIO520 600 720 850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 8 3 Laser Diode Control Circuit This equipment uses an AlGaAs type semiconductive laser with 10 mW of optical output power rating This laser emits a beam in a single transverse mode in approx 785 nm wavelength PIN diode for mon itoring optical output in this laser controls the laser intensity The relation between the forward current and optical output of a semiconductive l
349. the on off of the fuser motor When this signal moves to a low level the motor is rotated and when this moves to a high level the motor is stopped HTRCK signal This signal is a reference clock which keeps the fuser motor rotation at a constant speed When the cyclic change of the FG pulse period against this reference signal is within 6 25 this is defined as a lock range the normal rotation of the motor When the cyclic change is within this range the LED on the driving PC board of this motor is lit HTRML signal This signal rotates the fuser motor at a low speed When this signal moves to a low level the motor is rotated at a low speed and when this moves to a high level the motor is roated at a high speed e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 16 14 6 Disassembly Replacement A Heater control board board 1 Open the front cover Then pull out the trans fer transport unit by turning its handle clock wise Fig 14 10 2 Remove 2 screws and open the IH cover 1 carefully to the front side cover 1 Screw 3 Remove 4 screws and then release 4 power supply harnesses of the IH coil Notes 1 Be sure that each of these harnesses is connected to the proper position 2 Use tightening torgues of 1 2 2 0 Nem for the 4 screws connecting these power supply harnesses 3 Since the IH board is a high voltage sec tion be sure to
350. the right direction 2 Be sure that no dust or stain is on the LCD panel or the touch panel before the installation Fig 5 21 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 6 SCANNING SECTION 6 1 Function In scanning section of this eguipment the surface of an original is irradiated with a direct light and the reflected light is led through mirrors and lens to the CCD where the optical to electrical conversion is performed converting the optical image data into an electrical analog signal This analog signal is changed to a digital signal which then performs various corrective processes necessary for image for mation After that an arithmetic operation is performed on the digital signal which is then transmitted to the data writing section Exposure lamp Carriage 1 Drive pulley Reflector Shading correction Rail for carriage 1 Original glass plate r Lh Le X CCD board Carriage 2 Lens SLG board CCD sensor Rail for carriage 2 Fig 6 1 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION 6 2 Construction The construction and purpose of the scanning system are described in this section 1 Original glass This is a glass for placing original The light from the exposure lamp
351. ting request The period of time from the printing request to this mode can be set in Setting Mode 08 or by an administrator Administrator setting procedure USER FUNCTIONS button gt ADMIN input of administrator s password gt GENERAL gt ENERGY SAVER Auto Power Save Mode Setting Mode 08 205 When the printing is not performed in a specified period of time default setting 15 min after the previous printing is completed the equipment enters to Auto Power Save Mode to turn OFF the IH Auto Shut Off Mode Setting Mode 08 206 When the printing is not performed in a specified period of time default setting 90 min after the equipment entered to Auto Power Save Mode the equipment then enters to Auto Shut Off Mode to turn OFF the IH coil Warming up Ready During printing Auto Power Save Mode Fixed time 08 205 IH coil OFF Auto SC gt Shut Fixed time 08 206 Mode C 4 Bt E 200 Temperature of fuser roller OFF Example e STUDIO850 IH coil ON 0 Fig 14 7 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 10 5 Fuser unit error status counter control the safety of the fusing section unit main CPU provides the following protection When the third C411 error has occurred after two consecutive C411 errors the coil is not turned and error C412 is displayed immediately eve
352. ting system lt ON OFF control by thermistor lt March 2005 3 11 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY PROCESS e STUDIO520 600 720 850 COPY PROCESS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 3 12 4 GENERAL OPERATION 4 1 Overview of Operation Copier operation Operation during warming up pre running and standby March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC Copying operation Automatic feed copying by pressing START button Bypass copying Interrupt copying e STUDIO520 600 720 850 GENERAL OPERATION 4 2 Description of Operation 4 2 1 Warming up 1 2 3 Initialization Turning the power ON The coil is turned ON The set number 1 reproduction ratio 100 and WAIT WARMING appears The fan motors are turned ON Initialization of the scanning system The carriage moves to the home position and stops The carriage moves to the peak detection position The exposure lamp EXP is turned ON Peak detection a white color is detected by the shading correction plate The exposure lamp EXP is turned OFF The carriage moves to the home position gt Initialization of the feeding system Each drawer tray goes up Initialization of the writing system The polygonal motor M2 rotates at a high speed e STUDIO850 The polygonal motor M2 rotates at a low speed e STUDIO520 600 720 The beam p
353. tion between the Equipment State and Operator s During READY Auto job start Scanning original Scanning original status During warming up reserved Ae printing out the copy Press ENERGY Switches to energy Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed SAVER button saving mode Press ACCESS Displays depart Displays depart Display not changed Display not changed button ment code entry screen when department management is available ment code entry screen when department management is available Press Displays print job list Display not changed Display not changed Displays print job list STATUS screen screen button Press Switches to Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed INTERRUPT interrupt mode LED blinking button Press FUNCTION CLEAR button after setting the copy mode Copy mode is cleared after the copy mode is set Copy mode is cleared after the copy mode is set Auto job start can celled Display not changed Press STOP button Display not changed Display not changed Auto job start cancelled Scanning or printing out stops and READY Press START to copy and MEMORY CLEAR are displayed Press CLEAR Number of printouts Number of printouts Display not changed Display not changed button after setting changes to 1 while changes to 1
354. tion conversion correction section Fig 7 2 The image processing section inputs the image signal from the scanning section and applies various image processing on the signal then transmits the output result to the writing section Images are processed by the SLG board SLG and PLG board PLG in this equipment The image signal read in the scanning function is processed in SLG board SLG and the printer image signal is processed in the PLG board PLG e STUDIO520 600 720 850 IMAGE PROCESSING March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 7 2 Configuration The following diagram shows the image processing section of this eguipment CCD board CCD CCD USB Network SLG board SLG conversion Shading correction E E Image processing section I SLG board SLG I I High guality image processing Image memory editing Editing processing Gamma correction Gradation processing Scanner high guality image processing External output system interface SYS board SYS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sorting group copy magazine sorting 2in1 4in1 single sided PLG board PLG l double sided image composition 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 date insertion sheet insertion mode etc Smoothing processing External input system interface Image area control Laser related control Printer high
355. tion roller rubber 14 Intermediate transport sensor 7 Intermediate transport roller 15 Registration sensor 8 Transport roller e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC HLALTI 7 17 19 18 21 Tq LE S i H j e FX 25 24 23 22 Fig 9 2 No Name No Name 16 3rd drawer transport roller Tandem LCF trans 22 End fence stop position sensor port roller 17 3rd drawer feed roller Tandem LCF feed roller 23 Standby side mis stacking sensor 18 3rd drawer separation roller Tandem LCF sep 24 Standby side empty sensor aration roller 19 3rd drawer pickup roller Tandem LCF pickup 25 End fence home position sensor roller 20 3rd drawer transport sensor 26 Tandem LCF 21 3rd drawer feed sensor March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 9 2 Functions 1 Pickup roller These rollers draw out paper from the bypass tray drawer or tandem LCF and send it to the feed roller 2 Feed roller This roller is placed agains
356. tops rotating when a specified number of counts is counter after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor S59 has detected the top side of the original The original empty sensor 560 detects whether or not there is a next original when a specified time passes after the registration sensor S55 has detected the trailing edge of the original If not the tray lift motor M38 starts to rotate to lower the tray and the original set signal is reset The tray lift motor M38 stops rotating when the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor 562 has detected the tray When the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section the SCN STR turns OFF and both the read and large original exit motors M36 M39 start to accelerate Fig 16 55 The large original exit motor M39 slows down when the trailing edge of the original has passed the Ath roller and proceeded a specified distance After the large original exit sensor S68 has detected the trailing edge of the original the read motor M36 stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor M39 stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance Then the original is nipped by the large original exit roller Fig 16 56 11 Start of 2nd original back side registering Same operation as 16 5 2 6 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER RADF Mar
357. tor M1 drives carriages 1 and 2 to their respective home positions The home position is detected when carriage 1 passes the carriage home position sensor S6 When the START key is pressed both carriages start to move and scan the original on the glass Scanning an original on the RADF Carriage 1 stays at the shading position during the shading correction and at the scanning position during the scanning operation 6 3 2 Two phase motor drive circuit fixed current type The scan motor M1 with the unipolar fixed current chopper method is driven by the stepping motor driver STK672 410 IC19 SLG board Scan motor MOTREF 0 1 MOTEN 0 6 MOTRST 0 11 Scanner CPU MOTDIRO Motor 4 hhh MOTCLK 1 driver 44 4 MOTMD1 0 a tot MOTMD2 0 MOTMD3 0 10 19 Fig 6 4 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 SCANNING SECTION cee Input signals Clock input MOTCLK 1 Input Motor is rotated by setting number of pulses Internal circuit of the motor driver works when the first pulse becomes ON and the last pulse becomes OFF Set the direction of MOTDIR 0 Input The direction of the motor rotation is determined by setting the motor rotation level of signal L Clockwise direction as seen from the output shaft H Counterclockwise direction as seen from the output shaft Note When the MOTMD3 0 is L do not ch
358. um motor Fig 11 25 I Cleaning brush drive motor M13 Drum separation finger solenoid SOL1 1 Take off the exhaust duct LU P 10 14 F Exhaust duct 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the stay Fig 11 26 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT 11 13 3 Disconnect 2 connectors remove 3 screws and take off the motor and solenoid with the bracket Remove 2 screws and take off the cleaning brush drive motor Drum separation finger solenoid Remove 2 screws and take off the drum sep aration finger solenoid e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT 11 14 Cleaning brush drive motor Fig 11 28 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 1 Construction This chapter describes about the following units related to the development process parts control cir cuit etc Toner cartridge drive unit Toner recycle unit Developer unit Developer material Mixer unit Paddle Transport sleeve magnetic roller Upper Lower developer sleeve Doctor blade Auto toner sensor Scattered toner recovery roller Developer unit drive section Upper developer sleeve Lower developer sleeve Transport sleeve Drum A A Doctor blade Mixer unit e Auto toner sensor Scattered toner recovery roller Fig 12 1
359. ush Recovered toner transport auger Drum recovery blade Image guality sensor Drum separation finger Fig 11 1 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT 11 1 11 2 Functions 1 Drum It is a cylindrical aluminum base on which an organic photosensitive material photoconductor is thinly applied A photoconductor becomes insulative high electric resistance at dark places out of the light while it becomes conductive low electric resistance under the light so it is called a photoconductor Drum cleaning blade It is made of polyurethane rubber It scrapes off the residual toner on the drum surface by being pressed against the drum with a certain pressure by the weight You can separate the blade from the drum by turning the cam manually in order to release the pressure Drum recovery blade It catches the toner scraped off by the drum cleaning blade Recovered toner transport auger It corrects and transfers the toner scraped off by the drum cleaning blade and caught by the drum recovery blade The toner is transferred to the recycle unit to be reused Drum separation finger It separates paper not separated from the drum on the transfer belt Image quality sensor S14 It detects the adhered toner amount from the reflective rate for the test pattern formed on the drum in order
360. ve 1 Remove 1 screw and then the pole position fixing bushing on the rear side Screw Pole position fixing bushing 452 2 Remove the gear E ring bearing on the front side and then take off the transport Bearing E ring Gear sleeve 3 Replace 1 oil seal pressed into the front side of the frame if necessary Procedure for replacing an oil seal LU P 12 27 Fig 12 47 Transport sleeve Fig 12 41 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 25 J Mixer 1 Take off the auto toner sensor LU P 12 21 F Auto toner sensor 512 2 Remove 2 E rings and then 2 gears on the rear side 3 Remove 2 bearings and replace 2 oil seals pressed into the frame if necessary Note Apply grease Alvania No 2 all around the mixer shaft before installing the bearings 4 Take off the cover 5 Remove 2 E rings 2 screws and then take off the mixer nozzle on the front side 6 Pull out 2 mixers 7 Replace the oil seal pressed into the mixer nozzle if necessary Procedure for replacing an oil seal GQ P 12 27 Fig 12 47 Mixer nozzle Fig 12 43 K Paddle 1 Take off the mixer 22 P 12 26 Mixer 2 Remove 1 E ring the gear and parallel pin on the rear side Fig 12 44 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOS
361. ve 1 C ring front A C ring front 442 Fig 14 38 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 27 13 Take off the fuser roller covering it with paper and such not to make scars on it Fuser roller Fig 14 39 I Pressure roller 1 Take off the fuser roller LU P 14 26 Fuser roller 2 Take off the pressure roller with its bearing 3 Remove 2 bearings and 2 collars from the pressure roller Pressure roller Fig 14 40 J Web detection sensor 58 1 Take off the fuser unit LU P 14 18 B Fuser unit 2 Take off the cleaning web unit LU P 14 19 Cleaning web unit Clean ing web 3 Take off the fuser unit front cover 4 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw to take off the web detection sensor with its bracket 5 Release the latch of the sensor to take off the web detection sensor Web detection sensor Screw Fig 14 41 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 14 28 K Web motor M4 Fuser transport sensor 59 1 Take off the fuser unit LU P 14 18 B Fuser unit 2 Take off the cleaning web unit LU P 14 19 Cleaning web unit Clean ing web 3 Remove 2 screws to take off the fuser unit front cover Fuser un
362. ver IC These pulse signals are formed based on the reference clock signal REVMC 0 and out put only when the enable signal REVME 0 is L level Also the rotation speed or direction of the motor can be switched by changing the output timing of each pulse signal The rotation direction can be switched by the motor rotation direction switch signal REVCW 0 LGC board 57 REVMC 0 MOT2 RV board REVCW 0 RVMVR 0 VVY REVME 0 963 i 5 Motor driver 0 Reverse motor 0 0 Fig 15 7 Reverse motor drive signal Signal Motor status REVMC 0 REVME 0 RVMVR 0 REVCW 0 Pulse signal L L L Forward rotation when accelerating decelerating L L H Reverse rotation when accelerating decelerating L H L Forward rotation at a constant speed L H H Reverse rotation at a constant speed H Stop e STUDIO520 600 720 850 EXIT REVERSE SECTION 15 10 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 15 7 Disassembly Replacement Exi Reverse unit 1 Take off the left lower cover exit cover LU P 2 46 J Left lower cover Exit cover 2 Open the exit reverse unit and remove 1 screw Exit Reverse unit Fig 15 8 3 Disconnect 1 connector Then take off the exi reverse unit by lifting it Up
363. ver sheet mode be used with Cover Sheet mode and inserter cover sheet mode or inserter cover sheet mode feature are selected 70 Only two paper sources Displayed when all the sheet inser Release any of three modes can be used with Sheet tion mode tab insertion mode and Insertion feature inserter sheet insertion mode are selected 71 ADD PAPER TO Displayed when the inserter mode is Release the inserter mode INSERTER FEEDER valid and the START button is Set papers on the inserter tray pressed without papers on the tray 72 Set the paper source for Displayed when the tab paper mode Select the 2nd drawer property to the Tab sheet is valid and the tab drawer is not tab to release this state selected 73 Fuser cleaning web Displayed when the fuser unit clean Replace the cleaning web decreased ing web gets decreased This message is set not to be dis played at shipment but the set ting can be changed at the setting mode 08 941 74 Time for periodic mainte Displayed when the fuser unit clean Replace the cleaning web nance ing web gets run out Fuser cleaning web 75 Tab size A4 LT only Displayed when the tab paper mode Select A4 or LT for tab paper is valid and other than A4 LT is selected for the tab paper size 76 Time for periodic mainte PM cycle Maintenance and inspection are per nance e Displayed at the time for mainte nance Copying is available formed by qualified service techni
364. voltage sections such as the chargers transfer belt IH control circuit developer high voltage transformer exposure lamp control inverter inverter for the LCD back light and power supply unit Especially the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors etc on them even after the power is turned OFF Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places e g rotating operating sections such as gears belts pulleys fans and laser beam exit of the laser optical unit Becareful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON be sure not to touch live sections and rotating operating sections Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam Use designated jigs and tools Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished 3 Important Service Parts for Safety The breaker door switch fuse thermostat thermofuse thermistor IC RAMSs including lithium batteries etc are particularly important for safety Be sure to handle install them properly If these parts are short circuited and their functions become ineffective they may result in fatal accidents such as burnout Do not allow a short circuit or do not use the parts not recommended by
365. w ered to a certain level Detects that there is no toner left in the developer unit March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 11 2 Configuration of the auto toner circuit Developer unit Auto toner sensor Detects the toner density Toner cartridge empty sensor Detects that the new toner is almost consumed The toner cartridge is empty Control section Controls each section to maintain the toner density of the developer material at a constant ratio Control panel Displays a status that the toner cartridge is nearly empty New toner supply section The new toner supply motor and the new toner transport motor in this section supply the new toner to the developer unit from the toner cartridge Recycle toner supply section The hopper motor in this section supplies the recycle toner to the developer unit from the recycle toner hopper Control section SYS board 1C17 System CPU Control panel 1C16 LCD panel North Bridge Temperature humidity sensor LGC board New toner supply section Toner cartridge Recycle toner 58 supply section Main CPU toner hopper 1 AID converter Hopper motor Recycle New toner transport EE motor Toner density signal Auto toner sensor 1C18
366. web 3 Remove 2 screws to take off the fuser unit front cover e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 22 Fuser unit cover front Fig 14 23 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Open 2 and remove 2 connectors 5 Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket Note When installing the bracket be sure that the harnesses are not caught 6 Pull out the IH coil Note When installing the coil be sure that the marks C and S of the power supply har nesses come at the left side Fig 14 25 E Upper separation finger unit Upper separation finger 1 Take off the fuser unit LU P 14 18 B Fuser unit 2 Take off the cleaning web unit LU P 14 19 Cleaning web unit Clean ing web 3 Remove 2 screws to take off the fuser unit front cover 4 Remove 2 stepped screws Then take off the upper separation finger unit and a crank bracket by sliding them to the rear side Screw Upper separation finger unit Screw Crank plate Fig 14 26 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 FUSER UNIT 14 23 5 Remove the spring to take off the upper sep aration fingers Upper separation finger Fig 14 27 F Lower separation finger unit Lower separation finger 1 Take off the fuser unit LU P 14 18 B Fuser unit e SC 4 E93 OH 2 R
367. wer tandem LCE 3rd drawer the tandem LCF feed sensor S47 CST4 SNR Detecting the presence of the 4th drawer Fig 2 21 7 18 4th drawer detection sen sor Only for JPD NAD SAD model of all equip ments and TWD model of e STUDIO600 720 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE Small original reverse sen sor original at the small original reverse section Symbol Name Function Remarks 548 CST4 BTM SNR Detecting the lowering status of the tray in Fig 2 21 30 26 4th drawer bottom sensor the 4th drawer Only for JPD NAD SAD model of all equip ments TWD model of e STUDIO600 720 549 CST4 EMP SNR Detecting the presence of the paper in the Fig 2 21 7 18 4th drawer empty sensor Ath drawer Only for JPD NAD SAD model of all eguip ments TWD model of e STUDIO600 720 550 CST4 TRY SNR Detecting the lifting status of the tray in the Fig 2 21 7 18 4th drawer tray up sensor 4th drawer Only for JPD NAD SAD model of all equip ments and TWD model of e STUDIO600 720 51 CST4 TR SNR Detecting the paper transport at the paper Fig 2 21 7 18 4th drawer transport sen feeding system of the 4th drawer sor Only for JPD NAD SAD model of all equip ments and TWD model of e STUDIO600 720 52 CST4 FEED SNR Detecting the paper feeding status of the Fig 2 21 7 18 4th drawer feed sensor 4th dr
368. while the copy mode the setting remains the setting remains unchanged after the unchanged after the copy mode is set copy mode is set Press CLEAR Number keyed in Number keyed in Display not changed Display not changed button after keying changes to 1 after changes to 1 after in numbers being entered being entered digital keys Press Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed MONITOR PAUSE Press FAX button Displays FAX Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed screen Press COPY Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed button Press SCAN Displays SCAN Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed button screen Press e FILING Displays e FILING Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Press EXTENSION Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed button Press TEMPLATE Displays TEM Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed button PLATE screen Press USER Displays USER Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed FUNCTIONS button FUNCTIONS screen Press HELP button Displays HELP Displays HELP Display not changed Display not changed screen screen March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 CONTROL PANEL During READY Auto job start Scanning original Scanning or
369. ws to take off the flange on the front side 8 Pull out the drum upward lt lt Precaution when installing the drum shaft gt gt sure that the gap plate is not caught with the drum shaft e sure to install the drum shaft and cleaner frame without a gap e No foreign matter must be attached on the cleaner stay e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT Fig 11 9 Fig 11 10 Cleaner stay Gap plate Fig 11 11 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC C Cleaning blade 1 Take off the drum P 11 7 B Drum thermistor THM5 and Drum 2 Remove 4 screws to take off the cleaner top cover Fig 11 12 3 Remove 1 screw to take off the cleaning blade by holding both sides of the plate Note Do not touch the edge of the cleaning blade Cleaning blade Screw Fig 11 13 D Recovery blade 1 Take off the cleaning blade LU P 11 9 Cleaning blade 2 Separate the recovery blade gently Recovery blade Fig 11 14 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DRUM CLEANER UNIT Notes 1 When replacing the recovery blade be sure to separate it completely because it is attached with the two sided adhesive tape 2 Attach the recovery blade by pushing its lower edge against the step of the clean
370. xthe link plate securely by pressing the rear and front side of the plate to the direction of the arrow C Cleaning brush 1 Take off the transfer unit LU P 13 6 A Transfer unit 2 Take off the transfer belt unit LU P 13 7 B Transfer belt 3 Remove 1 clip and then 3 gears Notes 1 There are latches on gear a and c Remove gear a b and then c 2 When installing the gear be sure that the latch is securely inserted into the groove of the shaft 4 Remove 1 screw and then the plate spring 5 Slide the transport guide to the rear side to pull it out upward 6 Remove 1 clip and then the bushing 7 Push the brush to the rear side take off the shaft on the front side and then pull it out to the upper front side Note Do not touch the surface of the brush e STUDIO520 600 720 850 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT Transfer belt Fig 13 9 Transport guide 1 Screw Plate spring T Lp p Cle Ke b Fig 13 10 Cleaning brush Fig 13 11 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC D Cleaning blade Take off the transfer unit LU P 13 6 A Transfer unit Remove 3 screws to take off the cleaning blade 1 2 Notes 1 When installing the blade fix the boss on both sides with the screws 2 careful not to touch scratch or age the blade 3 After installing the blade
371. y motor New toner supply motor Connector A 4 Toner cartridge empty sensor 510 1 Remove 2 screws and then take off the toner cartridge empty sensor with the har ness 2 Disconnect 1 connector from the toner car tridge empty sensor Note Be careful not to damage the sensor when connecting and disconnecting the connector Toner cartridge empty sensor pa Fig 12 13 A 5 New toner transport motor M6 1 Remove 3 screws to take off the top cover Top cover Screw Fig 12 14 e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC 12 16 2 Disconnect 1 connector to release the ness from the clamp Connector Connector 3 Remove 2 screws to take off the inner cover 4 Remove 1 screw 5 Remove 3 screus to take off the toner drive section Fig 12 16 6 Disconnect 1 connector to release the har ness from the clamp Connector 7 Remove 2 screws to take off the motor with e bracket Gear Fig 12 17 March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO520 600 720 850 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 17 8 Remove 2 E rings and then 2 gears 9 Remove 2 screws to take off the new toner Gear New toner transport motor transport motor Fig 12 18 B Toner recycle unit B 1 Toner recycle unit 1 Take off the toner cartridge drive unit LU P 12 15 A Toner cartridge drive unit
372. y produces a charge in the layer the amount of the charge produced is proportional to the energy and irradiating time The charges produced in the light receiving section are then sent to the transfer section where they are shifted by the transfer clock from left to right as shown in the figure below and are finally output from the CCD At this time to increase the transfer speed of the CCD image signals in the even number and odd number elements are sepa rated and output in parallel via two channels Transfer clock Light energy Transfer section gt Layer 1 2 43 4 47497 7498 47499 7500 Layer Light receiving section Details of light receiving section Y M Transfer section D Shift register Transfer clock Fig 6 9 6 5 2 Shading correction Signal voltages read by the CCD have the following characteristics 1 Light source has variation in its light distribution 2 Since the light beam reflected from the original is converged using a lens the light path is the short est at the center of the CCD and the longest at ends This causes difference in the amount of light reaching the CCD i e the ligh

SERVICE MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents